Human Resource Management, 16th edition Gary Dessler Solution Manual

Instructor’s Resource Manual for Human Resource Management Revised by: Susan Leshnower Human Resource Management Sixteenth Edition

Gary Dessler

Part One Introduction Chapter 1 Introduction to Human Resource Management Lecture Outline: What Is Human Resource Management?

Why Is HR Management Important to All Managers?

Line and Staff Aspects of Human Resource Management Line Managers’ Human Resource Management Responsibilities The Human Resource Department The Trends Shaping Human Resource Management Workforce Demographics and Diversity Trends Trends in Jobs People Do HR and the Gig Economy: On-Demand Workers Improving Performance: HR as a Profit Center Globalization Trends Economic Trends Technology Trends Important Components of Today’s New Human Resource Management A Brief History of Personnel/Human Resource Management Distributed HR and the New Human Resource Management Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media A Quick Summary Strategic Human Resource Management Improving Performance: The Strategic Context Performance and Human Resource Management Sustainability and Human Resource Management Employee Engagement and Human Resource Management Ethics and Human Resource Management The New Human Resource Manager HR Manager Certification HR and the Manager’s Human Resource Philosophy The Plan of This Book The Basic Themes and Features Practical Tools for Every Manager Chapter Contents Overview Part 1: Introduction Part 2: Recruitment, Placement, and Talent Management Part 3: Training and Development Part 4: Compensation Part 5: Enrichment Topics in Human Resource Management The Topics Are Interrelated Chapter Review ..

Chapter 1: Introduction to Human Resource Management

1-2

Where Are We Now… The purpose of this chapter explains what Human Resource Management is, and why it’s important to all managers. We’ll see that human resource management activities such as hiring, training, appraising, compensation, and developing employees are part of every manager’s job.

We’ll see that human resource management is also a separate function. The main topics we’ll cover will include what is human resource management, the trends shaping human resource management, human resource management today, the new human resource manager, and the plan of the book.

Interesting Issues: For many people today Upwork (www.upwork.com/)) symbolizes much of what’s new in human resource management. Millions of freelancers from graphic designers to translators, accountants, writers, and customer service agents register on this site. Employers then use Upwork to find, screen, hire, and pay the talent they need in more than 180 countries.

Learning Objectives: 1-1.

1-2.

1-3.

1-4.

1-5.

Explain what human resource management is and how it relates to the management process.

Briefly discuss and illustrate the important trends influencing human resource management.

Briefly describe six important components or pillars of human resource management today..

List at least four important human resource manager competencies.

Outline the plan of this book.

Annotated Outline: I. What Is Human Resource Management? – to understand what human resource management is, it’s useful to start with what managers do. Most writers agree that managing involves performing five basic functions: planning, organizing, staffing, leading, and controlling. These functions in total represent the management process.

A. Why Is HR Management Important to All Managers?

1. Avoid Personnel Mistakes – managers don’t want to make personnel mistakes, like not having employees doing their best, hiring the wrong person for the job, experiencing high turnover, having to be in court due to discriminatory actions, being cited for unsafe practices, letting a lack of training undermine department effectiveness, or committing any unfair labor practices.

2. Improving Profits and Performance – to help ensure that you get results, through people.

3. You May Spend Some Time as an HR Manager 4. HR for Small Business

..

Chapter 1: Introduction to Human Resource Management

1-3

B. Line and Staff Aspects of Human Resource Management – in organizations, line authority traditionally gives managers the right to issue orders to other managers or employees. Line authortiy creates a superior (order giver) – subordinate (order receiver) relationship. Staff authority gives a manager the right to advise other managers or employees. It creates an advisory relationship.

C. Line Managers’ Human Resource Management Responsibilities – line managers do have many human resources duties such as the following: a. Placing the right person in the right job b. Starting new employees in the organization (orientation) c. Training employees for jobs that are new to them d. Improving the job performance of each person e. Gaining creative cooperation and developing smooth working relationships f. Interpreting the company’s policies and procedures g. Controlling labor costs h. Developing the abilities of each person i. Creating and maintaining departmental morale j. Protecting employees’ health and physical conditions D. The Human Resource Department – provides specialized assistance and knowledge. Job duties include: recruiters, EEO representatives, job analysts, compensation managers, training specialists, and labor relations specialists.

1. New Approaches to Organizing HR a. Technology – adopting new HR technology tools such as online training portals b. Shared Services HR – teams that offer services through intranets or centralized call centers c. Corporate HR – teams within a company that assist top management in top-level issues d. Embedded HR – teams that have a HR generalist (also known as “relationship managers” or “HR business partners”) assigned to functional department e. Centers of expertise – specialized HR consulting firms within the company II. The Trends Shaping Human Resource Management – trends are occurring in the environment of human resource management that are changing how employers get their human resource management task done. These trends include workforce trends, trends in how people work, technological trends, and globalization and economic trends.

A. Workforce Demographics and Diversity Trends – the composition of the workforce will continue to change over the next few years; specifically it will continue to become more diverse with more women, minority group members, and older workers in the workforce.

B. Trends in Jobs People Do – work has shifted from manufacturing jobs to service jobs in North America and Western Europe. Today, over two-thirds of the U.S. workforce is employed in producing and delivering services, not products.

..

Chapter 1: Introduction to Human Resource Management

1-4

1. On-Demand Workers 2. Human Capital 3. Improving Performance: Boosting Customer Service C. Globalization Trends – refers to companies extending their sales, ownership, and/or manufacturing to new markets abroad.

D. Economic Trends – Figure 1-2 shows the gross national product (GNP), a measure of the United States of America’s total output. Figure 1-3 shows that during this period, home prices leaped as much as 20% per year. Unemployment remained docile at about 4.7%. Then around 2007-2008, GNP fell and home prices dropped by 10% or more. The unemployment rate had fallen from a high of more than 10% a few years ago to around 5% in 2015, and to about 4% in 2018, and GNP was growing at about 4% in 2018. The Bureau of Labor Statistics projects that gross domestic product (GDP) will increase by 2% annually from 2016 to 2026, slower than the 3% or higher that prevailed from the mid-1990s through the mid-2000s.

1. Labor Force Trends – the labor force in America is growing more slowly than expected. Mostly because with baby boomers aging, the “labor force participation rate” is declining—in other words, the percent of the population that wants to work is declining.

2. The Unbalanced Labor Force –although unemployment rate is dropping, it’s doing so in part because fewer people are looking for jobs (remember the shrinking labor participation rate). Demands for workers is unbalanced.

E. Technology Trends – it may be techology that most characterizes the trends shaping human resources management today. Five main types of digital technologies are driving this transfer of functionality from HR professionals to automation.

1. Social Media – employers increasingly use tools such as Twitter, Facebook, and LinkedIn to recruit new employees.

2. Mobile Applications – used by employers, for instance, to monitor employee location and to provide digital photos at the facility clock-in location to identify workers.

3. Gaming – enables employers to inject features such as feedback, fun, and objectives into training, performance appraisal, and recruiting.

4. Cloud Computing – a more intutive user interface that enables employers to monitor and report on things like a team’s goal attainment and to provide real-time evaluative feedback.

5. Data Analytics – uses statistical techniques, algorithms, and problemsolving to identify relationships among data for the purpose of solving particular problems; it is also called talent analytics.

6. Artificial intelligence (AI) – basically means using computers to do tasks in human-like ways.

7. Augmented reality (AR) – transforms huge amounts of data and superimposes digital summaries and images on the physical world.

III. Today’s New Human Resource Manager A. A Brief History of Personnel/Human Resource Management – “personnel management” is not new. Ancient armies and organized efforts always required

..

Chapter 1: Introduction to Human Resource Management

1-5

attracting, selecting, training, and motivating workers. But tasks like these were mostly just part of every manager’s job, something that lasted in most countries until the late 1800s. By 1900, employers set up the first “hiring offices.” New union laws in the 1930s added “Helping the employer deal with unions” to personnel’s tasks. New equal employment laws in the 1960s made employers more reliant on personnel management to avoid discrimination claims. By the 1970s, globalization made gaining a competitive edge through engaged employees, and therefore personnel management, important. Today economic and demographic trends make finding, hiring, and motivating employees more challenging, while more high-tech jobs means employers must manage employees’ knowledge, skills, and expertise (human capital).

Technological trends including mobile and social media are changing how employers recruit, select, train, appraise, and motivate employees. In a sense, a new human resource management is emerging, one built on six main components or pillars.

B. Distributed HR and the New Human Resource Management – more human resource management tasks are being redistributed from a central HR department to the company’s employees and line managers.

C. Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media – the new human resource management tools that are changing how people look for jobs, and how companies recruit, retain, pay, and train employees. Examples are career sites, recruitment sites, and talent analytics tools.

D. A Quick Summary – Figure 1-4 illustrates a summary of what trends mean for human resource management.

E. Strategic Human Resource Management – today’s human resources managers are more involved in longer-term, strategic “big picture” issues.

F. Improving Performance: The Strategic Context – illustrates building L.L.Bean.

Today’s employers want their HR managers to put in place practices that will produce the employee behaviors that help the company achieve its strategic aims.

G. Performance and Human Resource Management – employers expect their human resources manager/"people experts” to spearhead employee performanceimprovement efforts. There are three levers that can be applied: HR department lever, employee cost lever, and strategic results lever.

1. HR and Performance Measurement – metrics are used to validate.

2. HR and Evidence-Based Management – the use of data, facts, analytics, scientific rigor, critical evaluation, and critically evaluated research/case studies to support human resource management proposals, decisions, practices, and conclusions. It’s using the best-available evidence in making decisions about the human resources practices being focused on. a. Actual measurements b. Existing data c. Research studies 3. HR and Adding Value – boosting profits and performance.

H. Sustainability and Human Resource Management – company’s efforts being measured not only by performance but also whether they are “substainable,” which means they are judged not just on profits, but on their environmental and social performance as well.

4. Employee Engagement and Human Resource Management – employee engagement refers to being psychologically involved in, connected to, and committed to getting one’s

..

Chapter 1: Introduction to Human Resource Management

1-6

jobs done. Engaged employees “experience a high level of connectivity with their work tasks,” and therefore work hard to accomplish their task-related goals.

5. Ethics and Human Resource Management – ethics means the standards someone uses to decide what his or her conduct should be. Many ethical issues—such as workplace safety—are HR-related, and HR plays a big role in cultivating organizational ethics today.

IV. The New Human Resource Manager – it’s more complicated being a human resource manager today. It requires new competencies and skills. The Society of Human Resources Management (SHRM) has itemized the behaviors and competencies (with definitions) that today’s HR manager should be able to exhibit: 1. Leadership & Navigation – the ability to direct and contribute to initiatives and processes within the organization.

2. Ethical Practice – the ability to integrate core values, integrity, and accountability throughout all organizational and business practices.

3. Business Acumen – the ability to understand and apply information with which to contribute to the organization’s strategic plan.

4. Relationship Management – the ability to manage interactions to provide service and to support the organization.

5. Consultation – the ability to provide guidance to organizational stakeholders.

6. Critical Evaluation – the ability to interpret information with which to make business decisions and recommendations.

7. Global & Cultural Effectiveness – the ability to value and consider the perspective and backgrounds for all parties.

8. Communication – the ability to effectively exchange information with stakeholders.

9. SHRM also says HR Managers are to have command of the basic functional areas of HR such as the following: a. Functional Area #1: HR Strategic Planning b. Functional Area #2: Talent Acquisition c. Functional Area #3: Employee Engagement & Retention d. Functional Area #4: Learning & Development e. Functional Area #5: Total Rewards f. Functional Area #6: Structure of the HR Function g. Functional Area #7: Organizational Effectiveness & Development h. Functional Area #8: Workforce Management i. Functional Area #9: Employee & Labor Relations j. Functional Area #10: Technology Management k. Functional Area #11: HR in the Global Context l. Functional Area #12: Diversity & Inclusion m. Functional Area #13: Risk Management n. Functional Area #14: Corporate Social Responsibility o. Functional Area #15: U.S. Employment Laws & Regulations A. HR Manager Certification – certifications are used to demonstrate mastery of contemporary human resource management knowledge and competencies. HR Certification Institute (HRCI) is an independent certifying organization for human resource professionals. HRCI awards several credentials:

..

Chapter 1: Introduction to Human Resource Management

1-7

1. Professional in Human Resources (PHR) 2. Senior Professional in Human Resources (SPHR) B. HR and the Manager’s Human Resources Philosophy – the basic assumptions you make about people are: Can they be trusted? Do they like their work? And other assumptions together comprise the philosophy of human resources. Another way the philosophy is created is it should evolve as knowledge, and experience is accumulated.

Also the organization’s top management molds the philosophy.

V. The Plan of This Book A. The Basic Themes and Features B. Practical Tools for Every Manager 1. Responsibility of every manager 2. Use human resource management techniques to improve performance, productivity, and profitability. a. Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses b. Improving Performance: HR as Profit Center c. Improving Performance: HR Practices Around the Globe d. Improving Performance Through HRIS e. Diversity Counts 3. How digital and high-tech trends are shaping human resource management 4. Understand how the employer’s human resource management policies and practices produce the employee skills and performance the company needs to achieve its strategic aims.

A. HR is the responsibility of every manager. a. HR managers must defend plans and contributions in measurable terms. b. HR systems must be designed to achieve the company’s strategic aims.

VI. Chapter Contents Overview Part 1: Introduction Chapter 1: Introduction to Human Resource Management Chapter 2: Equal Opportunity and the Law Chapter 3: Human Resource Management Strategy and Analysis Part 2: Recruitment, Placement, and Talent Management Chapter 4: Job Analysis and Talent Management Process Chapter 5: Personnel Planning and Recruiting Chapter 6: Employee Testing and Selection Chapter 7: Interviewing Candidates Part 3: Training and Development Chapter 8: Training and Developing Employees Chapter 9: Performance Management and Appraisal Chapter 10: Managing Careers and Retention Part 4: Compensation Chapter 11: Establishing Strategic Pay Plans Chapter 12: Pay for Performance and Financial Incentives

..

Chapter 1: Introduction to Human Resource Management

1-8

Chapter 13: Benefits and Services Part 5: Enrichment Topics in Human Resource Management Chapter 14: Build Positive Employee Relations Chapter 15: Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining Chapter 16: Safety, Health, and Risk Management Chapter 17: Managing Global Human Resources Chapter 18: Managing Human Resources in Small and Entrepreneurial Firms The Topics Are Interrelated

Chapter Review Chapter Section Summaries: 1-1.

1-2.

1-3.

1-4.

1-5.

All managers should be able to answer, What is human resource management, and why is it important.

The trends shaping human resource management.

In terms of the components or pillars of human resource management today, employers expect human resource management teams to focus on big-picture issue.

To do so, the human resource managers need new competencies.

Understanding the overall plan of this book.

Discussion Questions: 1-1. Explain what HR management is and how it relates to the management process.

To understand what human resource management is, it’s useful to start with what managers do. Most writers agree that managing involves performing five basic functions: planning, organizing, staffing, leading, and controlling. These functions in total represent the management process.

1-2. Give examples of how HR management concepts and techniques can be of use to all managers.

HR management concepts and techniques can help all managers to ensure that they get results – through others. These concepts and techniques also help managers avoid common personnel mistakes such as: hiring the wrong person; experiencing high turnover; finding your people not doing their best; wasting time with useless interviews; facing lawsuits because of discriminatory actions; receiving citations under federal occupational safety laws for unsafe practices; having some employees think their salaries are unfair and inequitable relative to others in the organization; allowing a lack of training to undermine a department’s effectiveness, and committing any unfair labor practices.

..

Chapter 1: Introduction to Human Resource Management

1-9

1-3. Illustrate the HR management responsibilities of line and staff managers.

Line managers are someone's boss; they direct the work of subordinates in pursuit of accomplishing the organization's basic goals. Some examples of the HR responsibilities of line managers are: placing the right person on the job; starting new employees in the organization (orientation); training employees for jobs that are new to them; improving the job performance of each person; gaining creative cooperation and developing smooth working relationships; interpreting the company’s policies and procedures; controlling labor costs; developing the abilities of each person; creating and maintaining department morale; and protecting employees’ health and physical conditions. Staff managers assist and advise line managers in accomplishing these basic goals. They do, however, need to work in partnership with each other to be successful. Some examples of the HR responsibilities of staff managers include assistance in hiring, training, evaluating, rewarding, counseling, promoting, and firing of employees, and administering various benefits programs.

1-4. Compare the authority of line and staff managers. Give examples of each.

Line and Staff Aspects of Human Resource Management – in organizations, line authority traditionally gives managers the right to issue orders to other managers or employees. Line authortiy creates a superior (order giver) – subordinate (order receiver) relationship. Staff authority gives a manager the right to advise other managers or employees. It creates an advisory relationship.

Line managers have many human resources duties such as the following: a. Placing the right person in the right job b. Starting new employees in the organization (orientation) c. Training employees for jobs that are new to them d. Improving the job performance of each person e. Gaining creative cooperation and developing smooth working relationships f. Interpreting the company’s policies and procedures g. Controlling labor costs h. Developing the abilities of each person i. Creating and maintaining departmental morale j. Protecting employees’ health and physical conditions Staff managers assist and advise line managers in accomplishing these basic goals.

Individual and Group Activities: 1-5. Working individually or in groups, develop outlines showing how trends like workforce diversity, technological innovation, globalization, and changes in the nature of work have affected the college or university you are now attending.

Present in class.

The list might include items such as the growth of adult (non-traditional aged) students, the use of computer and communications technology, diversity issues, and others.

..

Chapter 1: Introduction to Human Resource Management

1-10

1-6. Working individually or in groups, contact the HR manager of a local bank. Ask the HR manager how he or she is working as a strategic partner to manage human resources, given the bank’s strategic goals and objectives. Back in class, discuss the responses of the different HR managers.

The students should ask the HR manager to discuss how his/her role as a strategic partner is improving the bank’s performance, and if the bank’s culture is more innovative and flexible as a result of the strategic partnership.

1-7. Working individually or in groups, interview an HR manager. Based on that interview, write a short presentation regarding HR's role today in building competitive organizations.

The responses here will, of course, depend upon the organization and HR manager interviewed. Hopefully, items such as workforce diversity, technological trends, globalization, high-performance work systems, HR metrics, or ethics will be mentioned.

1-8: Working individually or in groups, bring several business publications such as Bloomberg’s Business Week and The Wall Street Journal to class or access them in class via the Web. Based on their contents, compile a list entitled, “What HR Managers and Departments Do Today.”

The students should look for articles and advertisements that deal with any of the following topics: conducting job analyses, planning labor needs, and recruiting job candidates; selecting job candidates; orienting, training, and developing employees; managing wages and salaries; providing incentives and benefits; appraising performance; communicating; training and developing managers; building employee commitment; equal opportunity; affirmative action; employee health and safety; and labor relations.

1-9. Based on your personal experiences, list 10 examples showing how you used (or could have used) human resource management techniques at work or school.

Depending on the degree of their work experience, students will cite a wide range of examples, possibly including some of the following: 1) situations where they have improved the efficiency of their work through the use of technology made available to them through human resource systems; 2) employed the services of non-traditional workers (or been employed as a non-traditional worker); 3) developed metrics to measure how they have added value in terms of human resource contributions; 4) kept themselves abreast of employment laws in order to minimize risk to their company; 5) utilized selfservice HR technology; 6) employed high-performance work system concepts in their job/department.

1-10. Laurie Siegel, former senior vice president of human resources for Tyco International, took over her job just after numerous charges forced the company’s previous board of directors and top executives to leave the firm. Hired by new CEO Edward Breen, Siegel had to tackle numerous difficult problems starting the moment she assumed office. For example, she had to help hire a new management team. She

..

Chapter 1: Introduction to Human Resource Management

1-11

had to do something about what the outside world viewed as a culture of questionable ethics at her company. And she had to do something about the company’s topmanagement compensation plan, which many felt contributed to the allegations by some that some former company officers had used the company as a sort of private ATM. Siegel came to Tyco after a very impressive career. For example, she had been head of executive compensation at Allied Signal, and was a graduate of the Harvard Business School. But, as strong as her background was, she obviously had her work cut out for her when she took the senior vice president of HR position at Tyco.

Working individually or in groups, conduct an Internet search and/or do library research to answer the following questions: What human resource managementrelated steps did Siegel take to help get Tyco back on the right track? Do you think she took the appropriate steps? Why or why not? What, if anything might you have done differently if you had been in Ms. Siegel’s position?

Tyco’s top executives, (the Chairman/Chief Executive as well as the CFO) had been accused of playing fast and loose with corporate accounting and of using the company’s coffers as personal piggy banks. Upon taking office, Breen fired the entire board of directors and then dismissed the entire headquarters’ staff of 125 people. He recruited a new, completely independent board of directors and hired a CFO, an ombudsman, and a vice president of corporate governance, who report directly to the board.

Breen’s directive to Siegel was that her first priority be setting up corporate-governance and compensation systems and controls, then to transition "to really driving the talent machine." Siegel’s first step was to draft a strict company code of ethics. She then arranged to have it taught simultaneously at a special ethics training day to every Tyco employee. She advised the compensation committee on how to replace Tyco’s old salary and bonus policy, which rewarded acquisition-based company growth. The new system is based on measurable company performance. Bonuses and restricted-stock grants are linked to objective measurements, including each business unit’s earnings before interest and taxes, and Tyco International’s overall performance. Top officers are required to hold company stock worth 3 to 10 times their yearly base salary. They must hold 75 percent of their restricted stock and stock options until a minimum level has been reached. Above that level, they must hold 25 percent for at least three years. Severance pay is limited to two times an individual’s yearly salary plus bonus. Post-handshake perks, like consulting contracts and free transportation in company aircraft, have been abolished.

As a result of the above steps, Tyco is now aiming for higher marks in ethics. It has written and circulated a multi-page ethics policy, and hired more than 100 internal auditors to enforce it. It has a new corporate ombudsman to address employee concerns about ethics and policies. All of Tyco’s employees attended mandatory one-day ethics seminars, and more detailed programs are in the works for its 25,000 managers. In the past, the practice was to award huge bonuses to anyone who “somehow drove the numbers up.” The new system assesses how well managers set and meet goals. As a result, Tyco’s bonus budget for the fiscal year 2003 was reduced by $90 million.

..

Chapter 1: Introduction to Human Resource Management

1-12

Students will probably agree that, in general, Siegel took the appropriate steps, and the turnaround and recovery of Tyco’s finances, profits, and stock prices are testimony to the effectiveness of her approach. Suggestions for what Siegel should do moving forward may include continued ethics training, HR strategies, and scorecards that drive the appropriate employee behaviors in support of the business strategy.

1-11. Appendices A and B at the end of this book list the knowledge someone studying for the HRCI (Appendix A) or SHRM (Appendix B) certification exam needs to have in each area of human resource management (such as Strategic Management and Workforce Planning). In groups of several students, do four things: (1) review Appendix A and/or Appendix B; (2) identify the material in this chapter that relates to the Appendix A and/or Appendix B required knowledge lists; (3) write four multiple-choice exam questions on this material that you believe would be suitable for inclusion in the HRCI exam and/or the SHRM exam; and (4) if time permits, have someone from your team post your team’s questions in front of the class, so that students in all teams can answer the exam questions created by the other teams.

This question can be assigned as an out-of-class preject to be done in teams.

Experiential Exercise: HR and “The Profit” Purpose: The purpose of this exercise is to provide practice in identifying and applying the basic concepts of human resource management by illustrating how managers use these techniques in their day-to-day jobs.

Required Understanding: Be thoroughly familiar with the material in this chapter, and with at least one or two episodes of CNBC’s The Profit with Marcus Lemonis http://www.tv.com/shows/the-profit/watch/. (Access a library of past episodes at URLs as http://www.cnbc.com/live-tv/the-profit) How to Set Up the Exercise/Instructions:  Divide the class into teams of several students.  Read this: As you may know by watching billionaire Marcus Lemonis, as he works with actual small businesses in which he’s taken an ownership share, human resource management often plays an important role in what he and the business owners and managers need to do to be successful. For example, at Grafton Furniture, a lack of clarity about who does what (a lack of up-to-date job descriptions) leads to inadequate supervision of some ongoing orders and to lower profit margins. Questions also arise at Gafton about, for instance, the effectiveness of the training that some managers (including the owner’s son) have received.  Watch several of these shows (or reruns of the shows), and then meet with your team and answer the following questions:

..

Chapter 1: Introduction to Human Resource Management

1-13

1-12. What specific HR functions (recruiting, interviewing, and so on) can you identify Mr. Lemonis addresses on this show? Make sure to give specific examples based on the show.

Students’ responses will vary but should use the information found in the text to explain and defend their answers.

1-13. What specific HR functions can you identify as being problematical in this company? Again, please give specific answers.

Students’ answers will vary but should include addressing line and staff manager’s authority.

1-14. In terms of HR functions (such as recruiting, selections, interviewing, compensating, appraising, and so on) what exactly would you recommend doing to improve this company’s performance?

Students’ answers will vary but should use the information found in the text to explain and defend their answers.

1-15. Present your team’s conclusions to the class.

Application Case: Jack Nelson’s Problem 1-16. What do you think was causing some of the problems in the bank’s home office and branches?

There is clearly a problem with communication, and the effects are felt in the area of employee commitment. Additional contributing factors include the lack of consistency in the policies and procedures of various locations. There is no cohesiveness to the staffing activities of this organization.

1-17. Do you think setting up an HR unit in the main office would help?

Of course it would! Since there are HR-related problems both in the home office and in the branches, it is clear that an HR unit in the main office would help to coordinate HR activities in the branches.

1-18. What specific functions should an HR unit carry out? What HR functions would then be carried out by supervisors and other line managers? What role should the Internet play in the new HR organization?

There is room for quite a bit of variation in the answers to this question. Our suggested organization would include: HR Unit: conducting job analyses, planning labor needs, recruiting, providing advice and training in the selection process, handling orientation of new employees, managing wage and salary administration, managing incentives and

..

Chapter 1: Introduction to Human Resource Management

1-14

benefits, providing and managing the performance appraisal process, facilitating organization-wide communications, and providing training and development services.

Supervisors and Other Line Managers: interviewing and selecting job candidates, training new employees, appraising performance, ensuring departmental and personal communications, and providing training and development. Internet and HR: shift some activities to specialized online service portals and/or providers.

Continuing Case: Carter Cleaning Company – Introduction 1-19. Make a list of five specific HR problems you think Carter Cleaning will have to grapple with.

Potential answers could include the following: 1) Staffing the company with the right human capital by identifying the skills and competencies that are required to perform the jobs and the type of people that should be hired. Sourcing candidates and establishing an efficient and effective recruiting and selection process will be an important first step.

2) Planning and establishing operational goals and standards and developing rules and procedures to support business goals and strategies. Failure to do so will result in a lack of clarity around performance expectations down the line as each store becomes operational.

3) Implementing effective performance management by setting performance standards, offering high-quality appraisal of performance, and providing ongoing performance coaching and feedback to develop the abilities of each person and support positive employee relations.

4) Designing an effective compensation system that will give the company the ability to attract, retain, and motivate a high-quality workforce, and providing appropriate wages, salaries, incentives and benefits. A poorly designed system will result in recruiting problems, high turnover rates, and low employee morale.

5) Training and developing employees both at the management and employee level to be able to perform the job to meet the performance expectations. This should include a new hire orientation program as well as a program for ongoing training and development.

Lack of attention to this component may result in errors, increased operational costs, high turnover, and morale problems.

1-20. What would you do first if you were Jennifer?

Students’ answers will vary. However, probably the most important first step is to ensure that the staffing process is well designed and targeting the right mix of skills and abilities needed among candidates. Thoroughness is necessary when analyzing the requirements of each job, developing a complete job description for each role, and sourcing candidates ..

Chapter 1: Introduction to Human Resource Management

1-15

that meet those requirements. Significant time should be invested in the hiring process to ensure that potential employees meet the requirements and possess the skills and abilities to do the job.

Key Terms: Organization – A group consisting of people with formally assigned roles who work together to achieve the organization’s goals.

Manager – Someone who is responsible for accomplishing the organization’s goals, and who does so by managing the efforts of the organization’s people.

Managing – To perform five basic functions: planning, organizing, staffing, leading, and controlling.

Management Process – The five basic functions of planning, organizing, staffing, leading, and controlling.

Human Resource Management (HRM) – The process of acquiring, training, appraising, and compensating employees, and of attending to their labor relations, health and safety, and fairness concerns.

Authority – The right to make decisions, to direct the work of others, and to give orders.

Line Authority – Traditionally gives managers the right to issue orders to other managers or employees.

Staff Authority – Gives a manager the right to advise other managers or employees.

Line Manager – A manager who is authorized to direct the work of subordinates and is responsible for accomplishing the organization’s tasks.

Staff Manager – A manager who assists and advises line managers.

Strategic Human Resource Management – Formulating and executing human resource policies and practices that produce the employee competencies and behaviors the company needs to achieve its strategic aims.

Employment Engagement – The extent to which an organization’s employees are psychologically involved in, connected to, and committed to getting their jobs done.

Ethics – The principles of conduct governing an individual or a group; specifically, the standards you use to decide what your conduct should be.

..

Part One Introduction Chapter 2 Equal Opportunity and the Law Lecture Outline: Equal Opportunity Laws Enacted From 1964 to 1991 Title VII of the 1964 Civil Rights Act Executive Orders Equal Pay Act of 1963 Age Discrimination in Employment Act of 1967 Vocational Rehabilitation Act of 1973 Pregnancy Discrimination Act of 1978 Federal Agency Guidelines Early Court Decisions Regarding Equal Employment Opportunity The Laws Enacted from 1991 to the Present The Civil Rights Act of 1991 The Americans with Disabilities Act Uniformed Services Employment and Reemployment Rights Act Genetic Information Nondiscrimination Act of 2008 (GINA) State and Local Equal Employment Opportunity Laws Summary and Religious Discrimination Trends in Discrimination Law Sexual Harassment Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media Defenses Against Discrimination Allegations The Central Role of Adverse Impact Bona Fide Occupational Qualification Business Necessity Know Your Employment Law The EEOC Enforcement Process Voluntary Mediation Mandatory Arbitration of Discrimination Claims Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses Diversity Management Potential Threats to Diversity Improving Performance: HR as a Profit Center Managing Diversity Implementing the Affirmative Action Program Reverse Discrimination Chapter Review

..

Chapter 2: Equal Opportunity and the Law

2-2

Where Are We Now… The purpose of this chapter is to provide you with the knowledge to deal effectively with equal employment questions on the job. The main topics we cover are equal opportunity laws enacted from 1964 to 1991, the laws enacted from 1991 to the present, defenses against discrimination allegations, illustrative discriminatory employment practices, the EEOC enforcement process, and diversity management.

Interesting Issues: Lawyers recently filed a federal lawsuit against Uber Technologies. They said Uber’s questionable performance appraisal system produced performance ratings that led to male Uber employees getting better raises than women. We will see how to avoid such problems.

Learning Objectives: 2-1. List the basic features of Title VII of the 1964 Civil Rights Act and at least five other early equal employment laws.

2-2. List the basic features of at least five post-1990 employment laws, and explain with examples how to avoid accusations of sexual harassment at work.

2-3. Illustrate two defenses you can use in the event of discriminatory practice allegations, and list specific discriminatory personnel management practices in recruitment, selection, promotion, transfer, layoffs, and benefits.

2-4. List the steps in the EEOC enforcement process.

2-5. Give examples of attitudes that undermine diversity efforts, and explain how you would create a diversity management program

Annotated Outline: I. Equal Opportunity Laws Enacted from 1964 – 1991 The Fifth Amendment to the U.S. Constitution (ratified in 1791) states that, “no person shall be deprived of life, liberty, or property, without due process of the law.” The Thirteenth Amendment (1865) outlawed slavery, and courts have held that it bars racial discrimination. The Civil Rights Act of 1866 gives all persons the same right to make and enforce contracts and to benefit from U.S. laws.

A. Title VII of the 1964 Civil Rights Act – was one of the first of these laws. Title VII bars discrimination on the part of most employers, including all public or private employers of 15 or more persons and most labor unions. Title VII also established the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (EEOC) to administer and enforce the Civil Rights Act at work. The EEOC consists of five members appointed by the president with the advice and consent of the Senate.

1. The act says it is unlawful to fail or refuse to hire or to discharge an individual or otherwise discriminate against any individual with respect to ..

Chapter 2: Equal Opportunity and the Law

2-3

his/her compensation, terms, conditions, or privileges of employment, because of such individual's race, color, religion, sex, or national origin.

2. The act says it is unlawful to limit, segregate, or classify employees or applicants for employment in any way that would deprive or tend to deprive any individual of employment opportunities or otherwise adversely affect his/her status as an employee, because of such individual's race, color, religion, sex, or national origin.

B. Executive Orders – various presidents have signed executive orders expanding equal employment laws in federal agencies. The Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs was established to implement orders and ensure compliance.

C. Equal Pay Act of 1963 – the Equal Pay Act of 1963 (amended in 1972) made it unlawful to discriminate in pay on the basis of sex when jobs involve equal work, equivalent skills, effort, and responsibility, and are performed under similar working conditions.

D. Age Discrimination in Employment Act of 1967 – the Age Discrimination in Employment Act of 1967 (ADEA) made it unlawful to discriminate against employees or applicants for employment who are between 40 and 65 years of age.

Subsequent amendments effectively ended most mandatory retirement at age 65.

E. Vocational Rehabilitation Act of 1973 – the Vocational Rehabilitation Act of 1973 requires employers with federal contracts over $2500 to take affirmative action for the employment of handicapped persons.

F. Pregnancy Discrimination Act of 1978 – prohibits using pregnancy, childbirth, or related medical conditions to discriminate in hiring, promotion, suspension, or discharge, or in any term or condition of employment.

G. Federal Agency Guidelines – the EEOC, Civil Service Commission, Department of Labor, and Department of Justice together set forth “highly recommended” employer procedures regarding matters like employee selection, record keeping, preemployment inquiries, and affirmative action programs.

H. Early Court Decisions Regarding Equal Employment Opportunity 1. Griggs v. Duke Power Company was a case heard by the Supreme Court in which the plaintiff argued that his employer's requirement that coal handlers be high school graduates was unfairly discriminatory. In finding for the plaintiff, the Court ruled that discrimination need not be overt to be illegal, that employment practices must be related to job performance, and that the burden of proof is on the employer to show that hiring standards are job related if they have an unequal impact on members of a protected class.

2. Albemarle Paper Company v. Moody was a Supreme Court case in which it was ruled that the validity of job tests must be documented, and that employee performance standards must be unambiguous.

II. The Laws Enacted from 1991 to the Present A. The Civil Rights Act of 1991 (CRA 1991) – was signed into law to roll back equal employment law to where it stood before the 1980s. It also permits compensatory and punitive damages.

1. Burden of Proof – what the plaintiff must show to establish possible illegal discrimination, and what the employer must show to defend its actions. ..

Chapter 2: Equal Opportunity and the Law

2-4

2. Money Damages – CRA 1991 provides that an employee who is claiming intentional discrimination (disparate treatment) can ask for 1) compensatory damages and 2) punitive damages, if it can be shown the employer engaged in discrimination “with malice or reckless indifference to the federally protected rights of an aggrieved individual.”

3. Mixed Motives – under CRA 1991, an employer cannot avoid liability by proving they would have taken the same action—such as terminating someone—even without the discriminatory motive.

B. The Americans with Disabilities Act 1. The American with Disabilities Act (ADA) of 1990 – prohibits discrimination against qualified disabled individual with disabilities, with regard to applications, hiring, discharge, compensation, advancement, training, or other terms, conditions, or privileges of employment. ADA also says employers must make “reasonable accommodations” for physical or mental limitations unless doing so imposes an “undue hardship” on the business.

2. Qualified Individual – the ADA prohibits discrimination against those who, with or without a reasonable accommodation, can carry out the essential functions of the job. The individual must have the requisite skills, educational background, and experience. A job function is essential when, for instance, it is the reason the position exists or it is so highly specialized that the employer hires the person for his or her expertise or ability to perform that particular function.

3. Reasonable Accommodation – if the individual cannot perform the job as currently structured, the employer is required to make a “reasonable accommodation,” unless doing so would present an “undue hardship.”

4. The ADA Amendments Act of 2008 (ADAAA) – employers traditionally prevailed in almost all—96%—federal circuit court ADA decisions.

5. The “New” ADA – in 2008, amendments were made to the ADA. These changes will make it easier for employees to show their disabilities are limiting.

C. Uniformed Service Employment and Reemployment Rights Act – employers are generally required, among other things, to reinstate employees returning from military leave to positions comparable to those they had before leaving.

D. Genetic Information Nondiscrimination Act of 2008 (GINA) – the law prohibits discrimination by health insurers and employers based on people’s genetic information. Specifically, it prohibits the intentional acquisition of genetic information about applicants and employees, and imposes strict confidentiality requirements.

E. State and Local Equal Employment Opportunity Laws – usually cover employers (like those with less than 15 employees) not covered by federal legislation. State and local equal employment opportunity agencies (often called Human Resources Commission or Fair Employment Commissions) also pay a role in equal employment compliance.

F. In Summary: Religious and Other Types of Discrimination – religious discrimination involves treating someone unfavorably because of his or her religious beliefs. The law protects not only people who belong to traditional organized religions such as Buddhism, Christianity, Hinduism, Islam, and Judaism, but also others who have sincerely held religious, ethical, or moral beliefs. ..

Chapter 2: Equal Opportunity and the Law G. Recent Trends in Discrimination Law H. Sexual Harassment – under EEOC guidelines, employers have an affirmative duty to maintain workplaces free of sexual harassment and intimidation.

1. What is sexual harassment? EEOC guidelines define sexual harassment as unwelcome sexual advances, requests for sexual favors, and any other verbal or physical conduct of a sexual nature that takes place under any of the following conditions: a. Submission to such conduct is made either explicitly or implicitly a term or condition of an individual's employment. b. Submission to or rejection of such conduct by an individual is used as the basis for employment decisions affecting the individual. c. Such conduct has the purpose or effect of unreasonably interfering with an individual’s work performance or creating an intimidating, hostile, or offensive work environment.

2. Proving Sexual Harassment – there are 3 main ways someone can prove sexual harassment. a. Quid Pro Quo – proves that rejecting a supervisor’s advances adversely affected what the EEOC calls a “tangible employment action,” such as hiring, firing, promotion, demotion, and/or work assignment. b. Hostile Environment Created by Supervisors – shows that even though there were no direct threats or promises in exchange for sexual advances, advances interfered with performance and created an offensive work environment. c. Hostile Environment Created by Coworkers or Non-employees – an employer is liable for the sexually harassing acts of its employees and in some cases, customers, if the employer knew or should have known of the harassing conduct.

3. When is the Environment “Hostile”? – generally means when the intimidation, insults, and ridicule were sufficiently severe to alter the employee’s working conditions.

4. Supreme Court Decisions – the case called Meritor Savings Bank, FSB v. Vinson to endorse broadly the EEOC’s guidelines on sexual harassment. Two other Supreme Court decisions further clarified sexual harassment law. a. Burlington Industries v. Ellerth – the employee accused her supervisor of quid pro quo harassment. b. Faragher v. City of Boca Raton – the employee accused the employer of condoning a hostile work environment.

6. Implications for Employers and Managers When The Law Isn’t Enough – three practical considerations often trump the legal requirements. First, “Women perceive a broader range of soci-sexual behaviors (touching, for instance) as harassing. A second problem is that victims are often fearful. A third problem is that employees often won’t complain.”

7. What The Employee Can Do – first, complain. In that context, steps an employee can take include:

..

2-5

Chapter 2: Equal Opportunity and the Law

2-6

a. File a verbal contemporaneous complaint with the harasser and the harasser’s boss, stating that the unwanted overtures should cease because the conduct is unwelcome. b. If the unwelcome conduct does not cease, file verbal and written reports regarding the unwelcome conduct and unsuccessful efforts to get it to stop with the harasser’s manager and/or the human resource director. c. If the letters and appeals to the employer do not suffice, contact the local office of the EEOC to file the necessary claim. In very serious cases, the employee can also consult an attorney about suing the harasser for assault and battery, intentional infliction of emotional distress, injunctive relief, and to recover compensatory and punitive damages.

8. Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media Some employees will use Facebook and other accounts to harass and bully coworkers. Of course, social media has also been a boon for staffing, for finding candidates on LinkedIn. However, viewing an applicant’s social media profile can be problematic, as it may reveal information on things like religion, race, and sexual orientation.

III. Defenses Against Discrimination Allegations – discrimination laws that distinguish between disparate treatment and disparate impact. Disparate treatment means intentional discrimination. Disparate impact means that “an employer engages in an employment practice or policy that has a greater adverse impact (effect) on the members of a protected group under Title VII than on other employees regardless of intent.”

A. The Central Role of Adverse Impact – an applicant or employee can use one of the following five methods to show that one of an employer’s procedures (such as a selection test) has an adverse impact on a protected group: 1. Disparate Rejection Rates – this method compares the rejection rates for a minority group and another group (usually the remaining non-minority applicants). Federal agencies use a “4/5ths rule” to assess disparate rejection rates.

2. The Standard Deviation Rule – is a statistically measure of variability. It is a measure of the dispersion of a set of data from its mean.

3. Restricted Policy – is an approach that means demonstrating that the employer’s policy intentionally or unintentionally excluded members of a protected group.

4. Population Comparisons – is an approach that compares 1) the percentage of the protected group and white workers in the organization with 2) the percentage of the corresponding groups in the labor market, where the labor market is usually defined as the U.S. Census data for the Standard Metropolitan Statistical Area.

5. McDonnell-Douglas Test – when an applicant is qualified but rejected, and the employer continues seeking applicants, the Court has determined that a prima facie case of disparate treatment has been established under these conditions. The U.S. Supreme Court set four rules for applying the McDonnell-Douglas test: a. the person belongs to a protected class; b. that he or she applied and was qualified for the job for which the employer was seeking applicants; ..

Chapter 2: Equal Opportunity and the Law

2-7

c. that despite the qualification, the person was rejected; and d. that after his or her rejection, the position remained open and the employer continued to seek applications from persons with the individual complainant’s qualifications.

6. Adverse Impact Example B. Bona Fide Occupational Qualification (BFOQ) is usually a defense to a disparate treatment case based upon direct evidence of intentional discrimination, rather than to disparate impact (unintentional) cases.

1. Age as a BFOQ – ADEA does permit disparate treatment in those instances when age is a BFOQ. 2. Religion as a BFOQ is justified in the case of religious organizations or societies that require employees to share their particular religion.

3. Gender as a BFOQ is allowed for positions requiring specific physical characteristics necessarily possessed by one sex.

4. National Origin as a BFOQ – a person’s national origin may be a BFOQ. C. Business Necessity – business necessity is a defense created by the courts that requires an employer to show an overriding business purpose for the discriminatory practice and that the practice is therefore acceptable.

D. Know Your Employment Law 1. Examples of What You Can and Cannot Do 2. Recruitment a. Word of Mouth – you cannot rely upon word-of-mouth dissemination of information about job opportunities when your workforce is all white or all members of some other class. b. Misleading Information – it is unlawful to give false or misleading information to members of any group. c. Help Wanted Ads – help wanted ‘male’ or help wanted ‘female’ ads are violations unless gender is a bona fide occupational qualification for the job.

3. Selection Standards a. Educational Requirements – courts have found education qualifications to be illegal when minority groups are less likely to possess the education qualifications or qualifications are not job related. b. Tests – courts deem tests unlawful if they disproportionately screen out minorities or women and they are not job related. c. Preference to Relatives – do not give preference to relatives of current employees with respect to employment opportunities. d. Height, Weight, and Physical Characteristics – physical requirements such as minimum height are unlawful unless the employee can show they are job related. e. Arrest Records – unless a job requires security clearance, do not ask an applicant whether he or she has been arrested or spent time in jail or use an arrest record to disqualify a person automatically. f. Application Forms – employment applications generally shouldn't contain questions about applicant’s disabilities, workers’ compensation history, age, arrest record, or U.S. citizenship.

..

Chapter 2: Equal Opportunity and the Law

2-8

g. Discharge Due to Garnishment – firing a minority member whose salary is garnished is illegal unless you can show some overriding business necessity.

4. Sample Discriminatory Promotion, Transfer, & Layoff Practices a. Personal Appearance Regulations and Title VII – employees sometimes file suits against employers’ dress and appearance codes under Title VII. They usually claim sexual discrimination, but sometimes claim racial or even religious discrimination. The chapter describes court rulings regarding dress, hair, uniforms, tattoos, and body piercings.

5. Three other things: a. Good intentions are no excuse. b. One cannot claim that a union agreement necessitates some discriminatory practice. c. A strong defense is not your only recourse.

IV. The EEOC Enforcement Process – even careful employers eventually face employment discrimination claims and have to deal with the EEOC. 1. File Charge – the process begins when someone files a claim with the EEOC. 2. Charge Acceptance – the EEOC’s common practice is to accept a charge and orally refer it to the state or local agency on behalf of the charging party.

3. Serve Notice – the EEOC has 10 days to serve notice on the employer.

4. Investigation/Fact-Finding Conference – the EEOC has 120 days to decide whether there is reasonable cause to believe the charge. Early in the investigation, the EEOC holds a fact-finding conference to find weak spots in each party’s position. It uses these to push for a settlement.

5. Cause/No Cause – if no reasonable cause is found, the EEOC must dismiss the charge. A Notice of Right to Sue is issued to the charging party who then has 90 days to file a suit on his or her own behalf.

6. Conciliation – if cause is found, the EEOC has 30 days to work out a conciliation agreement.

7. Notice to Sue – if conciliation is not satisfactory, the EEOC may bring a civil suit in federal district court, or issue a Notice of Right to Sue to the person who filed the charge.

A. Voluntary Mediation – the EEOC refers about 10% of its charges to voluntary mediation mechanism, an informal process in which a neutral third party assists the opposing parties to reach a voluntary negotiated resolution of a charge of discrimination.

B. Mandatory Arbitration of Discrimination Claims – many employers, to avoid EEO litigation, require applicants and employees to agree to arbitrate such claims. The EEO does not favor mandatory arbitration. However, the U.S. Supreme Court’s decisions make it clear that employment discrimination plaintiffs may be compelled to arbitrate their claims under some circumstances.

C. Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses

..

Chapter 2: Equal Opportunity and the Law

2-9

V. Diversity Management A. Potential Threats to Diversity – workforce diversity produces both benefits and problems for employers. Unmanaged, it can produce big behavioral behaviors that reduce cooperation. Potential problems include: stereotyping, discrimination, tokenism, and ethnocentrism.

B. Improving Performance: HR as a Profit Center Diversity can drive higher profits.

C. Managing Diversity – managing diversity means maximizing diversity’s potential benefits while minimizing the potential problems. The employer may institute a diversity management program, usually at the initiative of a top executive. Activities that constitute managing diversity include: 1. Providing strong leadership – companies with exemplary reputations in managing diversity typically have CEOs who champion the cause of diversity.

2. Assess the situation – assessing a company's diversity includes equal employment hiring and retention metrics, employee attitude surveys, management employee evaluations, and focus groups.

3. Change culture and management systems.

4. Evaluate the diversity management program.

D. Diversity through engagement – Some design diversity efforts to elicit their employees’ engagement and active participation.E. Implementing the Affirmative Action Program – affirmative action is still a significant workplace issue today.

Affirmative action means taking action in recruitment, hiring, promotion, and compensation to eliminate the current effects of past discrimination. A good-faith effort strategy emphasizes identifying and eliminating the obstacles to hiring and promoting women and minorities, and increasing the minority or female applicant flow.

1. Employee resistance – avoiding employee resistance to affirmative action programs is important to show that the program doesn't involve preferential selection standards by providing details on the qualifications of all new hires.

2. Program Evaluation – how can you tell if the diversity initiatives are effective?

Some common sense questions can be asked: a. Are the women and minorities reporting directly to senior managers? b. Do women and minorities have a fair share of jobs that are traditionally stepping stones to successful careers in the company? c. Do women and minorities have equal access to international assignments? d. Is the employer taking steps to ensure that female and minority candidates will be in the company's career development pipeline? e. Are turnover rates for female and minority managers the same or lower than those for white males? f. Do employees report that they perceive positive behavior changes as a result of diversity efforts?

E. Reverse Discrimination – means discriminating against nonminority applicants and employees. Many court cases have discussed these issues such as Bakke v. Regents of the University of California (1978).

..

Chapter 2: Equal Opportunity and the Law

2-10

Chapter Review Chapter Section Summaries: 2-1. Several of the most important equal employment opportunity laws became law in the period from 1964 to 1991.

2-2. Equal employment law continues to evolve, with important new legislation being enacted since 1990-1991.

2-3. Employers use various defenses against discrimination allegations.

2-4. All managers play an important role in the EEOC enforcement process.

2-5. Managing diversity means maximizing diversity’s potential benefits while minimizing the potential barriers.

Discussion Questions: 2-1. What important precedents were set by the Griggs v. Duke Power Company case?

The Albemarle Paper Co. v. Moody?

Three crucial guidelines affecting equal employment legislation.

First, the Court ruled that the discrimination does not have to be overt to be illegal. The plaintiff does not have to show that the employer intentionally discriminated against the employee or applicant. Instead, the plaintiff just has to show that discrimination took place. Second, the Court held that an employment practice must be job related if it has an unequal impact on members of a protected class.

Third, Chief Justice Burger’s opinion placed the burden of proof on the employer to show that the hiring practice is job related.

In the Albemarle case, the Court provided more details on how employers could prove that tests or other screening tools relate to job performance. For example, the Court said that if an employer wants to test candidates for a job, then the employer should first clearly document and understand the job’s duties and responsibilities. Furthermore, the job’s performance standards should be clear and unambiguous. That way, the employer can identify which employees are performing better than others. The Court’s ruling also established the EEOC (now Federal) Guidelines on validation as the procedures for validating employment practices.

This question can be assigned as a discussion question.

2-2. Explain each of the four examples of a bona fide occupational qualification.

Bona Fide Occupational Qualification (BFOQ) refer to requirements that an employee be of a certain religion, sex, or national origin where that is reasonably necessary to the organization's normal operation. Specified by the 1964 Civil Rights Act. For example, if a casting was hiring an actor for a male role, the BFOQ requirement would be that a male be hired. Likewise, if an orchestra needs a tuba player, those who do not play the tube would not be considered for the job. Students can work in small groups and provide examples of occupational qualifications al. ..

Chapter 2: Equal Opportunity and the Law

2-11

2-3. What is sexual harassment? How can an employee prove sexual harassment?

Sexual harassment is harassment on the basis of sex that has the purpose or effect of substantially interfering with a person’s work performance or creating an intimidating, hostile, or offensive work environment. An employee can prove sexual harassment in three main ways: 1) quid pro quo – prove that rejecting a supervisor’s advances adversely affected tangible benefits; 2) hostile environment created by supervisors; and 3) hostile environment created by coworkers or nonemployees.

2-4. What is the difference between disparate treatment and disparate impact?

The main difference is one of intent. Disparate treatment means that there was an intent to treat different groups differently. Disparate impact does not require intent, but merely to show that an action has a greater adverse effect on one group than another.

Individual and Group Activities: 2-5. Working individually or in groups, respond to these three scenarios based on what you learned in Chapter 2. Under what conditions (if any) do you think the following constitute sexual harassment? (a) A female manager fires a male employee because he refuses her request for sexual favors. (b) A male manager refers to female employees as “sweetie” or “baby.” (c) A female employee overhears two male employees exchanging sexually oriented jokes.

In answering the questions, the students should keep in mind the three main ways sexual harassment can be proved, as well as the steps the employee should take in alerting management.

2-6. Working individually or in groups, discuss how you would set up an affirmative action program.

It is important that students reach a decision of whether to use the good faith effort strategy or the quota strategy. Most experts would suggest the good faith effort strategy is the most legally acceptable approach. The following list of six actions should be demonstrated in the student plans: increasing the minority or female applicant flow; demonstrating top management support for the equal opportunity policy; demonstrating the equal opportunity commitment to the local community; keeping employees informed about the specifics of the affirmative action program; broadening the work skills of incumbent employees; and institutionalizing the equal employment policy to encourage supervisors’ support of it.

2-7. Compare and contrast the issues presented in Bakke with more recent court rulings on affirmative action. Working individually or in groups, discuss the current direction of affirmative action.

The basic questions addressed in Bakke focused on when preferential treatment becomes discrimination and under what circumstances discrimination will be temporarily permitted. ..

Chapter 2: Equal Opportunity and the Law

2-12

Neither question was fully answered. Subsequent cases have continued to address these issues and clarify more specifically the scope and intent of affirmative action. For example, in the Paradise case, the court ruled that the courts can impose racial quotas to address the most serious cases of racial discrimination. In Johnson, the court ruled that the public and private employers may voluntarily adopt hiring and promotion goals to benefit minorities and women. The Johnson ruling may limit claims of reverse discrimination by white males.

2-8. Working individually or in groups, write a one-page paper entitled “What the Manager Should Know About How the EEOC Handles a Person’s Discrimination Charge.”

The students should include the following information in their paper. The EEOC can either accept the charge or refer it to the state or local agency. After it has been filed, the EEOC has 10 days to serve notice on the employer, and then investigate the charge to determine whether there is reasonable cause to believe it is true within 120 days. If charges are dismissed, the EEOC must issue the charging party a Notice of Right to Sue. The person then has 90 days to file suit on his/her own behalf. If the EEOC finds reasonable cause for the charge, it must attempt conciliation. If conciliation is not satisfactory, the EEOC can bring a civil suit in federal district court, or issue a Notice of Right to Sue to the person who filed the charge. Under Title VII, the EEOC has 30 days to work out a conciliation agreement between the parties before bringing suit. If the EEOC is unable to obtain an acceptable conciliation agreement, it may sue the employer in federal district court.

2-9. Explain the difference between affirmative action and equal employment opportunity.

Equal employment opportunity aims to ensure that anyone, regardless of race, color, sex, religion, national origin, or age has an equal chance for a job based on his or her qualifications. Affirmative action requires the employer to make an extra effort to hire and promote those in protected groups and includes specific actions designed to eliminate the present effects of past discrimination.

2-10. Assume you are the manager in a small restaurant; you are responsible for hiring employees, supervising them, and recommending them for promotion. Working individually or in groups, compile a list of potentially discriminatory management practices you should avoid.

Acceptable answers include the following: Ensure that recruitment practices are non-discriminatory, and avoid word-of-mouth dissemination of information about job opportunities when the workforce is substantially white, or all members of some other class. Avoid giving false or misleading information to members of any group or failing to advise them of work opportunities. Avoid advertising classifications that specify gender or age unless it is a bona fide occupational qualification for the job.

..

Chapter 2: Equal Opportunity and the Law

2-13

Avoid asking pre-employment questions about an applicant’s race, color, religion, sex, or national origin.

Do not deny a job to a disabled individual if the person is qualified and able to perform the essential functions of the job. Make reasonable accommodations for candidates that are otherwise qualified but unable to perform an essential function unless doing so would result in a hardship.

Apply tests and performance standards uniformly to all employees and job candidates.

Avoid tests if they disproportionately screen out minorities or women and are not job related.

Do not give preference to relatives of current employees if your current employees are substantially non-minority.

Do not establish requirements for physical characteristics unless you can show they are job related.

Do not make pre-employment inquiries about a person’s disability, but do ask questions about the person’s ability to perform specific essential job functions.

Review job application forms, interview procedures, and job descriptions for illegal questions and statements. Check for questions about health, disabilities, medical histories, or previous workers’ compensation claims.

Do not ask applicants whether they have ever been arrested or spent time in jail. However, you can ask about conviction records.

2-11. Appendix A and B at the end of this book list the knowledge someone studying for the HRCI (Appendix A) or SHRM (Appendix B) certification exam needs to have in each area of human resources management (such as in Strategic Management and Workforce Planning). In groups of several students, do four things: (1) review Appendix A and/or B; (2) identify the material in this chapter that relates to the Appendix A and/or B required knowledge lists; (3) write four multiple choice exam questions on this material that you believe would be suitable for inclusion in the HRCI exam and/or the SHRM exam; and (4) if time permits, have someone from your team post your team's questions in front of the class, so that students in all teams can answer the exam questions created by the other teams.

Students can work together is teams and present their multiple choice exam questions to the class.

Experiential Exercise: “Space Cadet” or Victim?

Purpose: The purpose of this exercise is to provide practice in analyzing and applying knowledge of equal opportunity legislation to a real problem.

..

Chapter 2: Equal Opportunity and the Law

2-14

Required Understanding: Be thoroughly familiar with the material presented in this chapter. In addition, read the preceding “space cadet” case on which this experiential exercise is based.

How to Set Up the Exercise/Instructions: ● Divide the class into groups. ● Each group should develop answers to the following questions: 2-12. Based on what you read in this chapter, on what legal basis could the 61-year-old California attorney claim he was a victim of discrimination?

2-13. On what laws and legal concepts did the employer apparently base its termination of this 61-year-old attorney?

2-14. Based on what laws or legal concepts could you take the position that it is legal to fire someone for poor performance even though there may be a discriminatory aspect to the termination? (This is not to say that there necessarily was such a discriminatory aspect with this case.)

2-15. If you were the judge called on to make a decision on this case, what would your decision be, and why?

The court’s decision follows, so please do not read this until you’ve completed the exercise. In this case, the California State Appeals court held that “the only reasonable inference that can be drawn from the evidence is that [plaintiff] was terminated because he failed to competently perform his job of providing thorough, accurate, and courteous legal advice to hotline callers.”

Application Case: Seeking Gender Equity at Starbucks 2-16. Do you agree that it is inequitable to offer the corporate workers better benefits then the store partners? Why? Is that what the law would seem to say?

If corporate workers have more skills, educational background, and experience than store partners, then there is a reason for them to have a higher salary and benefit package. If, however, both corporate workers and store partners have the same skills, educational background, and experience, they should get the same level of benefits according to the Equal Pay Act of 1963. This background information including job descriptions and candidate requirements is not given in the case.

2-17. What arguments would you make as Starbuck’s CEO concerning why the current policy is fair?

It is not discriminatory to give some employees a higher level of benefits than others as long as the decision to give the additional benefits is not based on race, gender, religion, or age. For example, Starbuck’s could give extra benefits based on seniority. It is also ..

Chapter 2: Equal Opportunity and the Law

2-15

important to note that the store partners do not consititute a protected class; persons, such as minorities and women are protected by equal opportunity laws, including Title VII. 2-18. How would you handle the situation if you were running a company that was confronted by a shareholder making these demands?

The shareholders feel that Starbucks’ reputation will be tarnished because the company is on record as saying that it treats corporate and retail partners the same. The shareholders feel that Starbucks should “practice what it preaches.” So, while legally Starbucks is in compliance with the EEOC, it would be far better off if it could extend the maternity leave to all employees. Then Starbucks could rightfully claim to be a family-friendly employer who takes work-life balance seriously. This attitude would greatly enhance the Starbucks brand.

Continuing Case: Carter Cleaning Company – A Question of Discrimination 2-19. Is it true, as Jack Carter claims, that “virtually all of our workers are women or minorities anyway, so no one can come in here and accuse us of being discriminatory”?

This is not true at all. Employers can be accused of discriminatory practices at any time. In this case, female applicants were being asked questions about childcare that males were not being asked; minority applicants were being asked questions about arrest records and credit histories that non-minorities were not. In addition, the reports of sexual advances towards women by a store manager and an older employee’s complaint that he is paid less than younger employees for performing the same job all raise serious issues in terms of discriminatory employment practices. Potential charges include Title VII violations, Equal Pay Act violations, age discrimination, sexual harassment, and disparate treatment.

2-20. How should Jennifer and her company address the sexual harassment charges and problems?

The first step would be to document the complaint and initiate an investigation. If the investigation finds that sexual harassment occurred, then take the appropriate corrective action which could include discipline up to and including discharge. In addition, the company should develop a strong policy statement and conduct training with all managers.

2-21. How should she and her company address the possible problems of age discrimination?

The company should review the compensation structure and pay rates to determine whether there is discrimination in their pay system with regard to older workers being paid less than younger workers for performing the same work. If there are significant

..

Chapter 2: Equal Opportunity and the Law

2-16

differences, then adjustments should be made to the pay system in order to rectify the problem.

2-22. Given the fact that each of its stores has only a handful of employees, is her company in fact covered by equal rights legislation?

Yes – the EEOC enforces equal employment compliance against all but the very smallest of employers. All employees including part-time and temporary workers are counted for purposes of determining whether an employer has a sufficient number of employees. State and local laws prohibit discrimination in most cases where federal legislation does not apply.

2-23. And finally, aside from the specific problems, what other personnel management matters (application forms, training, and so on) have to be reviewed given the need to bring them into compliance with equal rights laws?

The company should do several things: 1. Develop an employee handbook that contains policy statements about equal employment opportunity, sexual harassment, and other issues.

2. Develop an employment application that is free from discriminatory questions, as well as a standard interview guide to ensure consistency of “legal” questions from candidate to candidate.

3. Conduct supervisory/management training to ensure that all managers are educated and aware of their responsibilities under EEO laws and regulations.

4. Develop and implement a complaint procedure and establish a management response system that includes an immediate reaction and investigation by senior management.

Key Terms: Title VII of the 1964 Civil Rights Act – The section of the act that says an employer cannot discriminate on the basis of race, religion, sex, or national origin with respect to employment.

Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (EEOC) – The commission, created by Title VII, empowered to investigate job discrimination complaints and sue on behalf of complainants.

Affirmative Action – Steps that are taken for the purpose of eliminating the present effects of past discrimination.

Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs (OFCCP) – This office is responsible for implementing the executive orders and ensuring compliance of federal contractors.

Equal Pay Act of 1963 – The act requiring equal pay for equal work, regardless of sex. ..

Chapter 2: Equal Opportunity and the Law

2-17

Age Discrimination in Employment Act of 1967 (ADEA) – The act prohibiting arbitrary age discrimination and specifically protecting individuals over 40 years old.

Vocational Rehabilitation Act of 1973 – The act requiring certain federal contractors to take affirmative action for disabled persons.

Pregnancy Discrimination Act – An amendment to Title VII of the Civil Rights Act that prohibits sex discrimination based on "pregnancy, childbirth, or related medical conditions."

Uniform Guidelines – Guidelines issued by federal agencies charged with ensuring compliance with equal employment federal legislation explaining recommended employer procedures in detail.

Protected Class – Persons, such as minorities and women, protected by equal opportunity laws, including Title VII. Civil Rights Act of 1991 (CRA 1991) – The act that places the burden of proof back on employers and permits compensatory and punitive damages.

“Mixed Motive” Case – A discrimination allegation case in which the employer argues that the employment action taken was motivated not by discrimination, but by some non-discriminatory reason such as ineffective performance.

Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) – The act requiring employers to make reasonable accommodation for disabled employees; it prohibits discrimination against disabled persons.

Qualified Individuals – Under ADA, those who can carry out the essential functions of the job.

Sexual Harassment – Harassment on the basis of sex that has the purpose or effect of substantially interfering with a person's work performance or creating an intimidating, hostile, or offensive work environment.

Federal Violence Against Women Act of 1994 – The act provides that a person who commits a crime of violence motivated by gender shall be liable to the party injured.

Adverse Impact – The overall impact of employer practices that result in significantly higher percentages of members of minorities and other protected groups being rejected for employment, placement, or promotion.

Disparate Rejection Rates – A test for adverse impact in which it can be demonstrated that there is a discrepancy between rates of rejection of members of a protected group and of others.

4/5ths Rule – Federal agency rule that a minority selection rate less than 80% (4/5ths) of that for the group with the highest rate is evidence of adverse impact.

..

Chapter 2: Equal Opportunity and the Law

2-18

Restricted Policy – Another test for adverse impact, involving demonstration that an employer's hiring practices exclude a protected group, whether intentionally or not.

Bona Fide Occupational Qualification (BFOQ) – Requirements that an employee be of a certain religion, sex, or national origin where that is reasonably necessary to the organization's normal operation. Specified by the 1964 Civil Rights Act. Alternative Dispute Resolution or ADR Program – Grievance procedure that provides for binding arbitration as the last step.

Diversity – The variety or multiplicity of demographic features that characterize a company’s workforce, particularly in terms of race, sex, culture, national origin, handicap, age, and religion.

Sterotyping – Ascribing specific behavioral traits to individuals based on their apparent membership in a group.

Gender-Role Stereotypes – The tendency to associate women with certain (frequently nonmanagerial) jobs.

Discrimination – Taking specific actions toward or against a person based on the person’s group.

Tokenism – When a company appoints a small group of women or minorities to high profile positions, rather than more aggressively seeking full representation for that group.

Ethnocentrism – A tendency to view members of other social groups less favorable than members of one's own group.

Managing Diversity – Maximizing diversity’s potential benefits while minimizing its potential barriers.

Good Faith Effort Strategy – An affirmative action strategy that emphasizes identifying and eliminating the obstacles to hiring and promoting women and minorities, and increasing the minority or female applicant flow.

Reverse Discrimination – Claim that, due to affirmative action quota systems, white males are discriminated against.

..

Part One Introduction Chapter 3 Human Resource Management Strategy and Analysis Lecture Outline: The Strategic Management Process The Management Planning Process What Is Strategic Planning?

The Strategic Management Process Types of Strategies Corporate Strategy Competitive Strategy Functional Strategy Managers’ Roles in Strategic Planning Strategic Human Resource Management What Is Strategic Human Resource Management?

Improving Performance: The Strategic Context Improving Performance: HR As a Profit Center Sustainability and Strategic Human Resource Management Strategic Human Resource Management Tools HR Metrics, Benchmarking, and Data Analytics Benchmarking Strategy-Based Metrics What Are HR Audits?

Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media Trends Shaping HR: Science In Talent Management High-Performance Work Systems Employee Engagement Guide for Managers: Employee Engagement and Performance The Employee Engagement Problem What Can Managers Do to Improve Employee Engagement How to Measure Employee Engagement How Kia Motors (UK) Improved Performance with an HR Strategy Aimed at Boosting Employee Engagement Chapter Review

Where Are We Now… The main purpose of this chapter is to explain how managers formulate human resource strategies for their companies. We’ll address the strategic management process, types of strategies, strategic human resources management, HR metrics and benchmarking, highperformance work systems, and employee engagement.

Copyright© 2020 Pearson Education, Inc.

Chapter 3: Human Resource Management Strategy and Analysis

3-2

Interesting Issues: When the Ritz-Carlton Company took over managing the Portman Hotel in Shanghai, China, the hotel already had a good reputation among business travelers. However, many luxury hotels were opening there. To stay competitive, the Portman’s new managers decided to reposition the hotel with a new strategy, one that emphasized outstanding customer service. But they knew that improving the service would require new employee behaviors, and therefore new selection, training, and pay policies and practices. We will see what they did.

Learning Objectives: 3-1. Give examples of each of the seven steps in the strategic management process.

3-2. List with examples the main types of strategies.

3-3. Define strategic human resource management, and give an example of strategic human resource management in practice.

3-4. Give at least five examples of HR metrics.

3-5. Give five examples of what employers can do to have high-performance systems.

3-6. Explain how you would design a program a program to improve employee engagement.

Annotated Outline: I.

The Strategic Management Process A. The Management Planning Process – the basic management planning process consists of five steps: setting objectives, making basic planning forecasts, reviewing alternative courses of action, evaluating which options are best, and then choosing and implementing your plan.

B. What is Strategic Planning? – a strategic plan is the company’s plan for how it will match its internal strengths and weaknesses with external opportunities and threats in order to maintain a competitive advantage.

C. The Strategic Management Process – Figure 3-2 sums up the strategic management process. It has seven steps: Step 1. Define the current business Step 2. Perform external and internal audits Step 3. Formulate a new direction Step 4. Translate the mission into strategic goals Step 5. Formulate strategies to achieve the strategic goals Step 6. Implement the strategies Step 7. Evaluate performance

II.

Types of Strategies A. Corporate Strategy – identifies the portfolio of businesses that, in total, comprise the company and how these businesses are related to each other.

Concentration, diversification, vertical integration, consolidation, and geographic expansion are all examples of corporate-level strategies.

Copyright© 2020 Pearson Education, Inc.

Chapter 3: Human Resource Management Strategy and Analysis

3-3

B. Competitive Strategy – identifies how to build and strengthen the business unit’s long-term competitive position in the marketplace. Examples of competitive strategies include cost leadership, differentiation, and focusers.

C. Functional Strategy – these strategies identify what each department must do to help the business accomplish its strategic goals.

D. Manager’s Roles in Strategic Planning – devising a strategic plan is top management’s responsibility. However, few top executives formulate strategic plans without lower-level manager’s input.

III.

Strategic Human Resource Management A. What Is Strategic Human Resource Management?

1. Strategic HRM means formulating and executing human resource policies and practices that produce the employee competencies and behaviors that companies need to achieve their strategic aims.

B. Improving Performance: The Strategic Context C. Improving Performance: HR As a Profit Center D. Sustainability and Strategic Human Resource Management – today’s emphasis on sustainability has important consequences for human resource management. HR policies and practices can support a firm’s sustainability strategy and goals.

E. Strategic Human Management Tools 1. Strategy Map – summarizes how each department's performance contributes to achieving the company’s overall strategic goal.

2. HR scorecard – a process for assigning financial and nonfinancial goals or metrics to human resource management-related strategy map chain of activities required for achieving the company’s strategic aims.

3. Digital Dashboards – presents the manager with the desktop graphics and charts, showing a computerized picture of how the company is doing on all metrics from the HR scorecard process.

IV.

HR Metrics, Benchmarking, and Data Analytics A. Human resource managers use many measures (or “human resource metrics”) such as employee tenure, cost per hire, and annual overall turnover rate.

B. Benchmarking – occurs when an organization compares the practices of high performing companies’ results to your own, to understand what makes them better.

C. Strategy and Strategy-Based Metrics – benchmarking is only part of the process. To reveal the extent to which your firm’s HR practices are supporting its strategic goals, strategy-based metrics are used to measure the activities that contribute to achieving the company’s strategic aims.

D. What Are HR Audits? – these audits are a way for an organization to measure where it currently stands and determines what it has to accomplish to improve its HR functions.

E. HR audits vary in scope to include:  Roles and headcount  Compliance  Recruitment and selection

Copyright© 2020 Pearson Education, Inc.

Chapter 3: Human Resource Management Strategy and Analysis       

Compensation Employee relations Mandated benefits Group benefits Payroll Documentation and record keeping Training and development  Employee communications  Termination F. Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media 1. Talent Analytics – tools that enable employers to analyze, in new ways, employee data both on obvious things (like employee demographics, training, and performance ratings), but also data from new sources (like company internal social media sites, GPS tracking, and email activity). Talent analytics can produce striking profitability results.

G. Trends Shaping HR: Science In Talent Management V.

High-Performance Work Systems – a set of human resource management policies and practices that together produce superior employee performance.

VI.

Employee Engagement Guide for Managers: Employee Engagement and Performance A. The Employee Engagement Problem – Gallup distinguishes among engaged employees “who work with passion and feel a profound connection to their company,” and not engaged employees who are essentially “checked out,” and actively disengaged employees.

B. What Can Managers Do to Improve Employee Engagement? – managers improve employee engagement by taking concrete steps to do so, such as: providing supportive supervision, making sure employees understand how their departments contribute to the company’s success, see how their efforts contribute to achieving the company’s goals, get a sense of accomplishment from working at the firm, and are highly involved – as when working in self-managing teams.

C. How to Measure Employee Engagement – firms like Gallup (www.gallup.com) and Tower Watson (www.towerswatson.com/en-US) offer comprehensive employee engagement survey services.

D. How Kia Motors (UK) Improved Performance with an HR Strategy Aimed at Boosting Employee Engagement 1. The Challenges 2. The New Human Resources Management Strategy 3. How to Execute an Employee Engagement Strategy – executing Kia UK’s employee engagement HR strategy involved six steps: Step 1. Set measurable objectives.

Step 2. Held an extensive leadership development program.

Step 3. Instituted new employee recognition programs.

Step 4. Improved internal communications.

Copyright© 2020 Pearson Education, Inc.

3-4

Chapter 3: Human Resource Management Strategy and Analysis

3-5

Step 5. Instituted a new employee development program.

Step 6. Made a number of changes to its compensation and other polices.

4. The Results

Chapter Review Chapter Section Summaries: 3-1. All managers’ personnel and other decisions should be consistent with the goals that cascade down from the firm’s overall strategic plan. The strategic planning process has seven steps.

3-2. We distinguished among three types of strategies: corporate, business/competitive, and functional/department strategies.

3-3. Each function or department in the business needs its own functional strategy, and strategic human resource management means formulating and executing human resource policies and practices that produce the employee competencies and behaviors the company needs to achieve its strategic aims.

3-4. The manager will want to gather and analyze data prior to making decisions. Human resource metrics are critical in creating high-performance human resource policies and practices.

3-5. A high-performance work system is a set of human resource management policies and practices that together produce superior employee performance.

3-6. Employment engagement is important because it drives performance and productivity.

Actually executing Kia UK’s employee engagement HR strategy involved six steps.

Discussion Questions: 3-1. Give an example of hierarchical planning in an organization.

Top management approves a long-term or strategic plan. Then each department, working with top management, creates its own budgets and other plans to fit and contribute to the company’s long-term plan.

3-2. What is the difference between a corporate strategy and a competitive strategy? Give one example of each.

A corporate strategy identifies the portfolio of businesses that, in total, comprise the company and how these businesses are related to each other.

Copyright© 2020 Pearson Education, Inc.

Chapter 3: Human Resource Management Strategy and Analysis

3-6

Concentration, diversification, vertical integration, consolidation, and geographic expansion are all examples of corporate-level strategies. A competitive strategy identifies how to build and strengthen the business unit’s long-term competitive position in the marketplace. Examples of competitive strategies include cost leadership, differentiation, and focusers.

3-3. Explain why strategic planning is important to all managers.

A plan shows the course of action for getting from where you are to the goal, and planning is always “goal-directed.” So, a strategic plan is the company’s overall plan for how it will match its internal strengths and weaknesses with external opportunities and threats in order to maintain a competitive advantage. Strategic management is the process of identifying and executing the organization’s strategic plan, by matching the company’s capabilities with the demands of its environment and therefore is important to any manger that intends to meet his or her goals.

3-4. Explain with examples each of the eight steps in the strategic management process.

Step 1. Ask, Where Are We Now? The logical place to start is by asking, “Where are we now as a business?” Here the manager defines the company’s current business and mission.

Specifically, “What products do we sell, where do we sell them, and how do our products or services differ from our competitors’?” The manager will traditionally focus on four aspects of the current business.

Step 2. Size up the Situation: Perform External and Internal Audits. The next step is to ask, “Are we heading in the right direction given the challenges that we face?” To answer this, managers need to study or “audit” the firm’s environment, and its internal strengths and weaknesses. Managers use a SWOT chart to compile and organize the company’s strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats.

Step 3. Formulate a New Direction. The situation may require that management consider strategic options for the company. Several years ago, for instance, Microsoft, facing a surging product lineup from Apple and competition from Google’s cloud-based office programs, had to decide whether to change its mission and, if so, how.

Step 4. Translate the Mission into Strategic Goals. Given the situation, which strategic option should we pursue? Here the manager compares his or her strategic options to see which are most consistent with the firm’s opportunities and threats, and its strengths and weaknesses. For P&G, management had to assess whether building up its Oil of Olay brand was a better option than simply buying (at great expense) a well-known high-tier cosmetics brand.

Step 6. Formulate Strategies to Achieve the Strategic Goals. Next, management translates the new desired direction into actionable strategic goals. At P&G, for instance, strategic goals might have included “generate 20% of corporate revenues from the Oil of Olay brand within 4 years,” and “capture 18% of the top-tier beauty care market within 3 years.” Ford Copyright© 2020 Pearson Education, Inc.

Chapter 3: Human Resource Management Strategy and Analysis

3-7

breathed life into its “Quality Is Job One” mission by setting goals such as “no more than 1 initial defect per 10,000 cars.”

Step 7. Implement the Strategies. Strategy execution means translating the strategies into action. This means actually hiring (or firing) people, building (or closing) plants, and adding (or eliminating) products and product lines. To do this, management uses the firm’s new top-level strategic goals to formulate a hierarchy of goals, and policies and procedures.

These guide action down the chain of command at lower organizational levels, and in the firm’s various departments.

Step 8. Evaluate Performance. Things don’t always turn out as planned. P&G soon built its Oil of Olay line into a world-class brand. However, initially, at least, Microsoft’s new tablets were off to a slow start. Microsoft soon cut their prices.

3-5. Explain with examples how human resources management can be instrumental in helping a company create a competitive advantage.

Competitive advantage is any factor that allows an organization to differentiate its product or service from those of its competitors to increase market share. HR management can be instrumental in helping a company create a competitive advantage by identifying broad activities that it will pursue in order to help the business accomplish its competitive goals.

These activities include:  

  

Formulating and executing human resource policies and practices that produce the employee competencies and behaviors the company needs to achieve its strategic aims.

Implementing new training and communications programs aimed at ensuring all employees understand the importance of the business strategy, and what is required of all employees in terms of services, capitalizing on opportunities, and offering high quality services.

New job enrichment programs made employees more accountable for their results and more resilient in terms of moving from job to job.

New compensation and benefits programs to promote personal growth and encouraged searching for innovative solutions.

Improved selection, orientation, and dismissal procedures.

3-6. Outline how you would implement an employee engagement program.

Managers improve employee engagement by taking concrete steps to do so. By providing supportive supervision, employees understand how their departments contribute to the company’s success, see how their efforts contribute to achieving the company’s goals, get a sense of accomplishment from working at the firm, and are highly involved, like when working in self-managing teams.

Copyright© 2020 Pearson Education, Inc.

Chapter 3: Human Resource Management Strategy and Analysis

3-8

Individual and Group Activities: 3-7. With three or four other students, form a strategic management group for your college or university. Your assignment is to develop the outline of a strategic plan for the college or university. This should include such things as strategic goals, and corporate, competitive, and functional strategies. In preparing your plan, make sure to show the main strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats the college faces, and which prompted you to develop your particular strategic plans.

Students responses will vary.

3-8. Using the Internet or library resources, review the annual reports of five companies.

Bring to class examples of how those companies say they are using their HR processes to help the company achieve its strategic goals.

In class, facilitate a discussion on how effective the HR processes at each company appear to support strategic goals. Challenge students to come up with additional ideas for other approaches for using the HR processes and how they would go about implementing them, noting the specific difficulties of each.

3-9. Interview an HR manager and write a short report on “The Strategic Roles of the HR Manager at XYZ Company.”

Instruct students to follow the model outlined in this chapter for the steps in the strategic management process, and HR’s role in strategy execution and strategy formulation.

3-10. Using the Internet or library resources, bring to class and discuss at least two examples of how companies are using an HR scorecard to help create HR systems that support the company’s strategic aims. Do all managers seem to mean the same thing when they refer to HR scorecards? If not, how do they differ?

For each example, ask students to comment on how effective they believe the measures that were selected by the company are in terms of allowing the company to assess HR’s performance objectively and quantitatively, as well as serving as a tool for the HR manager to build a measurable and persuasive business case for how HR is contributing to achieving the company’s strategic financial goals. Challenge students to critique the scorecard and how it could be improved to measure strategically relevant organizational outcomes, workforce competencies and behaviors, and HR system policies and activities.

3-11. In teams of several students, choose a company for which you will develop an outline of a strategic HR plan. What seem to be this company’s main strategic aims? What is the firm’s competitive strategy? What would the strategic map for this company look like?

How would you summarize your recommended strategic HR policies for this company?

Student responses will vary.

Copyright© 2020 Pearson Education, Inc.

Chapter 3: Human Resource Management Strategy and Analysis

3-9

3-12. Appendices A and B at the end of this book list the knowledge someone studying for the HRCI (Appendix A) or SHRM (Appendix B) certification exam needs to have in each area of human resource management (such as in Strategic Management and Workforce Planning). In groups of several students do four things: (1) review Appendix A and/or B, (2) identify the material in this chapter that relates to the Appendix A and/or B required knowledge lists, (3) write four multiple-choice exam questions on this material that you believe would be suitable for inclusion in the HRCI exam, and/or the SHRM exam; and (4) if time permits have someone from your team post your team’s questions in front of the class, so that students in all teams can answer the exam questions created by the other teams.

Material in this chapter that could be covered in the HRCI certification exam include: Under Strategic Management, the formulation of HR strategies to support the company’s overall strategic plan; HR’s role in helping companies to build a competitive advantage; strategic HR management’s role in strategy execution and formulation; high performance work system concepts and supporting HR systems/practices; the HR Scorecard and all the steps involved in developing it.

Experiential Exercise: Developing an HR Strategy for Starbucks Purpose: The purpose of this exercise is to give students experience in developing an HR strategy, in this case, by developing one for Starbucks.

Required Understanding: You should be thoroughly familiar with the material in this chapter.

How to Set up the Exercise/Instructions: Set up groups of three or four students for this exercise. You are probably already quite familiar with what it’s like to have a cup of coffee or tea in a Starbucks coffee shop; but, if not, spend some time in one prior to this exercise. Meet in groups and develop an outline for an HR strategy for Starbucks Corp. Assume for the corporate strategy, Starbucks will remain primarily an international chain of coffee shops. Your outline should include four basic elements: a basic business/competitive strategy for Starbucks, the workforce requirements (in terms of employee competencies and behaviors) this strategy requires, specific HR policies and the activities necessary to produce these workforce requirements, and suggestions for metrics to measure the success of the HR strategy.

Application Case: Tesla’s Strategy 3-13. Was Tesla’s human resource strategy consistent with its overall strategy to produce “uncomperomising” high-performance cars?

No, lay-offs, pay scale issues, and attitudes against unionization did not foster an engaged workforce that could produce a high-quality product – a high-performance car.

Strategic human resource management means formulating and executing human

Copyright© 2020 Pearson Education, Inc.

Chapter 3: Human Resource Management Strategy and Analysis

3-10

resource policies and practices that produce the employee competencies and behaviors the company needs to achieve its strategic aims.

Tesla could use the following HR tools to produce “uncompromising” high- performance cars: 1) Training and development activities to support continuous learning through a system of combined classroom and hands-on apprenticeship training to support technical learning; 2) Continuing education and management development to develop skills necessary for teamwork; 3) Enhanced internal selection process for career advancement; 4) Organizational development activities aimed at building openness, transparency, fairness, and diversity support.

3-14. Given what Kia UK accomplished, should Tesla implement such an engagementprogram? Why? Yes. Tesla should implement an engagement program similar to what Kia UK has implemented. Employee engagement is important because it drives performance and productivity. Actually executing Kia UK’s employee engagement HR strategy involved six steps. These were: set measurable objectives for the program; provide leadership development, for example, send all managers for training to improve their management skills; institute new employee recognition programs, for instance, giving “Outstanding Awards” to selected employees quarterly; institute a new employee development program, for instance, using the company’s appraisal process to identify employees’ training needs and to create training plans for each employee; and change the compensation and other policies to ensure they are aligned with the new cultural values.

3-15. What would you do now if you were Tesla’s Chief People Officer?

Students can share their answers. The Chief People Officer should implement the employee engagement program outlined above because employee engagement drives performance and productivity. The company needs to improve its financial situation immediately. To do so, the Chief People Officer needs to determine what employee behaviors and attitudes will produce these operational outcomes.

3-16. Based on the case, provide examples for Tesla of at least four strategically required organizational outcomes, and four required workforce competencies and behaviors.

Strategically required organizational outcomes would be the following: 1) An employee selection and compensation system that attracts and retains the human talent necessary to support high-tech products; 2) A “learning company” in which employees are able to learn on a continuing basis; 3) A culture of teamwork which will develop and use all the potential of the firm’s human resources; 4) A climate of mutual respect. Workforce competencies and behaviors could include: 1) openness to learning; 2) teamwork skills; 3) cross-cultural experience; 4) openness, respect, and appreciation for workforce diversity.

Copyright© 2020 Pearson Education, Inc.

Chapter 3: Human Resource Management Strategy and Analysis

3-11

3-17. Provide a brief illustrative outline of a strategy map for Tesla.

Student answers will vary but the strategy map should answer the following questions: 1) What overall goals does Tesla want to achieve?; 2) What must Tesla do operationally to achieve its goals?; and 3) What employee attitudes and behaviors will produce these operational outcomes?

Continuing Case: The Carter Cleaning Company – The High-Performance Work System 3-18. Would you recommend that the Carters expand their quality program? If so, specifically what form should it take?

Most students will agree that there are opportunities to expand the quality program. The employee meeting approach is a good start in terms of utilizing high-involvement organizational practices. There are opportunities to maximize the overall quality of their human capital. For example, training seems to be an obvious area to improve in terms of educating and building awareness about basic standards and procedures.

3-19. Assume the Carters want to institute a high-performance work system as a test program in one of their stores. Write a one-page outline summarizing important HR practices you think they should focus on.

Students should include some of the following ideas in their outline: The types of HR practices they would implement to improve quality, productivity, financial performance; methods for job enrichment; strategies for implementing and leveraging a team-based organization; ways to implement and facilitate high commitment work practices; employee development and skill building activities to foster increased competency and capability in the workforce; a compensation program which provides incentives (for example, profit sharing, pay for performance) for achieving major goals and financial targets.

Hotel Paris: Improving Performance at the Hotel Paris –The Hotel Paris International 3-20. Draw a more simplified and abbreviated strategy map for the Hotel Paris.

Specifically, summarize in your own words an example of the hierarchy of links among the hotel’s HR practices, necessary workforce competencies and behaviors, and required organizational outcomes.   

What overall goals does the Hotel Paris want to achieve?

What does the Hotel Paris do operationally to achieve its goals?

What employee attitudes and behaviors will produce the desired operational outcomes?

Copyright© 2020 Pearson Education, Inc.

Chapter 3: Human Resource Management Strategy and Analysis

3-12

The above strategy map for the Hotel Paris succinctly lays out the hierarchy of main activities required for the Hotel Paris to succeed. For example, the Hotel Paris could endeavor to improve workforce competencies and behaviors by instituting an improved recruitment process, and measure the latter in terms of the number of qualified applicants per position.

3-21. Using Table 3-1 and Figure 3-9, list at least 15 metrics the Hotel Paris could use to measure its HR practices.               

Number of qualified applicants per position Percentage of jobs filled from within Number of hours of training for each employee Percentage of the workforce eligible for incentive pay Percentage of the workforce routinely working in a self-managed, cross functional, or project team HR to Employee Ratio HR Expenses HR Expenses to Operating Expense Ratio HR Expense to FTE Ratio Annual Salary Increase Maximum Reimbursement Allowed for Tuition/Education Expense per year Percentage of Employees Participating in Tuition/Education Reimbursement Programs Time-to-fill Cost-Per-Hire Annual Overall Turnover Rat

Key Terms: Strategic Plan – The company’s plan for how it will match its internal strengths and weaknesses with external opportunities and threats in order to maintain a competitive advantage.

Strategy – A course of action the company pursues to achieve its strategic aims.

Strategic Management – The process of identifying and executing the organization’s mission by matching the company’s capabilities with the demands of its environment.

Vision Statement – A general statement of the firm’s intended direction; it shows, in broad terms, “what we want to become.”

Mission Statement – Summarizes the answer to the question, “What business are we in?”

Corporate-Level Strategy – Type of strategy that identifies the portfolio of businesses that, in total, comprise the company and the ways in which these businesses relate to each other.

Copyright© 2020 Pearson Education, Inc.

Chapter 3: Human Resource Management Strategy and Analysis

3-13

Competitive Strategy – A strategy that identifies how to build and strengthen the business’s long-term competitive position in the marketplace.

Competitive Advantage – Any factors that allow an organization to differentiate its product or service from those of its competitors to increase market share.

Functional Strategy – A strategy that identifies the broad activities that each department will pursue in order to help the business accomplish its competitive goals.

Strategic Human Resource Management – Formulating and executing human resource policies and practices that produce the employee competencies and behaviors the company needs to achieve its strategic aims.

Strategy Map – A strategic planning tool that shows the “big picture” of how each department’s performance contributes to achieving the company’s overall strategic goal.

HR Scorecard – A process for assigning financial and nonfinancial goals or metrics to the human resource management related chain of activities required for achieving the company’s strategic aims and for monitoring results.

Digital Dashboard – Presents the manager with desktop graphs and charts, and a computerized picture of where the company stands on all those metrics from the HR Scorecard process.

Human Resource Metric – The quantitative gauge of human resource management activities, such as employee turnover, hours of training per employees, or qualified applicants per position.

Strategy-Based Metrics – Metrics that specifically focus on measuring the activities that contribute to achieving a company’s strategic aims.

HR Audit – An analysis by which an organization measures where it currently stands and determines what it has to accomplish to improve its HR function.

High-Performance Work System (HPWS) – A set of human resource management policies and practices that promote organizational effectiveness.

Copyright© 2020 Pearson Education, Inc.

Part Two Recruitment, Placement, and Talent Management Chapter 4 Job Analysis and the Talent Management Process Lecture Outline: The Talent Management Process Talent Management Software The Basics of Job Analysis What is Job Analysis?

Use of Job Analysis Information Conducting a Job Analysis Improving Performance: HR as a Profit Center Methods for Collecting Job Analysis Information The Interview Questionnaires Observation Participant Diary/Logs Quantitative Job Analysis Techniques Online Job Analysis Methods Writing Job Descriptions Diversity Counts Job Identification Job Summary Relationships Responsibilities and Duties Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media Know Your Employment Law Standards of Performance and Working Conditions Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses Writing Job Specifications Specifications for Trained versus Untrained Personnel Specifications Based on Judgment HR and the Gig Economy: Do Gig Workers Need Job Specifications?

Job Specifications Based on Statistical Analysis The Job-Requirements Matrix Employee Engagement Guide for Managers Using Competencies Models Improving Performance: The Strategic Context How to Write Competencies Statements Chapter Review

..

Chapter 4: Job Analysis and the Talent Management Process

4-2

Where Are We Now… The main purpose of this chapter is to show you how to analyze jobs and write job descriptions.

We discuss several techniques for analyzing jobs, and explain how to write job descriptions and job specifications. The main topics we address include the talent management process, the basics of job analysis, methods of collecting job analysis information, writing job descriptions, writing job specifications, employee engagement and job analysis, and using models and profiles in talent management.

Interesting Issues: When Daimler opened its Mercedes-Benz assembly plant in Alabama, its managers had a dilemma. Their strategy was to create a high-performance plant, one Daimler could then extend to its other plants in America, South Africa, Brazil, and Germany. The dilemma was that plant managers could not hire, train, or pay their employees unless they knew what each employee was expected to do. But in this plant, self-managing teams would assemble the vehicles, so teammembers’ jobs might change every day. How do you hire-people when their job duties are always changing? We’ll see what they did.

Learning Objectives: 4-1. Define talent management, and explain what talent management-oriented managers do.

4-2. Discuss the process of job analysis, including why it is important.

4-3. Explain and use at least three methods of collecting job analysis information.

4-4. Explain how you would write a job description, and what sources you would use.

4-5. Explain how to write a job specification.

4-6. Give examples of competency-based job analysis.

Annotated Outline: I.

The Talent Management Process – a holistic, integrated, and results and goal-oriented process of planning recruiting, selecting, developing, managing, and compensating employees.

A. Improving Performance Through HRIS: Talent Management Software – because talent management is holistic and interdependent, many employers use talent management software systems to coordinate their talent-related activities.

II.

The Basics of Job Analysis A. What is Job Analysis? – it is the procedure through which you determine the duties of the company’s positions and the characteristics of the people to hire for them.

B. The Use of Job Analysis Information

..

Chapter 4: Job Analysis and the Talent Management Process

4-3

1. Recruitment and Selection – information about what duties the job entails and what human characteristics are required to perform these activities helps managers to decide what sort of people to recruit and hire.

2. EEO Compliance – job analysis is a crucial step in validating all major human resources practices.

3. Performance Appraisal – compares each employee’s actual performance with his or her duties and performance standard. Managers use job analysis to learn what these duties and standards are.

4. Compensation – (such as salary and bonus) usually depends on the job’s required skill and education level, safety hazards, degree of responsibility, and so on—all factors you assess through job analysis.

5. Training – the job description lists the job’s specific duties and requisite skills—thus pinpointing what training the job requires.

C. Conducting a Job Analysis – There are six steps in doing a job analysis: 1. Step One: Decide How You Will Use the Information 2. Step Two: Review Relevant Background Information About the Job, Such as Organizational Charts and Process Charts a. Workflow Analysis b. Improving Performance: HR as a Profit Center c. Business Process Reengineering d. Job Redesign 3. Step Three: Select Representative Positions 4. Step Four: Actually Analyze the Job 5. Step Five: Verify the Job Analysis Information with the Worker Performing the Job and with His or Her Immediate Supervisor 6. Step Six: Develop a Job Description and Job Specification III. Methods for Collecting Job Analysis Information – there are many ways (interviews or questionnaires, for instance) to collect job information. The basic rule is to use those that best fit your purpose.

A. The Interview – the three types of interviews managers use to collect job analysis data are: individual (to get the employee’s perspective on the job’s duties and responsibilities, group (when large numbers of employees perform the same job), and supervisor (to get his/her perspective on the job’s duties and responsibilities).

1. Typical Questions – “What is the job being performed?”; “In what activities do you participate?”; “What are the health and safety conditions?”

2. Structured Interviews – many managers use questionnaires to guide the interview. Figure 4-4 presents one example.

3. Pros and Cons – interviews are simple, quick, and more comprehensive because the interviewer can unearth activities that may never appear in written form. The main problem is distortion, which may arise from the jobholder’s need to impress the perceptions of others.

4. Interviewing Guidelines – several techniques to keep in mind when conducting interviews are discussed.

B. Questionnaires – structured or unstructured questionnaires may be used to obtain job analysis information. Questionnaires can be a quick, efficient way of gathering

..

Chapter 4: Job Analysis and the Talent Management Process

4-4

information from a large number of employees. But, developing and testing a questionnaire can be expensive and time consuming.

C. Observation – direct observations are useful when jobs consist of mainly observable physical activity as opposed to mental activity. A potential problem with direct observations is reactivity, which is where workers change what they normally do because they are being watched. Managers often use direct observation and interviewing together.

D. Participant Diary/Logs – in a diary or log, the employee records every activity he/she engages in, along with the amount of time needed to perform each activity, in order to produce a complete picture of the job. Pocket dictating machines can help remind the worker to enter data at specific times and eliminate the challenge of trying to remember at a later time what was done.

E. Quantitative Job Analysis Techniques 1. Position Analysis Questionnaire (PAQ) – a questionnaire containing 194 items used to collect quantifiable data representing five basic elements: 1) having decision-making/communication/social responsibilities, 2) performing skilled activities, 3) being physically active, 4) operating vehicles/equipment, and 5) processing information.

2. Department of Labor Procedure (DOL) – a standardized method for rating, classifying, and comparing virtually every kind of job based on data, people, and things. Table 4-1 shows the DOL method.

F. Online Job Analysis Methods – employers increasingly rely on electronic or Webbased job analysis methods. Then, rather than collecting information about the job though direct interviews and questionnaires, the analysts use online systems to send questionnaires to job experts in remote locations. Of course instruction should be clear and the process should be tested first.

IV. Writing Job Descriptions A. Diversity Counts – Figures 4-7 and 4-8 present two sample forms.

B. Job Identification – contains the job title, the Fair Labor Standards Act (FLSA) status, date, and possible space to indicate who approved the description, the location of the job, the immediate supervisor’s title, salary, and/or pay scale.

C. Job Summary – should summarize the essence of the job and include only its major functions or activities.

D. Relationships – occasionally a relationships statement is included. It shows the jobholders’ relationships with others inside and outside the organization.

E. Responsibilities and Duties – this is the heart of the job description. It should present a list of the job’s significant responsibilities and duties.

F. Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media G. Know Your Employment Law 1. Writing Job Descriptions That Comply with the ADA H. Standards of Performance and Working Conditions – states the standards the employee is expected to achieve under each of the job description’s main duties and responsibilities.

I. Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses – the

..

Chapter 4: Job Analysis and the Talent Management Process

4-5

U.S. Department of Labor’s online occupational information network that is free to use is O*NET (http://online.onecenter.org ) The steps in using O*NET to facilitate writing a job description is: 1. Review your Plan.

2. Develop an Organization Chart.

3. Use a Job Analysis Questionnaire.

4. Obtain Job Duties from O*NET. 5. List the Job’s Human Requirements from O*NET. 6. Finalize the Job Description.

V. Writing Job Specifications – takes the job description and answers the question, “what human traits and experience are required to do this job effectively?”

A. Specifications for Trained versus Untrained Personnel – writing job specifications for trained employees is relatively straightforward because they are likely to focus on traits like length of previous service, quality of relevant training, and previous job performance. Writing job specifications for untrained employees is more complex because they are more likely to specify qualities such as physical traits, personality, interests, or sensory skills that imply some potential for performing or being trained to perform on the job.

B. Specifications Based on Judgment – job specifications may come from educated guesses or judgments, or from competencies listed in Web-based job descriptions like those listed at www.jobdescription.com or O*Net online (http://online.onetcenter.org).

C. Job Specifications Based on Statistical Analysis 1. Basing job specifications on statistical analysis is more defensible, but it is a more difficult approach than the judgmental approach.

2. The aim of the statistical approach is to determine statistically the relationship between 1) some predictor or human trait, such as height, intelligence, or finger dexterity, and 2) some indicator or criterion of job effectiveness.

3. The five steps in statistical analysis are: a) analyze the job and decide how to measure job performance; b) select personal traits like finger dexterity that you believe should predict successful performance; c) test candidates for these traits; d) measure these candidates’ subsequent job performance; and e) statistically analyze the relationship between the human trait and job performance.

D. The Job Requirements Matrix – a popular way to use job descriptions and specifications. The job matrix lists the information in five columns: main job duties, task statements, importance of each main job duty, time spent on each, and the knowledge skills and abilities and other human characteristics (KSAO) related to each main job duty.

VI.

Employee Engagement Guide for Managers The human resource consulting company Development Dimensions International identified characteristics that predicted whether someone would be engaged. These traits included adaptability, passion for work, emotional maturity, positive disposition, self-

..

Chapter 4: Job Analysis and the Talent Management Process

4-6

advocacy, and achievement orientation. A suggestion is to seek out people who have records of being engaged employees. Because past behavior is often the best predictor of future behavior, one suggestion is to look for examples of engagement in other areas of life.

VII.

Using Competencies Models – profiles giving the knowledge, skills, and experience someone needs to do the job. Such models or profiles (see Figure 4-10) list the competencies employees must be able to exhibit to get their jobs done A. Improving Performance: The Strategic Context B. How to Write Competency Statements – the idea competency statement will include three elements: the name of a brief description, description of the observable behaviors, and proficiency levels.

Chapter Review Chapter Section Summaries: 4-1. Employers today often view all the staff-train-reward activities as part of a single integrated talent management process.

4-2. Job analysis is the procedure through which you determine the duties of the department’s positions and the characteristics of the people to hire for them.

4-3. There are various methods for collecting job analysis information.

4-4. Managers should know how to write job descriptions.

4-5. In writing job specifications, it’s important to distinguish between specifications for trained verses untrained personnel.

4-6. With competencies models and profiles, the aim is to create descriptions of what is required for exceptional performance in a given role or job, in terms of required competencies, knowledge, and experience.

Discussion Questions: 4-1. Why, in summary, should managers think of staffing, training, appraising and paying employees as a talent management process?

Students’ answers may vary but all answers should include something related to the importance of maintaining and fostering quality employees. These different HR areas can be used to select employees with high performing potential and continuously grow and develop them.

4-2. What items are typically included in the job description?

While there is no standard format, most descriptions contain sections that cover job

..

Chapter 4: Job Analysis and the Talent Management Process

4-7

identification, a job summary, a listing of responsibilities and duties, the job incumbent’s authority, and performance standards. It may also contain information regarding the job’s working conditions and the job specifications. Many employers use Internet sources such as www.jobdescription.com to facilitate writing job descriptions.

4-3. We discussed several methods for collecting job analysis data—questionnaires, the position analysis questionnaire, and so on. Compare and contrast these methods, explaining what each is useful for and listing the pros and cons of each.

Interviews are probably the most widely used method of collecting information for job analysis. The interview allows the incumbent to report activities that might not otherwise come to light (mental activities and activities that occur only occasionally). Observation is useful for jobs that consist mainly of physical activity that is clearly observable.

Questionnaires are a quick and efficient way of obtaining information from a large number of employees; however, development costs can be high. Participant diary/logs can provide a comprehensive picture of a job, especially when supplemented with interviews; however, many employees do not respond well to the request to record all their daily activities.

Quantitative job analysis techniques, such as PAQ, DOL, and Functional Job Analysis, are more appropriate when the aim is to assign a quantitative value to each job so that jobs can be compared for pay purposes.

4-4. Describe the types of information typically found in a job specification.

It should include a list of the human traits and experience needed to perform the job.

These might include education, skills, behaviors, personality traits, work experience, sensory skills, etc.

4-5. Explain how you would conduct a job analysis.

There are six major steps in a well-conducted job analysis: 1) Determine how the job analysis information will be used and how to collect the necessary information; 2) Collect background information such as organization charts, process charts, and job descriptions; 3) Select representative positions to be analyzed; 4) Collect job analysis information; 5) Review the information with the participants; 6) Develop job descriptions and job specifications.

4-6. Do you think companies can really do without detailed job descriptions? Why or why not?

Students can discuss this topic in small groups.4-7. Explain how you would create a job requirements matrix for a job.

The first step in creating the job requirements matrix is to write one task statement for each of the jobs’ tasks. Each task statement shows what the worker does on a particular job task,

..

Chapter 4: Job Analysis and the Talent Management Process

4-8

how the worker does the task, the knowledge, skills, and aptitudes required to do the task, and the purpose of the task. Each task should identify the knowledge skills and abilities and other characteristics needed to perform the job.

Second, the job analysis takes the resulting task statements for the jobs and groups them into four or five main job duties. Finally, the job analyst compiles all this information in a job requirements matrix for a particular job.

The job matrix lists the following information: each of the jobs’ main duties, task statements associated with each job or duty, the relative importance of each main job duty, the time spent on each main job duty, and the knowledge, skills, abilities, and other characteristics or competencies related to each main job duty. This type of job matrix provides a more complete picture of what a worker does on the job and how and why he or she does the job more completely than just a job description.

4-8. In a company with only 25 employees, is there less need for job descriptions? Why or why not?

It is clearly more difficult to write job descriptions for positions that may have broad responsibilities because of the organization’s size. This does not, however, mean that it is less important. Look for sound arguments and reasoning. Again, the ADA applies to companies with as few as 15 employees. What other ways can a small employer successfully document the “essential functions” of a job?

Individual and Group Activities: 4-9. Working individually or in groups, obtain copies of job descriptions for clerical positions at the college or university where you study, or the firm where you work.

What types of information do they contain? Do they give you enough information to explain what the job involves and how to do it? How would you improve on the descriptions?

Based on our experience, it is very likely that at least some of the job descriptions will not contain all the information that is supposed to be there. Use this as an opportunity to discuss the problems that may be created by the missing information.

4-10. Working individually or in groups, use O*Net to develop a job description for your professor in this class. Based on that, use your judgement to develop a job specification. Compare your conclusions with those of other students or groups.

Were there any significant differences? What do you think accounted for the differences?

The students should go to the O*Net website at http://online.onetcenter.org to find sample job descriptions in order to create a job description for you. Once they create a job description, they should develop a job specification.

..

Chapter 4: Job Analysis and the Talent Management Process

4-9

4-11. Appendix A and B at the end of this book list the knowledge someone studying for the HRCI (Appendix A) or SHRM (Appendix B) certification exam needs to have in each area of human resource management (such as in Strategic Management and Workforce Planning). In groups of several students, do four things: (1) review Appendix A and/or B; (2) identify the material in this chapter that relates to the Appendix A and/or B required knowledge lists; (3) write four multiple-choice exam questions on this material that you believe would be suitable for inclusion in the HRCI exam and/or SHRM exam; and (4) if time permits, have someone from your team post your team’s questions in front of the class, so the students in all teams can answer the exam questions created by the other teams.

Topics covered in this chapter include job analysis; how to write job descriptions and develop job competencies; identification and documentation of essential job functions for positions; and establishing hiring criteria based on the competencies needed.

Experiential Exercise: The Instructor’s Job Description Purpose: The purpose of this exercise is to give you experience in developing a job description by developing one for your instructor.

Required Understanding: You should understand the mechanics of job analysis and be thoroughly familiar with the job analysis questionnaires. (See Figures 4-4 and 4-9).

How to Set up the Exercise/Instructions: Set up groups of several students for this exercise.

As in all exercises in this book, the groups should be separated and should not converse with each other. Half the groups in the class will develop a job description using the job analysis questionnaire (Figure 4-4), and the other half of the groups will develop it using the job description questionnaire (Figure 4-9). Each student should review his or her questionnaire (as appropriate) before joining his or her group.

4-12. Each group should do a job analysis of the instructor's job: Half of the groups will use the Figure 4-4 job analysis questionnaire for this purpose, and half will use the Figure 4-9 job description questionnaire.

4-13. Based on this information, each group will develop its own job description and job specification for the instructor.

4-14. Next, each group should choose a partner group, one that developed the job description and job specification using the alternate method. (A group that used the job analysis questionnaire should be paired with a group that used the job description questionnaire.)

4-15. Finally, within each of these new combined groups, compare and critique each of the two sets of job descriptions and job specifications. Did each job analysis method provide different types of information? Which seems superior? Does one seem more advantageous for some types of jobs than others?

..

Chapter 4: Job Analysis and the Talent Management Process

4-10

Application Case: The Flood 4-16. Should Phil and Linda ignore the old timers' protests and write up the job descriptions as they see fit? Why? Why not? How would you go about resolving the differences?

In all likelihood, the old timers are accurate in their descriptions. There are several of them, and it appears that all of their descriptions agree. Also, since they were the ones actually doing the work, it is likely that they were the only ones who knew what was actually being done. One way to resolve the differences would be to examine the specific items that Phil and Maybelline feel the old timers are padding their jobs with. Ask for evidence from the old timers that they did these functions, and ask for evidence from Phil and Maybelline that someone else carried out those tasks.

4-17. How would you have conducted the job analysis? What should Phil do now?

Other options may have been to conduct personal interviews instead of using the questionnaires. However, it is unlikely that the resulting disagreement would have been avoided by using another method. The method they used was a good one. hil has several courses of action available to him. The best may be to allow the process to go on with the old timers’ job descriptions.

Continuing Case: Carter Cleaning Company – The Job Description 4-18. What should be the format and final form of the store manager’s job description?

Students may recommend that Jennifer include a standard of performance section in the job description. This lists the standards the employee is expected to achieve under each of the job description’s main duties and responsibilities, and would address the problem of employees not understanding company policies, procedures, and expectations. In addition, students may recommend that Jennifer instead take a competency-based approach, which describes the job in terms of the measurable, observable, and behavioral competencies that an employee doing that job must exhibit. Because competency analysis focuses more on “how” the worker meets the job’s objectives or actually accomplishes the work, it is more worker-focused.

4-19. Is it practical to specify standards and procedures in the body of the job description, or should these be kept separately?

They do not need to be kept separately, and in fact both Jennifer and the employees would be better served by incorporating standards and procedures into the body of the description. The exception to this would be if the standards and procedures are so complex or involved that it becomes more pragmatic to maintain a separate procedure manual.

..

Chapter 4: Job Analysis and the Talent Management Process

4-11

4-20. How should Jennifer go about collecting the information required for the standards, procedures, and job description?

She should first conduct the job analysis by collecting information about the work activities, human behaviors, machines, tools, equipment, work aids, performance standards, job context, and human requirements. The best methods for collecting this information in this case are through interviews, questionnaires, observations, and employee diaries/logs. In addition, she should ensure that she is identifying the essential functions of the job, and that the descriptions are ADA-compliant.

4-21. What, in your opinion, should the store manager’s job description look like and contain?

The store manager’s job description should include a list of the job’s significant responsibilities and duties. For example, the following duties should include quality control, store appearance and cleanliness, customer relations, bookkeeping and cash management, cost control and productivity, damage control, pricing, inventory control, etc.

The job description should also include any educational requirements as well as information regarding working conditions.

Hotel Paris: Improving Performance at the Hotel Paris – The New Job Descriptions 4-22. Based on the hotel’s stated strategy, list at least four or more important employee behaviors important for Hotel Paris’s staff to exhibit.

Students’ answers will vary. Important employee behaviors might include:  The ability to project a positive attitude and put the customer’s needs first, even if the customer is curt.  Showing tact and discretion in responding to personal requests from a hotel guest.  Being aware of the reactions of others and responding to those reactions in an appropriate way.  Being able to handle multiple priorities without getting “flustered.”  The ability to resolve billing issues with discretion and a positive demeanor.

4-23. If time permits, spend some time prior to class observing the front desk clerk at a local hotel. In any case, create a job description for a Hotel Paris front-desk clerk.

Use of O*NET is recommended. A full description of tasks and responsibilities is located under the job title “Hotel, Motel, and Resort Desk Clerks.

..

Chapter 4: Job Analysis and the Talent Management Process

4-12

Key Terms: Talent Management – The goal-oriented and integrated process of planning, recruiting, developing, managing, and compensating employees.

Job Analysis – The procedure for determining the duties and skill requirements of a job and the kind of person who should be hired for it.

Job Description – A list of a job's duties, responsibilities, reporting relationships, working conditions, and supervisory responsibilities – one product of a job analysis.

Job Specifications – A list of a job's "human requirements," that is, the requisite education, skills, personality, and so on – another product of a job analysis.

Organization Chart – A chart that shows the organization-wide distribution of work, with titles of each position and interconnecting lines that show who reports to and communicates with whom.

Process Chart – A work flow chart that shows the flow of inputs to and outputs from a particular job.

Workflow Analysis – A detailed study of the flow of work from job to job in a work process.

Business Process Reengineering – Redesigning business processes, usually by combining steps, so that small multifunction process teams using information technology do the jobs formerly done by a sequence of departments.

Job Enlargement – Assigning workers additional same-level activities.

Job Rotation – Systematically moving workers from one job to another.

Job Enrichment – Redesigning jobs in a way that increases the opportunities for the worker to experience feelings of responsibility, achievement, growth, and recognition.

Diary/Log – Daily listings made by workers of every activity in which they engaged along with the time.

Position Analysis Questionnaire (PAQ) – A questionnaire used to collect quantifiable data concerning the duties and responsibilities of various jobs.

Standard Occupational Classification (SOC) – Classifies all workers into one of 23 major groups of jobs, which are subdivided into minor groups of jobs and detailed occupations.

..

Chapter 4: Job Analysis and the Talent Management Process

4-13

Job-requirements Matrix – A more complete description of what the worker does and how and why he or she does it; it clarifies each tasks purpose and each duty’s required knowledge, skills, abilities, and other characteristics.

Task Statement – Written item that shows what the worker does on one particular job task; how the worker does it; the knowledge, skills, and aptitudes required to do it; and the purpose of the task.

Competency-Based Job Analysis – Describing the job in terms of the measurable, observable, behavioral competencies (knowledge, skills, and/or behaviors) that an employee doing that job must exhibit to do the job well.

..

Part Two Recruitment, Placement, and Talent Management Chapter 5 Personnel Planning and Recruiting Lecture Outline: Introduction Workforce Planning and Forecasting Strategy and Workforce Planning Improving Performance: The Strategic Context Forecasting Personnel Needs (Labor Demand) Forecasting the Supply of Inside Candidates Forecasting the Supply of Outside Candidates Predictive Workforce Monitoring Match Projected Labor Supply and Demand with a Plan Succession Planning Why Effective Recruiting Is Important Improving Recruitment Effectiveness: Recruiters, Sources, and Branding The Recruiting Yield Pyramid Know Your Employment Law Internal Sources of Candidates Finding Internal Candidates Employee Engagement Guide for Managers Promotion from Within Outside Sources of Candidates Informal Recruiting and the Hidden Job Market Recruiting via the Internet Using Recruitment Software and Artificial Intelligence Trends Shaping HR: Science in Talent Management Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media Advertising Employment Agencies Recruitment Process Outsourcers On-Demand Recruiting Services HR and the Gig Economy: Temporary Workers and Alternative Staffing Know Your Employment Law Offshoring and Outsourcing Jobs Executive Recruiters Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses Referrals and Walk-Ins College Recruiting ..

Chapter 5: Personnel Planning and Recruiting

5-2

Military Personnel Improving Performance: HR as a Profit Center Recruiting a More Diverse Workforce Recruiting Women Recruiting Single Parents Older Workers Diversity Counts: Older Workers Recruiting Minorities The Disabled Developing and Using Application Forms Purpose of Application Forms Application Guidelines Know Your Employment Law Mandatory Arbitration Building Your Management Skills: The Human Side of Recruiting Chapter Review

Where Are We Now… The purpose of this chapter is to improve your effectiveness in recruiting candidates. The topics we discuss include personnel planning, forecasting, recruiting job candidates, and developing and using application forms.

Interesting Issues: Like most luxury hotel businesses, Four Seasons builds its strategy around offering superior customer service, and doing that requires staffing its hotels with highly motivated and high-morale employees.

Therefore, in thinking through how to recruit employees, Four Seasons managers sought a way to use recruitment to encourage the employee motivation and morale that would lead to improved customer service. We will see what they did.

Learning Objectives: 5-1. Define workforce planning, and explain how to develop a workforce plan.

5-2. Explain the need for effective recruiting and how to make recruiting more effective.

5-3. Discuss the main internal sources of candidates.

5-4. Describe how to use recruiting to improve employee engagement.

5-5. Discuss the main outside sources of candidates, and create an employment ad.

5-6. Explain how to recruit a more diverse workforce.

5-7. Discuss practical guidelines for obtaining application information.

Annotated Outline: Introduction – Figure 5-1 illustrates the recruiting and selecting process.

..

Chapter 5: Personnel Planning and Recruiting

I. Workforce Planning and Forecasting A. Strategy and Workforce Planning – workforce plans should flow from the firm's strategic plans and will be affected by the need to fill or eliminate positions and reduce or increase cost.

B. Improving Performance: The Strategic Context C. Forecasting Personnel Needs (Labor Demand) – forecast revenues, and then estimate the size of the staff required to achieve this sales volume.

1. Trend Analysis requires studying a firm’s employment levels over a period of years to predict future needs.

2. Ratio Analysis involves making forecasts based on the ratio between (1) some causal factor, such as sales volume, and (2) the number of employees required, like the number of salespeople.

3. The Scatter Plot shows graphically how two variables (such as sales and your firm’s staffing levels) are related.

4. Managerial Judgment – is needed to adjust the forecast.

D. Forecasting the Supply of Inside Candidates – (availability of candidates) 1. Personnel Replacement Charts – show the present performance and promotability for each position’s potential replacement. Position replacement cards can also be created for each position to show possible replacements as well as their present performance, promotion potential, and training.

2. Computerized skills inventories systems are used to help management anticipate staffing and skill shortages and facilitate workforce planning, recruitment, and training.

3. Markov Analysis involves creating a matrix that shows probabilities that employees in the chain of feeder positions for a key job will move from position to position and therefore be available to fill the key position.

E. Forecasting the Supply of Outside Candidates – this may involve considering general economic conditions and the expected rate of unemployment.

F. Predictive Workforce Monitoring – having a talent management philosophy for workforce planning requires organizations to pay continuous attention to workforce planning issues.

G. Match Projected Labor Supply and Labor Demand – this is laying out the employer’s projected workforce and skill gaps, as well as staffing plans for filling these gaps.

H. Succession Planning – involves developing workforce plans for the company’s top positions and developing organizational leadership to enhance performance.

II. Why Effective Recruiting Is Important A. The Recruiting Yield Pyramid is used by some managers to gauge the number of applicants they must generate to hire the required number of new employees. Figure 5-5 illustrates this example.

B. Know Your Employment Law ..

5-3

Chapter 5: Personnel Planning and Recruiting 1. Recruiting Employees – numerous federal, state, and local laws and court decisions restrict what employers can and cannot do when recruiting job applicants.

C. The Supervisor’s Role – the HR manager charged with filling an open position is seldom familiar with the job itself and must rely on the supervisor to give the details about and specifications of the job or position.

III. Internal Sources of Candidates A. Finding Internal Candidates – in other words, current employees or “hiring from within” are often the best source of candidates and is increasingly popular.

IV. Employee Engagement Guide for Managers A. Promotion from Within – many employers encourage internal recruiting, on the reasonable assumption that doing so improves employee engagement.

V. Outside Sources of Candidates A. Informal Recruiting and the Hidden Job Market – many (or most) job openings aren’t publicized at all; jobs are created and become available when employers serendipitously encounter the right candidates.

B. Recruiting via the Internet – most employers find that the Internet is their best choice for recruitment efforts.

1. Pros – online recruiting generates more responses, more quickly, and for a longer time at less cost than just about any other method. Online recruiting also has a stronger effect on applicant attraction than printed ads do.

2. Cons – online recruiting may inadvertently exclude older people and some minorities since they are less likely to use the Internet. Internet overload is another.

C. Using Recruitment Software and Artificial Intelligence: Using Applicant Tracking – most employers now use applicant tracking software to screen applicants. Most of the applicant tracking systems (ATS) is from application service providers. (ASPs) – these basically redirect applicants from the employers to the ASP’s site. Employers also use artificial intelligence based systems to improve recruitment.

D. Trends Shaping HR: Science in Talent Management – most employers use tools like job boards to produce large numbers of recruits, and then use ATS and screening systems to cut those numbers down.

1. Improving Online Recruiting Effectiveness – Figure 5-6 illustrates.

E. Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media – Accenture predicts that about 80% of new recruits will soon come through prospective employees’ social media connections.

F. Advertising – Web-based recruiting is replacing traditional help wanted print ads, at a glance almost any paper will confirm that print ads are still popular. To use successfully, employers should address two issues: the advertising medium and the ad construction. ..

5-4

Chapter 5: Personnel Planning and Recruiting

5-5

1. The Media – the best medium should be selected based on the positions for which you are recruiting.

2. Constructing (Writing) the Ad – many experienced advertisers use a guide called AIDA (attention, interest, desire, action) to construct their ads. Figure 5-7 illustrates this AIDA guide.

G. Employment Agencies – there are three main types of employment agencies: 1) public agencies operated by federal, state, or local government; 2) agencies associated with nonprofit organizations; and 3) privately owned agencies.

H. Public and Nonprofit Agencies – every state has a public, state-run employment service agency supported by the Department of Labor, in part through grants and other assistance, such as a nationwide computerized job bank. Most (non-profit) professional and technical societies and special public agencies have units that help their members or people in special categories find jobs.

I. Private Agencies – are important sources of clerical, white-collar, and managerial personnel. They charge fees (set by state law and posted in their offices) for each applicant they place. The employer pays the fee.

J. Recruitment Process Outsourcers – special vendors that handle all or most of an employer’s recruiting needs K. On-demand Recruiting Services (ODRS) – are recruiters who are paid by the hour or project, instead of a percentage fee.

L. Temporary Workers and Alternative Staffing – employers increasingly supplement their permanent workforces by hiring contingent or temporary workers. Also known as part-time or just-in-time workers. Employers have used “temps” for short-term projects and to fill-in for employees who were out sick or on vacation.

1. The Temp Agency – employers can hire temp workers either through direct hires or through the use of temporary staff agencies.

2. Temp Employee’s Concerns – to make temporary relationships successful, those supervising temps should understand their concerns.

M. Know Your Employment Law 1. Contract Employees – for the purpose of most employment laws, with certain limited exceptions, employees of temporary staffing firms working in an employer’s workplace will be considered to be employees both of the agency and of the employer.

2. Poaching – poaching employees from competitors can produce good recruits but can be problematic.

N. Offshoring/Outsourcing Jobs – rather than bringing people in to do the company’s job, outsourcing and offshoring sends the job out. There are several specific issues that the HR manager should keep in mind when considering this option.

O. Executive recruiters, also called headhunters, are special employment agencies retained by employers to seek out top-management talent for their clients.

1. Working with Recruiters – retaining and working with executive recruiters requires some caution. ..

Chapter 5: Personnel Planning and Recruiting

5-6

2. Internal Recruiting – many employers are bringing management offices doing most of their own management recruiting.

P. Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses 1. Recruiting 101 Q. Referral and Walk-Ins – employee referral campaigns are a very important recruiting option. The big advantage is that referrals generate “more applicants, more hires, and a higher yield ratio (hires/applicants).” Walk-ins are direct applicants made at your office.

R. College Recruiting – involves sending employers’ representatives to college campuses to prescreen applicants and create an applicant pool from the graduating class. This type of recruiting can be expensive. There are two main goals: 1) to determine if a candidate is worthy of further consideration, and 2) to make the employer attractive to candidates.

S. On-Campus recruiting goals involve attracting good candidates and determining whether a candidate is worthy of further consideration. The school’s reputation and the performance of previous hires from that source affect school selection.

1. Internships – this can be a win-win situation for the student and the employer. For the student, it can mean honing business skills, learning more about potential employers, and discovering one’s career likes (and dislikes). For employers, they can use interns to make useful contributions while evaluating them as possible full-time employees.

T. Military Personnel – returning and discharged U.S. military personnel provide an excellent soure of trained and disciplined recruits.

U. Improving Performance: HR as Profit Center (Cutting Recuritment Costs) VI. Recruiting a More Diverse Workforce A. Recruiting Women – the most effective strategy is top management driven.

Here, the employer emphasizes the importance of recruiting women (as well as men), identifies gaps in the recruitment and retention of women, and puts in place a comprehensive plan to attract women applicants.

B. Recruiting Single Parents – recruiting and keeping them requires understanding the problems they face, such as a need for personal sick time or excused days off to care for sick children. Many firms have flextime programs that provide employees with some schedule flexibility.

C. Older Workers – about 32% of Americans age 65 to 69 were employed recently, as were 19% of all those over 65. It therefore makes sense for employers to encourage older workers to stay (or to come to work at the company). The big draw is to provide opportunities for flexible (and often shorter) work schedules.

D. Diversity Counts: Older Workers – studies found not a negative but a weakly positive relationship between age and motivation and job involvement (suggesting that as age goes up, motivation rises). They did find a weak negative relationship between age and trainability.

E. Recruiting Minorities – requires employers to understand the barriers that prevent minorities from applying and to tailor their way of thinking to design HR practices that make their firms attractive to minority workers. ..

Chapter 5: Personnel Planning and Recruiting

5-7

F. The Disabled – employers can do several things to tap into this huge potential workforce. The Department of Labor’s Office of Disability Employment Policy offers several programs, and all states have local agencies that provide placement services and other recruitment and training tools.

VII. Developing and Using Application Forms A. Purpose of Application Forms – the application form is usually the first step in the prescreening process. Application forms provide four types of information: substantive matters, previous progress, stability, and prediction of which candidate will succeed on the job.

B. Application Guidelines – organizations should request detailed information on each prior employer, including the name of the supervisor and his or her email address and telephone number; this is essential for reference checking.

Also, in signing the application, the applicant should certify his or her understanding that falsified statements may be cause for dismissal, that investigation of credit, employment, and driving records is authorized, that a medical examination may be required, that drug screening tests may be required, and that employment is for no definite period.

C. Know Your Employment Law 1. Application Forms and EEO Law – application forms must comply with equal employment laws. Problematic items include: education, arrest record, who to notify in case of emergency, membership in organizations, physical handicaps, martial status, housing, and video resumes.

D. Using Application Forms to Predict Job Performance – some employers use analysis of application forms to predict employee tenure and performance.

E. Mandatory Arbitration – many employers, aware of the high cost of employment litigation, require applicants to agree to binding arbitration to settle disputes.

F. Building Your Management Skills: The Human Side of Recruiting In one survey, almost 60% of job seekers said they had a poor applicant experience; the worst feedback came from those who never even heard back from the companies they applied to. In another study, recruiter incivility hurt job seekers’ “self-efficacy”— basically, the person’s confidence in his or her ability to get a job. Most employers can and should do better.

Chapter Review Chapter Section Summaries: 5-1. Recruitment and selection start with workforce planning and forecasting.

5-2. Managers need to understand why effective recruiting is important.

5-3. Filling open positions with internal sources of candidates has several advantages.

5-4. Workforce plans influence employee engagement.

5-5. Employers use a variety of outside sources of candidates when recruiting applicants.

5-6. Understanding how to recruit a more diverse workforce is important.

5-7. Employers develop and use application forms to collect essential background information about the applicant. ..

Chapter 5: Personnel Planning and Recruiting

5-8

Discussion Questions: 5-1. Briefly outline the workforce planning process.

Workforce planning is the process of deciding what positions the firm will have to fill and how to fill them. This often starts by forecasting personnel needs, perhaps using trend analysis, ratio analysis, scatter plots, or computerized software packages. Next, employers forecast the supply of inside candidates. Here employers use manual systems and replacement charts and computerized skills inventories. Forecasting the supply of outside candidates is important, particularly when good candidates are difficult to come by.

5-2. Briefly explain each step in the recruitment and selection process.

The recruiting and selecting process can be envisioned as a series of hurdles, as illustrated in Figure 5-1: 1. Decide what positions to fill, through workforce/personnel planning and forecasting.

2. Build a pool of candidates for these jobs, by recruiting internal or external candidates.

3. Have candidates complete application forms and perhaps undergo initial screening interviews.

4. Use selection tools like tests, background investigations, and physical exams to screen candidates.

5. Decide who to make an offer to by having the supervisor and perhaps others interview the candidates.

5-3. What are the four main types of information that application forms provide?

The application form is a good means of quickly collecting verifiable, and therefore potentially accurate, historical data from the candidate. It usually includes information on education, prior work history, and other experience related to the job. The application form can provide four types of information: 1. substantive matters (such as education and experience); 2. previous progress and growth; 3. stability based on previous work history; and 4. prediction of job success.

5-4. How, specifically, do equal employment laws apply to personnel recruiting activities?

The student should be able to discuss the areas in which the laws and regulations covered in Chapter 2 apply to the issues of planning and recruiting. This would include constraints on sources used for candidates (i.e. not excessive reliance on referrals), the wording of questions asked on application forms or in interviews, and planning decisions that must not be overly detrimental to a protected group.

5-5. What are the five main things you would do to recruit and retain a more diverse workforce?

..

Chapter 5: Personnel Planning and Recruiting

5-9

The student should first be able to identify groups that would create a diverse workforce.

Examples found in the text are: single parents, older workers, minorities and women, welfare recipients, and global candidates. In order to retain these employees, students would first need to understand the needs of each group, and then create plans and programs that accommodate these specific needs. For example, to attract and keep single mothers, employers could give employees schedule flexibility, and train the supervisors to have an increased awareness of, and sensitivity to, the challenges single parents face.

Individual and Group Activities: 5-6. Bring to class several classified and display ads from the Web or Sunday help wanted ads.

Analyze the effectiveness of these ads using the guidelines discussed in this chapter.

The effectiveness should be analyzed using the following list: attracts attention, develops interest, creates desire, and prompts action.

5-7. Working individually or in groups, develop a 5-year forecast of occupational market conditions for five occupations such as accountant, nurse, and engineer.

Be sure that the forecasts the students develop are grounded in information gleaned from these sources. They should do an adequate analysis of the statistics. (Explain the process of personnel planning and forecasting.)

5-8. Working individually or in groups, visit the local office of your state employment agency (or check out its site online). Come back to class prepared to discuss the following questions: What types of jobs seem to be available through this agency, predominantly?

To what extent do you think this particular agency would be a good source of professional, technical, and/or managerial applicants? What sorts of paperwork are applicants to the state agency required to complete before their applications are processed by the agency? What other services does the office provide? What other opinions did you form about the state agency?

The answers to this will vary greatly by state and local offices. Generally, these agencies may be more oriented to unskilled than skilled positions; rarely do they handle professional and managerial positions...although some do quite a bit. Although students may come back with a negative view of these offices, help them to understand the valuable role that they do play. A special note of courtesy: make sure that you have discussed this assignment with the local agency office. Surprise visits by several groups of students during busy periods can create some especially negative relations between the office and your school. Make sure the students are welcome and expected.

5-9. Working individually or in groups, find at least five employment ads either on the Internet or in a local newspaper that suggest that the company is family friendly and should appeal to women, minorities, older workers, and single parents. Discuss what the firm is doing to be family friendly. ..

Chapter 5: Personnel Planning and Recruiting

5-10

Students should identify statements in the ad that would suggest that an employer is aiming to be family friendly.

5-10. Working individually or in groups, interview a manager between the ages of 25 and 35 at a local business who manages employees age 40 or older. Ask the manager to describe three or four of his or her most challenging experiences managing older employees.

Students should probe the manager to see if he/she mentions that the older employee found the experience challenging as well.

5-11. Appendices A and B at the end of this book list the knowledge someone studying for the HRCI (Appendix A) or SHRM (Appendix B) certification exam needs to have in each area of human resource management (such as in Strategic Management and Workforce Planning). In groups of several students, do four things: (1) review Appendix A and/or B; (2) identify the material in this chapter that relates to the Appendix A and/or B required knowledge lists; (3) write four multiple-choice exam questions on this material that you believe would be suitable for inclusion in the HRCI exam and/or the SHRM exam; and, (4) if time permits, have someone from your team post your team’s questions in front of the class, so that students in all teams can answer the exam questions created by the other teams.

Experiential Exercise: The Nursing Shortage Purpose: The purpose of this exercise is to give you experience in creating a recruitment program.

Required Understanding: You should be thoroughly familiar with the contents of this chapter, and with the nurse recruitment program of a hospital such as Mt. Sinai Hospital in New York (see https://careers.mountsinai.org/).

How to Set up the Exercise/Instructions: Set up groups of four to five students for this exercise.

The groups should work separately and should not converse with each other. Each group should address the following tasks: 5-12. Based on information available on the hospital’s website, create a hard-copy ad for the hospital to place in the Sunday edition of The New York Times. Which (geographic) editions of the Times would you use, and why?

5-13. Analyze the hospital’s current online nurses’ ad. How would you improve on it?

5-14. Prepare in outline form a complete nurses’ recruiting program for this hospital, including all recruiting sources your group would use.

..

Chapter 5: Personnel Planning and Recruiting

5-11

Application Case: Techtonic Group 5-15. Specifically what recruiting sources would you use to attract participants to the Techtonic Academy, and apprenticeship programs?

Techtonic could use both external and internal recruiting sources to attract participants to the Techtonic Academy and apprenticeship programs.

Outside sources of candidates include recruiting via the Internet, advertising and employment agencies (including public and nonprofit agencies, and private agencies), temporary agencies and other alternative staffing methods, executive recruiters, college recruiting, referrals and walk-ins, and military personnel.

Internal sources of candidates utilizes job posting. For filling the company’s projected toplevel positions, succession planning—the ongoing process of systematically identifying, assessing, and developing organizational leadership to enhance performance—is the process of choice.

5-16. What other recruitment sources (other than the academy and apprenticeship programs) would you recommend Techtonic use, and why?

Referrals from current employees and others familiar with Techtonic would be an excellent recruitment source. Employers also use artificial intelligence-based systems to improve recruitment.

5-17. What suggestions would you make to Techtonic for improving its recruiting processes?

Students should refer to the section on outside source of candidates and put themselves in the shoes of a prospect to make their suggestions.

Continuing Case: Carter Cleaning Company – Getting Better Applicants 5-18. First, how would you recommend we go about reducing the turnover in our stores?

The students should base their responses on the information presented in the advertising section of the chapter, and their response should include placing and constructing ads that will attract candidates who will find the job attractive.

5-19. Provide a detailed list of recommendations concerning how we should go about increasing our pool of acceptable job applicants, so we no longer have to hire almost anyone who walks in the door. (Your recommendations regarding the latter should include completely worded online and hard-copy advertisements and recommendations regarding any other recruiting strategies you would suggest we use.)

..

Chapter 5: Personnel Planning and Recruiting

5-12

The students should review the section on outside sources of candidates, and their responses should include advertising and the possible use of employment and/or temp agencies.

Hotel Paris: Improving Performance at the Hotel Paris – The New Recruitment Process 5-20. Given the hotel’s required personnel skills, what recruiting sources would you suggest they use, and why?

Though the local paper may bring in applicants, the development of a succession plan will ensure that lower-level employees are ready to move into higher levels when an opening occurs.

College recruitment and employee referral may also be a good resource. The company should begin using selection testing, particularly in the areas of integrity and conscientiousness.

5-21. What would a Hotel Paris help wanted ad look like?

Elements from the text should be incorporated into student responses, which will vary. The hotel should consider developing a recognizable logo and color scheme, along with a standard format for ads, which should be used by the various hotels.

5-22. Based on what you know and on what you learned here in Chapter 5 of Dessler Human Resource Management, how would you suggest Hotel Paris measure the effectiveness of its recruiting efforts?

The number of qualified applicants per position, percentage of jobs filled from within, the offerto-acceptance ratio, acceptance by recruiting source, turnover by recruiting source, and selection test results by recruiting source are used by other hotels, and should be considered for use by Hotel Paris.

Key Terms: Workforce (or Employment or Personnel) Planning – The process of deciding what positions the firm will have to fill, and how to fill them.

Trend Analysis – Study of a firm's past employment needs over a period of years to predict future needs.

Ratio Analysis – A forecasting technique for determining future staff needs by using ratios between, for example, sales volume and number of employees needed.

Scatter Plot – A graphical method used to help identify the relationship between two variables.

..

Chapter 5: Personnel Planning and Recruiting

5-13

Personnel Replacement Charts – Company records showing present performance and promotablity of inside candidates for the most important positions.

Position Replacement Card – A card prepared for each position in a company to show possible replacement candidates and their qualifications.

Succession Planning – The ongoing process of systematically identifying, assessing, and developing organizational leadership to enhance performance.

Employee Recruiting – Finding and/or attracting applicants for the employer’s open positions.

Recruiting Yield Pyramid – The historical arithmetic relationships between recruitment leads and invitees, invitees and interviews, interviews and offers made, and offers made and offers accepted.

Job Posting – Publicizing an open job to employees (often by literally posting it on bulletin boards) and listing its attributes, like qualifications, supervisors, working schedule, and pay rate.

Applicant Tracking Systems (ATS) – Online systems that help employers attract, gather, screen, compile, and manage applicants.

On-Demand Recruiting Services (ODRS) – Services that provide short-term, specialized recruiting services to support specific projects without the expense of retaining traditional search firms.

Alternative Staffing – The use of nontraditional recruitment sources.

College Recruiting – Sending an employer’s representatives to college campuses to prescreen applicants and create an applicant pool from the graduating class.

Application Form – The form that provides information on education, prior work record, and skills.

..

Part Two Recruitment, Placement, and Talent Management Chapter 6 Employee Testing and Selection Lecture Outline: Why Employee Selection Is Important The Basics of Testing and Selecting Employees Reliability Validity Evidence-Based HR: How to Validate a Test Bias Utility Analysis Improving Performance: HR as a Profit Center Validity Generalization Know Your Employment Law Test Takers’ Individual Rights and Test Security Diversity Counts: Gender Issues in Testing How Do Employers Use Tests at Work?

Types of Tests Tests of Cognitive Abilities Tests of Motor and Physical Abilities Measuring Personality and Interests Improving Performance: HR Practices Around the Globe Achievement Tests Improving Performance Through HRIS: Computerization and Online Testing Trends Shaping HR: Using Analytics, Machine Learning, and Artificial Intelligence in Employee Selection Work Samples and Simulations Using Work Sampling for Employee Selection Situational Judgment Tests HR and the Gig Economy: Freelance Workers Management Assessment Centers Situational Judgment Tests HR and the Gig Economy: Freelance Workers Management Assessment Centers Situational Testing and Video-Based Situational Testing The Miniature Job Training and Evaluation Approach Realistic Job Previews Improving Performance: The Strategic Context Choosing a Selection Method Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses Background Investigations and Other Selection Methods ..

Chapter 6: Employee Testing and Selection

6-2

Why Perform Background Investigations and Reference Checks?

Know Your Employment Law Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media Using Preemployment Information Services Steps for Making the Background Check More Valuable The Polygraph and Honesty Testing Physical Exams Substance Abuse Screening Drug Testing Legal Issues Complying with Immigration Law Chapter Review

Where We Are Now… The purpose of this chapter is to explain how to use various tools to select the best candidate for the job. The main topics we’ll cover include the selection process, basic testing techniques, backgound and reference checks, ethical and legal questions in testing, types of tests, and work samples and simulations.

Interesting Issues: Zulily offers fashions, shoes, and other items through its online e-commerce site. Because it’s competing with Amazon and other such sites, Zulily has to differentiate itself. Part of how it does this is by running new sales daily, offering up to 70% off, and offering “big brands you love.” Another way is by ensuring that employees adhere to its basic values, namely: “we work for mom” (meaning “we do everything for our customers”); “make the impossible happen”; “embrace change”; “color outside the lines” (don’t imitate); “take ownership”; and “work as a team.” But with strategic values like those, how do you select employees who you’re sure will fit in? We’ll see what they did.

Learning Objectives: 6-1. Answer the question: Why is it important to test and select employees?

6-2. Explain what is meant by reliability and validity.

6-3. List and briefly describe the basic categories of selection tests, with examples.

6-4. Explain how to use two work simulations for selection.

6-5. Describe four ways to improve an employer’s background checking process.

Annotated Outline: I. Why Employee Selection Is Important – selecting the right employees is important for three main reasons: 1) employees with the right skills will perform better for you and the company; 2) it is costly to reruit and hire employees; and 3) inept hiring has legal consequences.

II. The Basics of Testing and Selecting Employees A. Reliability – refers to the consistency of scores obtained by the same person when

..

Chapter 6: Employee Testing and Selection

6-3

retested with identical or equivalent tests. You can measure reliability in several ways. One is to administer a test to a group of people one day, re-administer the same test several days later to the same group, and then correlate the first set of scores with the second (test-retest reliability estimates). Or you could administer a test and then administer what experts believe to be an equivalent test later; this would be an equivalent or alternate form estimate. Or compare the test taker's answers to certain questions on the test with his or her answers to a separate set of questions on the same test aimed at measuring the same thing. This is an internal comparison estimate.

B. Validity – tells you whether the test is measuring what you think it’s supposed to be measuring. It often refers to evidence that the test is job related – in other words, that performance on the test accurately predicts job performance. There are serveral ways to demonstrate a test’s validity: 1. Criterion validity – shows that scores on the test (predictors) are related to job performance. It involves demonstrating statistically a relationship between scores on a selection procedure and the job performance of a sample of workers.

2. Content validity – is a demonstration that the content of a selection procedure is representative of important aspects of performance on the job.

3. Construct validity – involves demonstrating that (a) a selection procedure measures a construct (an abstract idea such as morale or honesty) and (b) the construct is important for successful job performance.

C. Evidence-Based HR: How to Validate a Test – in order for a selection test to be useful, you need evidence that scores on the test relate in a predictable way to performance on the job. The validation process consists of five steps: 1. Analyze the Job – the aim is to specify the human traits and skills you believe are required for the job performance. These requirements become the predictors that also define “success on the job.” The standards of success are criteria.

2. Choose the Tests – Employers choose several tests and combine them into a test battery. The test battery aims to measure an array of possible predictors, such as aggressiveness, extroversion, and numerical ability.

3. Administer the Test – with employees currently on the job, you compare their test with their current performance. A more dependable way is to test applicants before you hire them, then measure their performance and compare it to earlier test scores.

4. Relate Your Test Scores and Criteria – ascertain if there is a significant relationship between test scores (predictors) and performance (criterion).

5. Cross-Validate and Revalidate – before using the test, you may want to check it by performing steps 3 and 4 on a new sample of employees, in other words – revalidate.

D. Bias – employers must be careful to avoid bias whenever possible.

E. Utility – knowing the test is reliable and valid is important, but one must also consider the practical use of the test. Completing a utility analysis shows the degree to which a selection test improves the quality of those selected versus what decision would have been made without it. Utility analysis usually includes the validity of the measures, a measure of job performance in dollars, the applicant’s average test scores, the cost of the measure, and the number of applicants tested and selected.

F. Improving Performance: HR as a Profit Center G. Validity Generalization – “refers to the degree to which evidence of a measure’s validity obtained in one situation can be generalized to another situation without further study.”

H. Know Your Employment Law ..

Chapter 6: Employee Testing and Selection

6-4

a. Testing and the Equal Employment Opportunity – with respect to testing, the EEO laws boil down to two things: a) you must be able to prove that your tests are related to success or failure on the job, and b) you must prove that your tests don’t unfairly discriminate against either minority or nonminority subgroups.

I. Test Takers’ Individual Rights and Test Security – test takers have certain rights to privacy and information under the American Psychological Association’s (APA) standard for educational and psychological tests. The Federal Privacy Act provides protection against disclosing information about them to people outside the company.

J. Diversity Counts: Gender Issues in Testing – gender issues may distort results.

K. How Do Employees Use Tests at Work? – in general, as work demands increase (in terms of skill requirements, training, and pay), employers tend to rely more on selection testing, and employers don’t use tests just to find good employees, but also to screen out bad ones.

III. Types of Tests A. Tests of Cognitive Abilities – cognitive tests include tests of general reasoning ability (intelligence) and tests of specific mental abilities like memory and inductive reasoning.

1. Intelligence Tests – are tests of general intellectual abilities ranging from memory, vocabulary, and verbal fluency to numerical ability.

2. Specific Cognitive Abilities – are tests (aptitudes) that include inductive and deductive reasoning, verbal comprehension, memory, and numerical ability.

B. Tests of Motor and Physical Abilities – employers may use various tests to measure such motor abilities as finger dexterity, manual dexterity, and reaction time. They may also want to measure such physical abilities as static strength, dynamic strength, body coordination, and stamina.

C. Measuring Personality and Interests – can be used to assess characteristics such as attitude, motivation, and temperament. Industrial psychologists often focus on the “big five” personality dimensions: extraversion emotional stability/neuroticism, agreeableness, conscientiousness, and openness to experience. Interest inventories compare one’s interest to those of people in various occupations.

D. Improving Performance: HR Practices Around the Globe 1. Testing for Assignments Abroad – living and working abroad requires some special talents.

Employers often use special inventories such as the Global Competencies Inventory (GCI) which focuses on three aspects of adaptability: Perception Management Factor, Relationship Management Factor, and Self-Management Factor.

E. Achievement Tests – measures what someone has learned.

F. Improve Performance Through HRIS: Computerization and Online Testing G. Trends Shaping HR: Using Analytics, Machine Learning and Artificial Intelligence in Employee Selection 1. Machine learning basically refers to software that can improve its own performance and learn on its own.

2. Artificial intelligence basically means using technology (particularly computers) to carry out tasks in a way that we would consider “human” or “smart.”

..

Chapter 6: Employee Testing and Selection

6-5

IV. Work Samples and Simulations A. Using Work Sampling for Employee Selection – the basic procedure is to select a sample of several tasks crucial to performing the job, and then to test applicants on them. Figure 6-7 illustrates this.

B. Situational Judgment Tests – are personnel tests “designed to assess an applicant’s judgment regarding a situation encountered in the workplace.”

C. HR and the Gig Economy: Freelance Workers D. Management Assessment Centers – is a 2-to 3-day simulation in which candidates perform realistic management tasks under the observation of experts who appraise each candidate’s leadership potential. Typical simulated tasks include: The in-basket, Leaderless group discussion, Management games, Individual oral presentations, Testing, and The interview.

E. Situational Testing and Video-Based Situational Testing – typically presents the candidate with several online or computer video situations, each followed by one or more multiple-choice questions.

F. The Miniature Job Training and Evaluation Approach – involves training candidates to perform several of the job’s tasks and then evaluating the candidates’ performance prior to hire.

G. Realistic Job Previews – being explicit about work schedules, preferences, and other job standards during the interview can help reduce turnover later.

H. Improving Performance: The Strategic Context I. Choosing a Selection Method – the employer needs to consider several things: the tool’s reliability and validity, its return on investment (in terms of utility analysis), applicant reactions, usability, adverse impact, and the tool’s selection ratio.

J. Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses V. Background Investigations and Other Selection Methods A. Why Perform Background Investigations and Reference Checks? – most employers check and verify an applicant’s background information and references. There are two main reasons to check backgrounds – to verify the applicant’s information (name and so forth) and to uncover damaging information. Another is legal reasons.

B. Know your Employment Law 1. Giving References – there are laws that affect references and thus, most employers restrict who can give a reference and what they can say.

2. Federal laws give people the right to know the nature and substance of information in their credit files and files with government agencies, and (Privacy Act) to review records pertaining to them from any private business that contracts with a federal agency. The person may thus see your comments.

C. Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media D. Using Preemployment Information Services – these services use databases to access information about matters such as workers’ compensation, credit histories, and conviction and driving records. Automatic Data Processing Inc., First Advantage, HireRight, and Sterling Backcheck are some of the providers.

E. Steps for Making the Background Check More Valuable – there are steps one can take to improve the usefulness of the background information being sought. Specifically: 1. Include on the applicaton form a statement for applicants to sign explicitly authorizing a background and credit check.

..

Chapter 6: Employee Testing and Selection

6-6

2.

3.

4.

5.

Use a form for telephone reference. Figure 6-8 illustrates this.

Be persistence and attentive to possible red flags.

Compare the application to the resume.

Try to ask open-ended questions (such as “How much structure does the applicant need in his/her work?”)

6. Ask the reference supplied by the applicant to suggest other references.

F. The Polygraph and Honesty Testing – the polygraph is a device that measures physiological changes like increased perspiration.

7. Written Honesty Test – known as paper-and pencil (or computerized or online) honesty tests; designed to predict the job applicants’ proneness to dishonesty and other forms of counterproductivity.

G. Testing for Honesty: Practical Guidelines – there is a lot a manager can do to screen out dishonest applicants or employees such as: ask blunt questions, listen, rather than talk, watch for telltale body signals, do a credit check, check all employment and personal references, use written honesty and psychological tests, test for drugs, and establish a search and seizure policy and conduct searches.

H. Graphology – the use of handwriting analysis to determine the writer’s basic personality traits.

I. “Human Lie Detectors” – experts who may (or may not) be able to identify lying just by watching candidates.

J. Physical Exams – once an offer is made and the person is hired, a medical exam is usually the next step in the selection process.

K. Substance Abuse Screening – employers may use urine testing to test for illicit drugs, breath alcohol test to determine amount of alcohol in the blood, blood test to measure alcohol or drugs in the blood at the time of the test, hair analysis to reveal drug history, saliva tests for substances such as marijuana and cocaine, and skin patches to determine drug use.

L. Drug Testing Legal Issues – several federal laws affect workplace drug testing.

M. Complying with Immigration Law – employees hired in the United States must prove his/her identity and employment eligibility to work in the U.S.

Chapter Review Chapter Section Summaries: 6-1. Careful, employee selection is important for several reasons.

6-2. Whether you are administering tests or making decisions based on test results, managers need to understand several basic testing concepts.

6-3. Whether they are administered via paper and pencil, by computer, or online, we discussed several main types of tests.

6-4. With work samples and simulations, you present examinees with situations representative of the jobs for which they are applying.

6-5. Testing is only part of an employer’s selection process; you also want to conduct background investigations and other selection procedures.

..

Chapter 6: Employee Testing and Selection

6-7

Discussion Questions: 6-1. What is the difference between reliability and validity?

Reliability is the consistency of scores obtained by the same person when retested with an identical test or with an equivalent form of a test. It is a measure of internal consistency of the instrument.

Validity is the degree to which a test measures what it is purported to measure. It is a measure of external consistency. They are similar in that both are concerned with aspects of consistency of the instrument, and that reliability is a necessary condition for validity.

6-2. Explain why you think a certified psychologist who is specially trained in test construction should (or should not) be used by a small business that needs an employment test.

Due to the complex and legal nature of this activity, the use of a certified psychologist may be the only safe way to accomplish your objectives. However, because of the high salary and limited job scope of such a specialist, a definite drawback to this approach is the cost involved. Perhaps more "direct" tests can be developed which require less sophistication: motor and physical abilities tests (many state employment agencies provide this service), on-job knowledge tests, and work sampling.

This chapter also presents some alternative testing tools that are relatively easy to administer and low in cost, and that are reasonable choices for small employers to use.

6-3. Why is it important to conduct preemployment background investigations? How would you do so?

One of the easiest ways to avoid hiring mistakes is to check the candidate’s background thoroughly.

Doing so is inexpensive and useful. Most employers check and verify the job applicant’s background information and references. In one survey of about 700 human resource managers, 87% said they conduct reference checks, 69% conduct background employment checks, 61% check employee criminal records, 56% check employees’ driving records, and 35% sometimes or always check credit.

Commonly verified data include legal eligibility for employment (in compliance with immigration laws), dates of prior employment, military service (including discharge status), education, identification (including date of birth and address to confirm identity), county criminal records (current residence, last residence), motor vehicle record, credit, licensing verification, Social Security number, and reference checks. Some employers check executive candidates’ civil litigation records, with the candidate’s prior approval. Students can discuss which methods they would select.

6-4. Explain how you would get around the problem of former employers being unwilling to give bad references on their former employees.

Since many companies have strict policies regarding the release of information about former employees, it may not be possible to get information at all, good or bad. However, conducting a thorough reference audit by contacting at least two superiors, two peers, and two subordinates will help increase the chance that you will find someone who is willing to give you the information you need. Also, making the contacts by phone rather than in writing will increase their belief that the information may not be traced back to them. Using the additional technique of asking references for

..

Chapter 6: Employee Testing and Selection

6-8

the name of someone else who might be familiar with the applicant's performance will also increase the possibility of getting more information.

6-5. How can employers protect themselves against negligent hiring claims?

Negligent hiring means hiring employees with criminal records or other problems who then use access to customers’ homes to commit crimes. In one case, an apartment manager entered a woman’s apartment and assaulted her. The court found the apartment complex’s owner negligent for not checking the manager’s background properly. Such suits are rising.

Selecting the right person can protect employers against negligent hiring. First, employees with the right skills will perform better. Those without these skills or who are abrasive or obstructionist won’t perform effectively, and your own performance and the firm’s will suffer. The time to screen out undesirables is before they are in the door. Second, effective selection is important because it is costly to recruit and hire employees.

Individual and Group Activities: 6-6. Write a short essay discussing some of the ethical and legal considerations in testing.

State and federal laws, EEOC guidelines, and court decisions require that you must be able to prove that your tests are related to success or failure on the job and that they are not having an adverse impact on members of a protected group. Test takers also have certain basic rights to privacy and information. The test taker also has the right to expect that the test is equally fair to all test takers.

6-7. Working individually or in groups, develop a list of specific selection techniques that you would suggest your dean use to hire the next HR professor at your school. Explain why you chose each selection technique.

The students should use the selection information presented in the chapter to list their selection techniques of choice with their supporting rationale.

6-8. Working individually or in groups, contact the publisher of a standardized test such as the Scholastic Assessment Test and obtain from it written information regarding the test's validity and reliability. Present a short report in class discussing what the test is supposed to measure and the degree to which you think the test does what it is supposed to do, based on the reported validity and reliability scores.

Encourage students to contact different sources; it may be a good idea to have a sign-up sheet so that no two students or groups are gathering information about the same instrument. Students should be able to relate validity and reliability scores to effectiveness.

6-9. Appendix A and B at the end of this book list the knowledge someone studying for the HRCI (Appendix A) or SHRM (Appendix B) certification exam needs to have in each area of human resource management (such as in Strategic Management and Workforce Planning). In groups

..

Chapter 6: Employee Testing and Selection

6-9

of several students, do four things: (1) review Appendix A and/or B; (2) identify the material in this chapter that relates to the Appendix A and/or B required knowledge lists; (3) write four multiple-choice exam questions on this material that you believe would be suitable for inclusion in the HRCI exam and/or the SHRM exam; and (4) if time permits, have someone from your team post your team's questions in front of the class, so that students in all teams can answer the exam questions created by the other teams.

Material included in this chapter that relates to the HRCI certification exam includes establishing and implementing selection procedures of testing; reference and background checking; post-offer employment activities; knowledge of reliability and validity of selection tests/tools/methods; and use and interpretation of selection tests.

Experiential Exercise: A Test for a Reservation Clerk Purpose: The purpose of this exercise is to give you practice in developing a test to measure one specific ablilty for the job of airline reservation clerk for a major airline. If time permits, you’ll be able to combine your tests into a test battery.

Required Understanding: Your airline has decided to outsource its reservations jobs to Asia. You should be fully acquainted with the procedure for developing a personnel test and should read the following description of an airline reservation clerk’s duties.

How to Set up the Exercise/Instructions: Divide the class into teams of five or six students. The ideal candidate will need to have a number of skills and abilities to perform this job well. Your job is to select a single ability and to develop a test to measure that ability. Please use only the materials available in the room, please. The test should permit quantitative scoring and may be an individual or group test.

Please go to your assigned groups. As per our discussion of test development in this chapter, each group should make a list of the skills relevant to success in the airline reservation clerk’s job. Each group should then rate the importance of these abilities on a 5-point scale. Then, develop a test to measure what you believe to be the top ranked ability. If time permits, the group should combine the various tests from each group into a test battery. If possible, leave time for a group of students to take the test battery.

Application Case: The Insider 6-10. We want you to design an employee selection program for hiring stock traders. We already know what to look for as far as technical skills are concerned – accounting courses, economics, and so on. What we want is a program for screening out potential bad apples. To that end, please let us know the following: What screening tests would you suggest, and why? What questions should we add to our application form? Specifically, how should we check candidates’ backgrounds, and what questions should we ask previous employers and references?

..

Chapter 6: Employee Testing and Selection

6-10

Students should consider the different types of selection measures that they believe should be included.

6-11. What else (if anything) would you suggest?

Students should list (and be ready to defend) the specifications that they believe would be needed.

Continuing Case: Carter Cleaning Company – Honesty Testing 6-12. What would be the advantages and disadvantages to Jennifer’s company of routinely administering honesty tests to all its employees?

Polygraph testing raises a large number of legal and moral issues, issues Carter Cleaning would best avoid. Using some of the available “paper-and-pencil” honesty tests may be a possibility. In general, these have been shown to be reasonably reliable and valid, but they are still controversial. The costs associated with these tests may also make them prohibitive to a small operation like Jennifer’s.

6-13. Specifically, what other screening techniques could the company use to screen out theft-prone and turnover-prone employees, and how exactly could these be used?

More thorough background checks are a recommended technique to eliminate potential thieves.

Some firms choose to contract this out to a private security agency, although cost may be an issue to Jennifer. However, the company can quickly check to see if savings from reduced theft would offset the cost of an outside agency. As part of the job preview, Carter must communicate that dishonesty and theft will not be tolerated. Further, company policies regarding theft should be clearly communicated to new and existing employees.

6-14. How should her company terminate employees caught stealing, and what kind of procedure should be set up for handling reference calls about these employees when they go to other companies looking for jobs?

Terminating employees for theft should include the involvement of the proper authorities and should only be done when there is absolute proof of the theft and who committed it. Such an action will also send a message to other employees that you will not tolerate theft of company resources. While many employers are reluctant to prosecute employees for theft, developing evidence with police and through the courts can be beneficial in providing future employers of the individual with truthful and factual information.

Hotel Paris: Improving Performance at the Hotel Paris – The New Employee Testing Program 6-15. Provide a detailed example of a security guard work sample test.

Students should begin by discussing the types of tasks a security guard is responsible for.

..

Chapter 6: Employee Testing and Selection

6-11

6-16. Provide a detailed example of two possible personality test items you would suggest they use, and why you would suggest using them.

Student answers will vary.

6-17. Based on what you read here in this Dessler Human Resource Management Chapter, what other tests would you suggest to Lisa, and why would you suggest them?

Because front desk employees usually handle credit cards and make cash transactions, Lisa should consider the benefits of paper-and-pencil honesty testing.

6-18. How would you suggest Lisa try to confirm that it is indeed the testing and not some other change that accounts for the improved performance?

Students’ answers will vary.

Key Terms: Negligent Hiring – Hiring workers with questionable backgrounds without proper safeguards.

Reliability – The consistency of scores obtained by the same person when retested with idential tests or with alternate forms of the same test.

Test Validity – The accuracy with which a test, interview, and so on, measures what it purports to measure or fulfills the function it was designed to fill.

Criterion Validity – A type of validity based on showing that scores on the test (predictors) are related to job performance (criterion).

Content Validity – A test that is content valid is one that contains a fair sample of the tasks and skills actually needed for the job in question.

Construct Validity – A test that is construct valid is one that demonstrates that a selection procedure measures a construct and that construct is important for successful job performance.

Expectancy Chart – A graph showing the relationship between test scores and job performance for a group of people.

Interest Inventory – A personal development and selection device that compares the person’s current interests with those of others now in various occupations so as to determine the preferred occupation for the individual.

Analytics – Using tools like statistical techniques to examine data, in order to draw cause–effect conclusions from that data.

Machine learning – Software that can improve its own performance and learn on its own. ..

Chapter 6: Employee Testing and Selection

6-12

Artificial intelligence – Using technology (particularly computers) to carry out tasks in a way that we would

consider “human” or “smart.”

Work Samples – Actual job tasks used in testing applicants' performance.

Work Sampling Technique – A testing method based on measuring performance on actual job tasks.

Management Assessment Center – A situation in which management candidates are asked to perform realistic tasks in hypothetical situations and are scored on their performance. It usually also involves testing and the use of management games.

Situational Test – A test that requires examinees to respond to situations representative of the job.

Video-based Simulation – A situational test in which examinees respond to video simulations of realistic job situations.

Miniature Job Training and Evaluation – Training candidates to perform several of the job’s tasks, and then evaluating the candidates’ performance prior to hire.

Polygraph – A device that measures physiological changes like increased perspiration, on the assumption that such changes reflect lying.

Graphology – The use of handwriting analysis to determine the writer’s personality characteristics and moods, and even illnesses, such as depression.

..

Part Two Recruitment, Placement, and Talent Management Chapter 7 Interviewing Candidates Lecture Outline: Basic Types of Interviews Structured versus Unstructured Interviews Interview Content (What Types of Questions to Ask) How Should We Conduct the Interview?

Improving Performance: The Strategic Context Avoiding Errors That Can Undermine an Interview’s Usefulness First Impressions (Snap Judgments) Not Clarifying What the Job Requires Candidate-Order (Contrast) Error and Pressure to Hire Nonverbal Behavior and Impression Management Effect of Personal Characteristics: Attractiveness, Gender, Race Diversity Counts: Applicants Disability and the Employment Interview Improving Performance: HR Practices Around the Globe Interviewer Behavior How to Design and Conduct the Effective Interview Designing a Structured Situational Interview Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses Competency Profiles and Employee Interviews Employee Engagement Guide for Managers Building Engagement: A Total Selection Program The Toyota Way Trends Shaping HR: Science in Talent Management Developing and Extending the Job Offer Chapter Review

Where Are We Now… The main topics we’ll cover in this chapter include types of interviews, things that undermine interviewing, things that undermine interviewing’s usefulness, designing and conducting effective selection interviews, using a total selection process to improve employee engagement, and making the offer.

..

Chapter 7: Interviewing Candidates

7-2

Interesting Issues: When it comes to hiring, Urban Outfitters knows just what it’s looking for. The lifestyle retailer, with over 200 stores in the United States, Canada, and Europe, built its strategy around fostering a culture of creativity and individuality within its stores. That means that maintaining its unique store environment requires employees that match its core values of community, pride, creativity, and respect. The question is, how do you find and attract such applicants, while controlling hiring costs in the competitive retail industry?

Learning Objectives: 7-1. Give examples of the main types of selection interviews.

7-2. Give examples of the main errors that can undermine an interview’s usefulness.

7-3. Define a structured situational interview and explain how to conduct effective selection interviews.

7-4. Give examples of how to use employee selection to improve employee engagement.

7-5. List the main points in developing and extending the actual job offer.

Annotated Outline: I. Basic Types of Interviews A. Structured versus Unstructured Interviews – unstructured or nondirective interviews generally have no set format. Structured or directive interviews generally identify questions ahead of time and may even weigh possible alternative answers for appropriateness.

B. Interview Content (What Types of Questions to Ask) – interviews can be classified according to the nature or content of their questions, such as situational, behavioral, and job-related interviews. In a situational interview, you ask a candidate what his or her behavior would be in a given situation.

Behavioral interviews ask applicants how they reacted to actual situations in the past. In job-related interviews, the interviewer asks applicants questions about job-relevant past experiences.

1. Other Types of Questions – there are other, lesser-used types of questions.

In a stress interview, the interviewer seeks to make the applicant uncomfortable with occasionally rude questions. Puzzle questions are also popular.

C. How Should We Conduct the Interview? – employers administer interviews in various ways: one-on-one, by a panel of interviewers, sequentially or all at once, computerized or personally, or online.

1. Phone Interviews – can be more useful than face-to-face interviews for judging one’s conscientiousness, intelligence, and interpersonal skills.

2. Computer-Based Job Interviews – is one in which the job candidate’s oral and/or keyed replies are obtained in response to computerized oral, visual, or written questions and/or situations.

3. Online Video Interviews – with phone and tablet video functionalities and FaceTime and Skype, Web-based “in-person” interviews are widely used.

..

Chapter 7: Interviewing Candidates

7-3

D. Improving Performance: The Strategic Context II. Avoiding Errors That Can Undermine an Interview’s Usefulness – keep three things in mind: use structured interviews, know what to ask, and avoid the common interviewing errors.

A. First Impressions (Snap Judgments) – one of the most widespread errors is that interviewers tend to jump to conclusions about candidates during the first few minutes of the interview.

B. Not Clarifying What the Job Requires – interviewers who don’t have an accurate picture of what the job entails and what sort of candidate is best suited for it usually make their decisions based on incorrect impressions or incomplete stereotypes of what a good applicant is.

C. Candidate-Order (Contrast) Error and Pressure to Hire – the order in which you see applicants affects how you rate them. Pressure to hire can undermine an interview’s usefulness.

D. Nonverbal Behavior and Impression Management – the applicant’s nonverbal behavior (smiling, avoiding your gaze, and so on) can have a surprisingly large impact on an applicant’s rating. Impression management includes ingratiation, agreeing with the interviewer’s opinions, and self-promotion to create an impression of competence are used by clever interviewees to manage the impression they present.

E. Effect of Personal Characteristics: Attractiveness, Gender, Race – interviewers have to guard against letting an applicant’s attractiveness, gender, and race play a role in candidate ratings.

F. Diversity Counts: Applicant Disability and the Employment Interview – what the disabled people prefer is a discussion that lets the employer address his or her concerns and reach a knowledgeable conclusion.

G. Improving Performance: HR Practices Around the Globe H. Interviewer Behavior – the list of ways in which interviewers themselves wreck interviews is boundless.

III. How to Design and Conduct the Effective Interview A. Designing the Structured Situational Interview Step 1: Analyze the job.

Step 2: Rate the job’s main duties.

Step 3: Create interview questions.

Step 4: Create benchmark answers.

Step 5: Appoint the interview panel and conduct interviews.

B. Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses How to Conduct an Effective Interview 1. Know the Job – do not conduct an interview unless you know what KSAs you are looking for.

2. Structure your Interview – a) base questions on actual job duties; b) use specific job-knowledge, situational, or behaviorally-oriented questions and objective criteria to evaluate the interviewee’s responses; c) use the same

..

Chapter 7: Interviewing Candidates

7-4

questions with all candidates; d) use rating scales to rate answers; and e) use a structured interview form.

3. Get Organized – the interview should take place in a private room where interruptions can be minimized. Prior to the interview, the interviewer should review the candidate’s application and resume, as well as the job duties and required skills and traits.

4. Establish Rapport – the interviewer should put the interviewee at ease so he/she can find out the necessary information about the interviewee.

Studies show that people who feel more self-confident about their interviewing skills perform better in interviews.

5. Ask Questions – the interviewer should follow the interview guide.

6. Take Brief, Unobtrusive Notes – notes will help the interviewer avoid snap judgments and remember more clearly what was discussed in the interview.

7. Close the Interview – leave time to answer any questions the candidate may have and, if appropriate, advocate your firm to the candidate. Try to end the interview on a positive note.

8. Review the Interview – once the candidate leaves, and while the interview is fresh on the interviewer’s mind, he/she should review his/her notes and fill in the structured interview guide.

C. Competency Profiles and Employees Interviews – employers using competency models or profiles (which list required skills, knowledge, behaviors, and other competencies) can use these for formulating job-related situational, behavioral, and knowledge interview questions. Table 7-1 illustrates it.

IV. Employee Engagement Guide for Managers A. Building Engagement: A Total Selection Program – this type of program aims at selecting candidates whose totality of attributes best fits the employer’s total requirements.

B. The Toyota Way – this hiring process aims to identify such assembler candidates. The process takes about 20 hours and six phases over several days: Step 1: an in-depth online application (20-30 minutes) Step 2: a 2-5 hour computer-based assessment Step 3: a 6-8 hour work simulation assessment Step 4: a face-to-face interview Step 5: a background check, drug screen, and medical check Step 6: job offer C. Trends Shaping HR: Science in Talent Management V. Developing and Extending the Job Offer – after all the interviews, background checks, and other tests, the employer decides who to make an offer to using one or more approach. The judgmental approach subjectively weighs all the evidence about the candidate. The statistical approach quantifies all the evidence and perhaps uses a formula to predict job success.

..

Chapter 7: Interviewing Candidates

7-5

Chapter Review Chapter Section Summaries: 7-1. A selection interview is a selection procedure designed to predict future job performance based on applicants’ oral responses to oral inquiries; we discussed several basic types of interviews.

7-2. One reason selection interviews are often less useful than they should be is that managers make predictable errors that undermine an interview’s usefulness.

7-3. The manager should know how to design and conduct an effective interview.

7-4. High-engagement firms like Toyota use total hiring programs to select employees.

7-5. After choosing which candidate to hire, the employer turns to developing and extending the job offer.

Discussion Questions: 7-1. There are several ways to conduct a selection interview. Explain and illustrate the basic ways in which you can classify selection interviews.

Interviews can be classified according to: 1. Degree of structure – this is the extent to which interviews are, or are not, structured with previously designed questions so that each candidate must answer the same questions.

2. Purpose – interviews may be designed to accomplish several purposes, including selection, performance appraisal, and feedback.

3. The content of the questions may be situational, job-related, or psychological.

4. The way the interview is administered – interviews might be conducted by a panel of interviewers, sequentially or all at once, computerized or personally. Students should also provide some illustrations of each.

7-2. Briefly describe each of the following possible types of interviews: unstructured panel interviews, structured sequential interviews, job-related structured interviews.

In the unstructured panel interview, the panel of interviewers ask questions as they come to mind. They do not have a list of questions or points that need to be covered but may follow many different directions. The structured sequential interview consists of the candidate being interviewed one by one with several different interviewers. Each interviewer conducts a structured interview that consists of pre-determined questions and a structured evaluation form to complete. The job-related structured interview consists of pre-determined questions, all of which are designed to assess the applicant's past behaviors for job-related information.

7-3. For what sorts of jobs do you think unstructured interviews might be most appropriate? Why? The computerized interview can be used as a screening device for virtually any type of position that may generate a large number of applicants. It is less likely to be used for ..

Chapter 7: Interviewing Candidates

7-6

managerial positions. However, if there are large numbers of applicants, it could certainly be just as useful there as in skilled, professional, and unskilled positions.

7-4. How would you explain the fact that structured interviews, regardless of content, are generally more valid than unstructured interviews for predicting job performance?

Structured interviews are best because these interviews tend to be more consistent, reliable, and valid. All interviewers ask all applicants the same questions Having a standardized list of questions can also help less talented interviewers conduct better interviews. Standardizing the interview also enhances job relatedness, reduces subjectivity and the potential for bias, and may “enhance the ability to withstand legal challenge.” However, the interviewer should always be able to ask follow-up questions and pursue points of interest as they develop.

7-5. Briefly discuss what an interviewer can do to improve his or her interviewing performance.

The students should refer to the section in the chapter on designing and conducting the effective interview to form his/her suggestions for how an interviewer can improve his/her perfomance.

7-6. What items should a letter of offer definitely contain?

There are several issues to consider with the written offer. Perhaps most important, is understanding the difference between a job offer letter and a contract. In a job offer letter, the employer lists the job offer’s basic information. This typically starts with a welcome sentence. It then includes job-specific information (such as details on salary and pay), benefits information, paid leave information, and terms of employment (including, for instance, successful completion of physical exams). There should be a strong statement that the employment relationship is “at will.” Then there is a closing statement. This again welcomes the employee, mentions who the employer’s point person is if any questions arise, and instructs the candidate to sign the letter of offer if it is acceptable. It is prudent to have an attorney review the offer before extending it.

7-7. What parallels do you see between the Toyota and Google total selection processes?

What differences?

The students should refer to the section in the chapter on Employee Engagement for Managers to address both the Toyota and Google processes. Student responses should include: both companies use a total selection program aimed at selecting candidates whose totality of attributes best fits the employer’s total requirement; and they both do group/panel interviews and cognitive testing for candidates’ ability to learn and lead. Some of the differences should include that Toyota looks for a history of quality commitment and doing things right, and its process demands a sacrifice in terms of time and effort. Google’s process is, on the other hand, analytical, evidence-based, and scientific.

..

Chapter 7: Interviewing Candidates

7-7

Individual and Group Activities: 7-8. Prepare and give a short presentation titled, “How to Be Effective as a Selection Interviewer.”

There are several things you can do to prepare to be an effective interviewer. Some of the responses the students should give include: structure the interview; prepare for the interview; establish rapport; ask questions; close the interview; and review the interview.

7-9. Use the Internet to find employers who now do preliminary selection interviews via the Web. Do you think these interviews are useful? Why? How would you improve them?

The students should use the Internet to search the websites of various companies to find examples of companies that use the Web for preliminary selection interviews. They should provide the pros and cons of using the Web for preliminary selection interviews. Challenge students to identify ways to improve the examples they have presented based on what has been discussed in this chapter.

7-10. In groups, discuss and compile examples of “the worst interview I ever had.” What was it about these interviews that made them so bad? If time permits, discuss as a class.

Based on their experiences, the students should come up with various examples. They should also discuss their suggestions for improving the interview.

7-11. In groups, prepare an interview (including a sequence of at least 20 questions) you’ll use to interview candidates for the job teaching a course in human resources management. Each group should present its interview questions in class.

The students should use this opportunity to design their own interview questions using the suggestions given in the chapter.

7-12. Several years ago, Lockheed Martin Corp. sued the Boeing Corp. in Orlando, Florida, accusing it of using Lockheed’s trade secrets to help win a multibillion-dollar government contract. Among other things, Lockheed Martin claimed that Boeing had obtained those trade secrets from a former Lockheed Martin employee who switched to Boeing. But of the methods companies use to commit corporate espionage, one writer says that hiring away the competitor’s employees is just the most obvious method companies use. One writer says, “One of the more unusual scams—sometimes referred to as ‘help wanted’—uses a person posing as a corporate headhunter who approaches an employee of the target company with a potentially lucrative job offer.

During the interview, the employee is quizzed about his responsibilities, accomplishments, and current projects. The goal is to extract important details without the employee realizing there is no job.”

Assume that you own a small high-tech company. What would you do (in terms of

..

Chapter 7: Interviewing Candidates

7-8

employee training, or a letter from you, for instance) to try to minimize the chance that one of your employees will fall into that kind of trap? Also, compile a list of 10 questions that you think such a corporate spy might ask one of your employees.

Students may suggest that the employer educate employees that tactics such as the ones described here are used by competitors, suggest an appropriate response, and encourage employees to report any such contact to management. Building trust and loyalty is clearly important in order for this strategy to be effective. Brainstorm with the class a list of questions that may be asked, and perhaps conduct a role play to demonstrate how the conversation may play out, and facilitate a discussion on how the employee and employer could respond.

7-13. Appendices A and B at the end of this book list the knowledge someone studying for the HRCI (Appendix A) or SHRM (Appendix B) certification exam needs to have in each area of human resource management (such as in Strategic Management and Workforce Planning). In groups of several students, do four things: (1) review Appendix A and/or B; (2) identify the material in this chapter that relates to the required knowledge Appendix A and/or B required knowledge lists; (3) write four multiple-choice exam questions on this material that you believe would be suitable for inclusion in the HRCI exam and/or the SHRM exam; and (4) if time permits, have someone from your team post your team's questions in front of the class, so that students in all teams can answer the exam questions created by the other teams.

Material from this chapter that may be included in the HRCI certification exam includes interviewing procedures, federal, state, and local employment-related laws, and interviewing techniques.

Experiential Exercise: The Most Important Person You’ll Ever Hire Purpose: The purpose of this exercise is to give you practice using some of the interview techniques you learn from this chapter.

Required Understanding: You should be familiar with the information presented in the chapter, and read this: “For parents, children are precious.” It's therefore interesting that parents who hire “nannies” to take care of the children usually do little more than ask several interview questions and conduct what is often, at best, a perfunctory reference check. Given the often questionable validity of interviews, and the (often) relative inexperience of the father or mother doing the interviewing, it's not surprising that many of these arrangements end in disappointment. You know from this chapter that it is difficult to conduct a valid interview unless you know exactly what you are looking for and, preferably, structure the interview. Most parents simply aren't trained to do this.

How to Set up the Exercise/Instructions: Set up groups of five or six students. Two students will be the interviewees, while the other students in the group will serve as panel interviewers.

..

Chapter 7: Interviewing Candidates

7-9

The interviewees will develop an interviewer assessment form, and the panel interviewers will develop a structured situational interview for a “nanny.”

7-14. Instructions for the interviews: The interviewees should leave the room for about 20 minutes. While out of the room, the interviewees should develop an “interviewer assessment form” based on the information presented in this chapter regarding factors that can undermine the usefulness of an interview. During the panel interview, the interviewees should assess the interviewers using the interviewer assessment form. After the panel interviewers have conducted the interview, the interviewees should leave the room to discuss their notes. Did the interviewers exhibit any of the factors that can undermine the usefulness of an interview? If so, which ones? What suggestions would you (the interviewees) make to the interviewers on how to improve the usefulness of the interview?

Student responses will vary.

7-15. Instructions for interviewers: While the interviewees are out of the room, the panel interviewers will have 20 minutes to develop a short structured situational interview form for a “nanny.” The panel interview team will interview two candidates for the position. During the panel interview, each interviewer should be taking notes on a copy of the structured situational interview form. After the panel interview, the panel interviewers should discuss their notes. What were your first impressions of each interviewee? Were your impressions similar? What candidate would you all select for the position and why?

Student responses will vary.

Application Case: The Out-of-Control Interview 7-16. How would you explain the nature of the panel interview Maria had to endure?

Specifically, do you think it reflected a well-thought-out interviewing strategy on the part of the firm, or carelessness on the part of the firm's management? If it were carelessness, what would you do to improve the interview process at Apex Environmental?

It is fairly clear that the panel interview was a stress interview designed to see how well she could handle difficult situations. In this respect, it seems to have been a well-thoughtout interviewing strategy, but there was a very clear element of carelessness on the part of the firm's management. The panel was obviously not well-trained and was careless in the choice of questions that they used. Many of the questions were clearly discriminatory and could be used against them in a gender-based discrimination suit.

7-17. Would you take the job offer if you were Maria? If you're not sure, what additional information would help you make your decision?

..

Chapter 7: Interviewing Candidates

7-10

Maria needs additional information. What she does know is the nature of the job and the clear fit with her training and skills. The additional information that she should seek involves the number of women who work at Apex, the levels of management they have attained, and the satisfaction of those women with their treatment by Apex management.

The fact that the entire interview panel was composed of men and their choice of questions leaves us with reservations about how she would be treated once hired.

7-18. The job of applications engineer for which Maria was applying requires: (a) excellent technical skills with respect to mechanical engineering, (b) a commitment to working in the area of pollution control, (c) the ability to deal well and confidently with customers who have engineering problems, (d) a willingness to travel worldwide, and (e) a very intelligent and well-balanced personality. List 10 questions you would ask when interviewing applicants for the job.

There are a wide variety of specific questions that could be posed to address these issues.

Questions need to be job-related, specifically to the requirements listed above. They also need to clearly avoid any discriminatory areas.

Continuing Case: Carter Cleaning Company – The Better Interview 7-19. In general, what can Jennifer do to improve her employee interviewing practices?

Should she develop interview forms that list questions for management and nonmanagement jobs. If so, how should these look, and what questions should be included? Should she initiate a computer-based interview approach? If so, why and how?

Carter Cleaning Company has an inadequate, unstructured way of interviewing and hiring.

One solution students could suggest is to utilize a structured interview guide such as the one provided in Figure 7-1 as an example of a tool that managers could use to improve their interviewing practices. Have students brainstorm a list of questions to be included in the structured interview guide. A computer-based approach is also a possibility; students should explore the pros and cons of this given the nature of the organization and weigh the cost/benefit of utilization of this technology.

7-20. Should she implement a training program for her managers, and if so, specifically what should be the content of such a training program? In other words, if she did decide to start training her management people to be better interviewers, what should she tell them and how should she tell it to them?

The obvious answer to this question is yes, a training program should be designed and delivered. Students should include suggestions from the section on designing and conducting effective interviews, including training in preparation, utilization of a structured interview process, and interviewing techniques discussed in this chapter. She should educate managers in the potential pitfalls that come up in the interviewing process as outlined in the text. She should also provide an opportunity for practice with mock interviews in the training session so that managers can use the skills they learn and become comfortable with the process. ..

Chapter 7: Interviewing Candidates

7-11

Hotel Paris: Improving Performance at the Hotel Paris – The New Interviewing Program 7-21. For the jobs of security guard or valet, develop five additional situational, five behavioral, and five job knowledge questions, with descriptive good/average/poor answers.

Examples may be found in Figures 7-2 and 7-3. Student answers will vary. For the security guard, questions might focus on ascertaining the level of dependability, responsibility, initiative, and cool-headedness under pressure. The car hop position’s desired behaviors may include detail orientation, friendliness, and ability to follow directions.

7-22. Combine your questions into a complete interview that you would give to someone who must interview candidates for these jobs.

Students should follow the outline for interviewing in Figure 7-1 and refer to Figure 7-3.

Key Terms: Unstructured (or Nondirective) Interview – An unstructured conversational-style interview in which the interviewer pursues points of interest as they come up in response to questions.

Structured (or Directive) Interview – An interview following a set sequence of questions.

Situational Interview – A series of job-related questions that focus on how the candidate would behave in a given situation.

Behavioral Interview – A series of job-related questions that focus on how the candidate reacted to actual situations in the past.

Job-Related Interview – A series of job-related questions which focus on relevant past jobrelated behaviors.

Stress Interview – An interview in which the applicant is made uncomfortable by a series of often rude questions. This technique helps identify hypersensitive applicants and those with low or high stress tolerance.

Unstructured Sequential Interview – An interview in which each interviewer forms an independent opinion after asking different questions.

Structured Sequential Interview – An interview in which the applicant is interviewed sequentially by several persons; each rates the applicant on a standard form.

Panel Interview – An interview in which a group of interviewers questions the applicant.

..

Chapter 7: Interviewing Candidates

7-12

Mass Interview – A panel interviews several candidates simultaneously.

Candidate-Order (or Contrast) Error – An error of judgment on the part of the interviewer due to interviewing one or more very good or very bad candidates just before the interview in question.

Structured Situational Interview – A series of job-relevant questions with predetermined answers that interviewers ask of all applicants for the job.

..

Part Three Training and Development Chapter 8 Training and Developing Employees Lecture Outline: Orienting and Onboarding New Employees The Purposes of Employee Orientation/Onboarding The Orientation Process Employee Engagement Guide for Managers: Onboarding at Toyota Overview of the Training Process Know Your Employment Law Aligning Strategy and Training Improving Performance: The Strategic Context The ADDIE Five-Step Training Process Analyzing the Training Needs Designing the Training Program Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media Developing the Program Implementing the Training Program On-the-Job Training Apprenticeship Training Informal Learning Job Instruction Training Lectures Programmed Learning Behavior Modeling Audiovisual-Based Training Vestibule Training Electronic Performance Support Systems (EPSS) Videoconferencing Computer-Based Training Online/Internet-Based Training Diversity Counts: Online Accessibility HR and the Gig Economy: On-Demand Microlearning at Uber Lifelong and Literacy Training Techniques Team Training Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses Implementing Management Development Programs Strategy’s Role in Management Development Candidate Assessment and the 9-Box Grid Managerial On-the-Job Training and Rotation ..

Chapter 8: Training and Developing Employees

8-2

Improving Performance: HR Practices Around the Globe Off-the-Job Management Training and Development Techniques Leadership Development at Cigna Trends Shaping HR: Customized Talent Management-Differential Development Assignments Characteristics of Effective Leadership Development Programs Managing Organizational Change Programs Lewin’s Change Process Using Organizational Development Evaluating the Training Effort Designing the Study Training Effects to Measure Chapter Review

Where Are We Now… The purpose of this chapter is to increase your effectiveness in training employees. The main topics we’ll cover include orientating employees, designing onboarding to improve employee engagement, the training process, analyzing training needs, implementing training and development programs, and evaluating the training efforts.

Interesting Issues:For a century AT&T was America’s “phone company,” but it has changed dramatically in the past few years. In 2000, its wireless network data traffic was negligible.

The part of its business depending on software was similarly negligible, but by 2020 it will have risen to 75%. Like competitors such as Comcast, AT&T’s strategy is to drive the company toward a new digital future, one in which telecommunications, media, and entertain- ment converge, and customers can get the information, access, and entertainment they need, anywhere, on whatever digital device they choose to use. That’s excit- ing for AT&T’s customers and shareholders. But what do you do with the 150,000 or so AT&T employees who were hired by a phone company years ago to do very different, nondigital, nonsoftware jobs? We’ll see what AT&T did.

Learning Objectives: 8-1. Summarize the purpose and process of employee orientation.

8-2. Give an example of how to design onboarding to improve employee engagement.

8-3. List and briefly explain each of the steps in the training process.

8-4. Explain how to use five training techniques.

8-5. List and briefly discuss four management development methods.

8-6. List and briefly discuss the importance of the steps in leading organizational change.

8-7. Explain why a controlled study may be superior for evaluating the training program’s effects.

..

Chapter 8: Training and Developing Employees

Annotated Outline: I. Orienting and Onboarding New Employees – making sure employees do know what to do and how to do their jobs is the purpose of orientation and training.

Every manager therefore should know how to orient and train employees.

A. The Purpose of Employee Orientation/Onboarding – employee orientation programs provide new employees with the basic background information required to perform their jobs; ideally it should also help them start becoming emotionally attached to and engage in the firm.

B. The Orientation Process – the length of the orientation program depends on what you cover. At a minimum, the orientation should provide information on matters such as employee benefits, personnel policies, safety measures, and regulations, and a facilities tour. New employees should receive (and sign for) print or Internet-based employee handbooks covering such matters.

1. The Employee Handbook – should include a disclaimer stating “nothing in this handbook should be taken as creating a binding contract between employer and employee and all employment is on an at will basis.”

2. Orientation Technology – employers use technology to support orientation such as online learning, virtual environments, streaming videos, iPhone apps, scannable QR codes, and gaming.

II. Employee Engagement Guide for Managers: Onboarding at Toyota – it does cover routine topics such as company benefits, however its main aim is to engage Toyota’s new employees in the firm’s ideology of quality, teamwork, personal development, open communication, and mutual respect. The initial program takes about 4 days.

III. Overview of the Training Process – training begins after orientation. Having high potential employees does not guarantee they will succeed. Organizations must train employees how to do the job.

A. Know Your Employment Law – training and the Law; inadequate training can also expose the employer to liability for negligent training.

B. Aligning Strategy and Training – the employer’s strategic plans should govern its training goals. In essence, the task is to identify the employee behaviors the firm will need to execute its strategy and then from that, deduce what competencies (for instance, skills, and knowledge) employees will need.

C. Improving Performance: The Strategic Context D. The ADDIE Five-Step Training Process – ADDIE stands for analyze, design, develop, implement, and evaluate.

E. Analyze the Training Needs– this may address the employer’s strategic/longer-term training needs and/or its current training needs.

1. Strategic Training Needs Analysis – this focuses on identifying the training the employer will need to fill new future jobs, and is tied to succession planning.

..

8-3

Chapter 8: Training and Developing Employees 2. Current Training Needs Analysis – most training is focused on improving current performance. Analyzing current employee needs is more complex than new employee needs. Two main ways to identify training needs are task analysis (an analysis of the job’s requirements) and performance analysis (an analysis to verify if there is a performance deficiency).

3. New Employees: Task Analysis: Analyzing New Employees’ Training Needs – a task analysis can be used to determine the training needs of new employees. A task analysis record form can also be used. It contains the following information: task list; when and how often performed; quantity and quality performance standards; conditions under which performed; skills or knowledge required; and where best learned. Table 8-1 illustrates the task analysis record form.

4. Current Employees: Performance Analysis: Analyzing Current Employees’ Training Needs – there are several methods that can be used to identify an employee’s training needs, including supervisor, peer, self, and 360-degree performance reviews; job-related performance data; observation by supervisors or other specialists; interviews with the employee or his/her supervisor; tests of things like job knowledge, skills, and attendance; attitude surveys; individual employee daily diaries; assessment centers, and special performance gap analytical software.

5. Can’t Do/Won’t Do – the biggest issue is to figure out what is causing the lower performance. If the problem is employee motivation then training is unlikely to fix this. Can’t Do means the employees don’t know what to do or what your standards are. Won’t Do, the employee could do the job if they wanted to.

6. Competency Profiles and Models in Training and Development – the American Society for Training and Development (ASTD) built a competencies model for the job of training and development professionals. It includes 10 core trainer competencies.

F. Designing the Training Program – designing means planning the overall training program including objectives, delivery methods, and program evaluation.

1. Setting Learning Objectives – should specify in measurable terms what the trainee will be able to accomplish when the training is completed.

2. Creating a Motivational Learning Environment – the learning environment should take into account both the trainees’ ability and motivation.

3. Making the Learning Meaningful – material that is meaningful is usually easier for trainees to understand and remember.

4. Making Skills Transfer Obvious and Easy – make skills and behaviors easy to transfer from the training site to the job site.

5. Reinforcing the Learning – trainees need plenty of feedback.

6. Ensuring Transfer of Learning to the Job – prior to training, get trainee and supervisor input in designing the program, institute a training

..

8-4

Chapter 8: Training and Developing Employees attendance policy, and encourage employees to participate. During training, provide trainees with training experiences and conditions (surroundings, equipment) that resemble the actual work environment.

After training, reinforce what the trainees learned.

G. Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media H. Developing the Program – involves actually assembling the program’s training content and materials. It means choosing the specific content the program will present as well as designing/choosing the specific instructional method (lectures, cases, Web-based, and so on) you will use.

IV. Implement the Training Programs A. On-the-Job Training (OJT) – the most familiar is the coaching or understudy method which involves simply observing the supervisor or (preferably) having the supervisor or job expert show the new employees.

B. Apprenticeship Training – a structured process by which people become skilled workers usually through a combination of formal learning and long-term on-the-job training, often under the tutelage of a master craftsperson.

C. Informal Learning – surveys estimate that as much as 80% of what employees learn on the job they learn through informal means, including performing their jobs while interacting every day with their colleagues.

D. Job Instruction Training – teaching a new employee the logical sequence of a job step-by-step.

E. Lectures – quick and simple ways to provide knowledge to large groups.

F. Programmed Learning – a step-by-step, self-learning method that involves three parts: 1) presenting questions, facts, or problems to the learner; 2) allowing the person to respond; and 3) providing feedback on the accuracy of the answers, with instructions on what to do next.

G. Behavior Modeling – involves (1) showing trainees the right (or “model”) way of doing something, (2) letting them practice, and then (3) giving feedback on the performance.

H. Audiovisual-Based Training – tools include films, PowerPoint presentations, video conferences, audiotapes, and videotapes.

I. Vestibule Training – a method in which trainees learn on the actual or simulated equipment they will use on the job while being trained off the job.

J. Electronic Performance Support Systems (EPSS) – sets of computerized tools and displays that effectively automate and integrate training, documentation, and phone support, thus enabling individuals to provide support that’s faster, cheaper, and more effective than the traditional methods. Performance support systems are modern job aids which are a set of instructions, diagrams, or similar methods available at the job site to guide the worker.

K. Videoconferencing – involves delivering programs over broadband lines, the Internet, or satellite.

..

8-5

Chapter 8: Training and Developing Employees

8-6

L. Computer-Based Training (CBT) – training methods that use interactive computer-based systems to increase knowledge or skills.

M. Simulated Learning and Gaming – a variety of different activities including but not limited to virtual reality-type games, step-by-step animated guides, role playing, and software training.

N. Online/Internet-Based Training – used to deliver almost all types of training such as the Blackboard learning management system, Learning Portals which is a section of the employer’s website that offers employees online access to training courses, and blended learning which uses multiple delivery methods.

O. The Virtual Classroom – special collaboration software enables multiple remote learners to use their PCs or laptops to participate in live discussions.

P. Mobile and Micro Learning – more and more learning and development is being “microsized” and delivered through mobile devices. Web 2.0 learning is learning that utilizes online technologies such as social networks and virtual worlds.

Q. Diversity Counts: Online Accessibility R. HR and the Gig Economy: On-Demand Microlearning at Uber S. Lifelong and Literacy Training Techniques –provides employees with continuing learning experiences over their tenure with the firm, with the aims of ensuring they have the opportunity to learn the skills they need to do their jobs and to expand their occupational horizons. Literary training. About one in seven workers can’t read their employers’ manuals. Employers turn to private firms provide the requisite education or have supervisors teach basic skills. Diversity training aims to improve crosscultural sensitivity, so as to foster more harmonious working relationships among a firm’s employees.

T. Team Training – teamwork doesn’t always come naturally. Companies devote many hours to training new employees to listen to each other and to cooperate.

U. Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses V. Implementing Management Development Programs A. Strategy’s Role in Management Development – management development is any attempt to improve managerial performance by imparting knowledge, changing attitudes, or increasing skills. Management development is important for several reasons: 1) promotion from within being a source of talent, and virtually all promoted managers require some development, and 2) it facilitates organizational continuity.

B. Succession planning is part of this process and is the process through which a company plans for and fills senior-level openings.

C. Improving Performance Through HRIS: Succession Systems D. Candidate Assessment and the 9-Box Grid – the 9-box grid is a tool to help in the selection process and in succession planning that shows the potential and performance of managers.

E. Managerial On-the-Job Training and Rotation – methods include job rotation, coaching/understudy approach, and action learning.

1. Improving Performance: HR Practices Around the Globe

..

Chapter 8: Training and Developing Employees

8-7

2. The Coaching/Understudy Approach – occurs when a trainee works directly with a senior manager or with the person he/she is to replace, and the latter is responsible for coaching the trainee.

3. Action Learning – gives managers and others released time to work full-time on projects to analyze and solve problems in departments other than their own.

4. Stretch Assignments – assignments that push employees beyond their comfort zone.

F. Off-the-Job Management Training and Development Techniques 1. The case study method has a trainee solve realistic problems after studying written or video case descriptions.

2. Management games or computerized management games allow for the trainees to make realistic decisions in simulated situations.

3. Outside seminars are offered by many companies and universities.

4. University-related programs provide executive education and continuing education programs in leadership, supervision, and the like.

5. Role playing is aimed at creating a realistic situation and then having the trainees assume the parts (or roles) of specific persons in that situation.

6. Corporate universities are in-house development centers that have been established by many companies to expose prospective managers to realistic exercises that develop improved management skills. The best corporate universities: a) actively align offerings with corporate goals, b) focus on developing skills that support business needs, c) evaluate learning and performance, d) use technology to support learning, and e) partner with academia.

7. Executive coaches are being used by firms to improve their top managers’ effectiveness. An executive coach is an outside consultant who questions the executive’s boss, peers, subordinates, and sometimes family, in order to identify strengths and weaknesses. The coach then counsels the executive so he or she can capitalize on those strengths and overcome the weaknesses.

8. The SHRM Learning System encourages HR professionals to get certified by taking one of three exams: professional, senior professional, and global HR. G. As a leadership development example, Cigna offers various leadership development programs by specialty through leadership assessments, mentorships, and experiential learning.

H. Trends Shaping HR: Talent Management and Differential Development Assignments – in today’s competitive environment, it is crucial that an organization distribute its resources effectively. It is no longer appropriate to provide across-the-board raises, for example, but instead firms must allocate resources in a way that supports the strategic goals of the company.

I. Characteristics of Effective Leadership Development Programs – thorough needs analysis; mandatory participation; trainer-based programs; practicebased programs; feedback; on-site programs; face-to-face programs.

..

Chapter 8: Training and Developing Employees

8-8

VI. Managing Organizational Change Programs A. What to Change – when organizations are faced with the need to manage change, there are five different aspects that can be targeted, including strategy, culture, structure, technologies, and attitudes/skills.

B. Lewin’s Change Process – the most difficult part of implementing organizational change is overcoming employees’ resistance to it.

Psychologist Kurt Lewin formulated a classic explanation of how to implement change in the face of resistance. His change process consists of three steps: 1) unfreezing; 2) moving; and 3) refreezing.

C. Implementing Organizational Change – the eight steps are 1) establish a sense of urgency; 2) mobilize commitment through joint diagnosis of problems; 3) create a guiding coalition; 4) develop and communicate a shared vision; 5) help employees make the change; 6) aim first for attainable short-term accomplishments; 7) reinforce the new ways of doing things; and 8) monitor and assess progress, comparing the company’s progress with where it should be.

D. Using Organizational Development – organizational development is a special approach to organizational change in which the employees themselves formulate the change required and implement it, often with the assistance of a trained consultant. OD has several distinguishing characteristics, including: action research; applied behavioral science knowledge to improve the organization’s effectiveness; the ability to change attitudes, values, and beliefs of employees so that they can implement the technical, procedural, or structural changes needed; and the ability to change the organization in a particular direction.

VII. Evaluating the Training Effort A. Designing the Study – the evaluation process of choice is controlled experimentation, which uses both a training group and a control group (one that receives no training) to assess before and after performance to determine the extent to which performance in the training group resulted from the training itself rather than some organization-wide change. In practice, few firms use this method, preferring to simply measure trainees’ reactions, or to measure trainee job performance before and after the training.

B. Training Effects to Measure – four basic categories of training outcomes can be measured: 1) reaction; 2) learning; 3) behavior; and 4) results.

Chapter Review Chapter Section Summaries: 8-1.

8-2.

Getting your new employee on board and up to speed begins with orienting and training.

There is more to orientating employees than introducing them to coworkers. Even without a company-wide program like Toyota’s, use this onboarding opportunity to begin

..

Chapter 8: Training and Developing Employees

8-3.

8-4.

8-5.

8-6.

8-7.

8-9

instilling in the new employee the company values and traditions in which you expect the person to become engaged.

We use the acronym ADDIE to outline the training process: analyze, develop, design, implement, and evaluate.

With this in place, you can turn to implementing the training program.

Most training methods are useful for all employees, but some are particularly appropriate for management development programs.

When facing economic, competitive, or other challenges, managers have to execute organizational change programs.

Whatever the training program, it’s important to evaluate the training effort.

Discussion Questions: 8-1. "A well-thought-out orientation program is essential for all new employees, whether they have experience or not." Explain why you agree or disagree with this statement.

New employees can suffer from a significant amount of anxiety during the first few days on the job as they find themselves in an environment and culture that they are not familiar with.

Those with little job experience may find it especially difficult without an orientation since they have little other experience on which to base their expectations. A well-developed orientation program will socialize new employees into important organizational values, whereby their chances of easing smoothly into the organization are improved.

8-2. Explain how you would apply our “motivation points” in developing a lecture, say, on orientation and training.

Student answers should reflect the issues identified in the guidelines in the section on lectures. As an exercise, you might have students develop and deliver a lecture (perhaps on one section of this chapter). Then ask the students to critique each other based on the guidelines summarized in the section on lectures.

8-3. What are some typical on-the-job training techniques? What do you think are some of the main drawbacks of relying on informal on-the-job training? What are some important advantages to using cloud-based training?

Specific training methods include on-the-job training, apprenticeship training, informal learning, job instruction training, lectures, programmed learning, audiovisual-based training, vestibule training, videoconferencing, electronic performance support systems, and computer-based training. Frequently, programs are Internet-based, with employees accessing packaged online programs backed up by learning management systems through their company’s learning portals. Employers also increasingly use mobile learning, for instance, delivering short courses and explanations to employees’ smart phones.

On-the-job training has drawbacks unless it is planned out and structured. Trainers (often the employees’ supervisors) may lack training themselves and lack training materials. (They

..

Chapter 8: Training and Developing Employees

8-10

should know, for instance, how to motivate learners). Low expectations may translate into poor trainee performance. Effective coaching is essential. Student responses will vary.

Cloud-based training revolutionized training by enabling employers to outsource much or all of their training activities. Because the vendor hosts both the courses and the overall learning management system, the employer need not concern itself with setting up or updating the programs on its own computers; the vendor manages the software. Also, the more advanced cloud-based learning management systems let trainees access the training software and courses from wherever they are using a variety of mobile devices. This not only improves convenience, but also facilitates collaboration among employees when, for instance, they’re working together on a training project.

8-4. Describe the pros and cons of five management development methods.

Management development is any attempt to improve managerial performance by imparting knowledge, changing attitudes, or increasing skills. It thus includes in-house programs like courses, coaching, and rotational assignments; professional programs like those given by SHRM; online programs from various sources; and university programs like MBAs. Students can discuss the pros and cons of each method.

8-5. Do you think job rotation is a good method to use for developing management trainees? Why or why not?

Most students will probably support job rotation for management trainees. It gives the trainee the opportunity to experience several areas and to develop cross-departmental skills and cooperation. It also gives the trainee the chance to experience different areas to see what he or she likes.

8-6. What is organizational development, and how does it differ from traditional approaches to organizational change?

Organizational development is a special approach to organizational change in which employees themselves formulate and implement the change that’s required. It differs from traditional approaches to organizational change in that it asks employees to help design the change.

8-7. List and briefly explain each of the steps in the training process.

The employer should use a rational training process. The gold standard here is still the basic analysis-design-develop-implement-evaluate (ADDIE) training process model that training experts have used for years. As an example, one training vendor describes its training process as follows: 1. Analyze the training need – the training needs analysis may address the employer’s strategic/longer-term training needs and/or its current training needs.

2. Design the overall training program – design means planning the overall training program including training objectives, delivery methods, and program evaluation. Sub-steps

..

Chapter 8: Training and Developing Employees

8-11

include setting performance objectives, creating a detailed training outline (all training program steps from start to finish), choosing a program delivery method (such as lectures or Web), and verifying the overall program design with management.

3. Develop the course (actually assembling/creating the training materials) – program development means actually assembling the program’s training content and materials. It means choosing the actual content the program will present, as well as designing/choosing the specific instructional methods (lectures, cases, Web-based, etc.) you will use. Training equipment and materials include (for example) iPads, workbooks, lectures, PowerPoint slides, Web- and computer-based activities, course activities, trainer resources (manuals, for instance), and support materials.

4. Implement training – by actually training the targeted employee group using methods such as on-the-job or online training.

Evaluate the course’s effectiveness – with today’s emphasis on measuring results, it is crucial that the manager evaluate the training program. There are two basic issues to address when evaluating training programs. One is the design of the evaluation study and, in particular, whether to use controlled experimentation. The second is, “What should we measure

Individual and Group Activities: 8-8. You’re the supervisor of a group of employees whose task is to assemble disk drives that go into computers. You find that quality is not what it should be and that many of your group’s devices have to be brought back and reworked. Your boss says, “You’d better start doing a better job of training your workers.” a) What are some of the “staffing factors” that could be contributing to this problem? b) Explain how you would go about assessing whether it is in fact a training problem.

Have students brainstorm the potential factors other than training that could be the root cause of this problem. Make the point that people often will immediately point to training as the issue, when in fact there are other factors at play that are impacting performance.

8-9. Choose a task with which you are familiar—mowing the lawn, making a salad, or studying for a test—and develop a job instruction sheet for it.

There is an example of a job instruction training sheet for operating a large motorized paper cutter in the text. Students should be able to put the task they select into the format given.

8-10. Working individually or in groups, develop a short-programmed learning program on the subject “Guidelines for Giving a More Effective Lecture.”

Students should use the guidelines listed in the programmed learning section of the chapter, but should not forget that this assignment is not just about listing guidelines. They are to develop a programmed learning that 1) presents questions, facts, or problems to the learner, 2) allows the person to respond, and 3) provides feedback to the learner on the accuracy of his or her answers.

..

Chapter 8: Training and Developing Employees

8-12

8-11. Find three or four actual examples of employers using social media for training purposes. At what levels of managers are the offerings aimed? What seem to be the most popular types of programs? Why do you think that’s the case?

Student results will vary but should include a variety of media such as LinkedIn, Facebook, Second Life, and Web 2.0 learning.

8-12. Working individually or in groups, develop several specific examples to illustrate how a professor teaching human resource management could use at least four of the techniques described in this chapter in teaching his or her HR course.

Look for examples to be well thought out and to represent the guidelines given in the appropriate sections on traditional training techniques.

8-13. Working individually or in groups, develop an orientation program for high school graduates entering your university as freshmen.

The students should refer to the section in the chapter on why orientation is important.

They should also create an orientation checklist.

8-14. Appendices A and B at the end of this book list the knowledge someone studying for the HRCI (Appendix A) or SHRM (Appendix B) certification exam needs to have in each area of human resource management (such as in Strategic Management and Workforce Planning). In groups of several students, do four things: (1) review Appendix A and/or B; (2) identify the material in this chapter that relates to the Appendix A and/or B required knowledge lists; (3) write four multiple-choice exam questions on this material that you believe would be suitable for inclusion in the HRCI exam; and (4) if time permits, have someone from your team post your team’s questions in front of the class, so that students in all teams can answer the exam questions created by the other teams.

Material covered in this chapter relevant to the HRCI exam would include succession planning, needs analysis, development, implementation and evaluation of training programs, development, training methods, programs and techniques, instructional methods and program delivery, implementation and evaluation of programs to assess employees’ potential for growth and development in the organization, change management programs and activites, organizational development theories and aplications, and employee involvement strategies.

8-15. Perhaps no training task in Afghanistan was more pressing than creating the country’s new army in the early 2000s, which is an ongoing task. These were the people who were to help the coalition bring security to Afghanistan. However, many new soldiers and even officers had no experience. There were language barriers between trainers and trainees. And some trainees found themselves quickly under fire from insurgents when they went as trainees out into the field. Based on what you learned about training from this chapter, list the five most important things you

..

Chapter 8: Training and Developing Employees

8-13

would tell the U.S. officer in charge of training to keep in mind as he designs the training program.

Lead a discussion with students to identify concepts learned in this chapter that apply to this example. Have them identify how each recommendation addresses the unique issues in this scenario. Suggest that students do Internet research to discover how, in fact, training was conducted, and have them critique the approach, techniques, and methods used based on the material in the text.

Experiential Exercise: Flying the Friendlier Skies Purpose: The purpose of this exercise is to give you practice in developing a training program for the job of airline reservation clerk for a major airline.

Required Understanding: You should be fully acquainted with the material in this chapter and should read the following description of an airline reservation clerk’s duties: Customers contact our airline reservation clerks to obtain flight schedules, prices, and itineraries.

The reservation clerks look up the requested information on our airline’s online flight schedule systems, which are updated continuously. The reservation clerk must deal courteously and expeditiously with the customer, and be able to quickly find alternative flight arrangements in order to provide the customer with the itinerary that fits his or her needs. Alternative flights and prices must be found quickly, so that the customer is not kept waiting, and so that our reservations operations group maintains its efficiency standards. It is often necessary to look under various routings, since there may be a dozen or more alternative routes between the customer’s starting point and destination. You may assume that we just hired 30 new clerks, and that you must create a 3-day training program.

How to Set up the Exercise/Instructions: Divide the class into teams of five or six students.

Airline reservation clerks obviously need numerous skills to perform their jobs. This airline has asked you to design quickly the outline of a training program for its new reservation clerks.

8-16. You may want to start by listing the job’s main duties and by reviewing any work you may have done for the exercise at the end of Chapter 6.

8-17. In any case, please produce the requested outline, making sure to be very specific about what you want to teach the new clerks, and what methods and aids you suggest using to train them.

Application Case: Reinventing the Wheel at Apex Door Company 8-18. What do you think of Apex’s training process? Could it help to explain why employees “do things their way” and if so, how?

..

Chapter 8: Training and Developing Employees

8-14

There is a weak accountability system. The person assigned to perform training is likely to have very low motivation (a departing employee). With no formal descriptions, the trainer will teach “their way” of accomplishing tasks. There is no training documentation. One receives training in “how to train.” There are no outcome measures to determine if the training was successful.

8-19. What role should job descriptions play in training at Apex?

Job descriptions set the boundaries of jobs in terms of required knowledge and skills. By understanding the job description, a trainer can define the learning requirements for a new or transitioning employee.

8-20. Explain in detail what you would do to improve the training process at Apex. Make sure to provide specific suggestions, please.

Every position would have a formal (written) description. Training procedures would be documented for each position. Supervisors would be formally accountable for training.

Continuing Case: Carter Cleaning Company – The New Training Program 8-21. Specifically, what should the Carters cover in their new employee orientation program, and how should we convey this information?

The students should refer to the orientation checklist in Figure 8-1 and the section on orienting employees in the chapter.

8-22. In the HR management course Jennifer took, the book suggested using a job instruction sheet to identify tasks performed by an employee. Should the Carter Cleaning Centers use a form like this for the counter person’s job? If so, what should the form look like, say, for a counter person?

The students should refer to the section on the training needs of new employees. This section discusses a job instruction sheet. Students should use this to formulate their answers.

8-23. Which specific training techniques should Jennifer use to train her pressers, her cleaner-spotters, her managers, and her counter people? Why should these training techniques be used?

The students should review the training techniques discussed in the chapter and conduct research on the Internet to review the various training resources offered for each of these positions.

..

Chapter 8: Training and Developing Employees

8-15

Hotel Paris: Improving Performance at the Hotel Paris – The New Training Program 8-24. Based on what you read in this chapter, what would you have suggested Lisa and her team do first with respect to training, particularly in terms of the company’s strategy? Why? Lisa should review employee performance evaluation forms to determine whether and where there are deficits. Customer feedback may also indicate whether there is a need for certain types of training.

8-25. Have Lisa and the CFO sufficiently investigated whether training is really called for?

Why? What would you suggest?

No. Although there are large differences in such measures as spending as a percentage of payroll, that in itself does not mean training is lacking. On-the-job training costs little and may be taking place on an informal, and therefore unmeasured, basis. Additionally, such things as employee tenure may be having an effect on training costs. If Hotel Paris employees have been there for many years, they may require less training than the employees of a hotel which has high turnover. Lisa needs to analyze the need for training more thoroughly.

8-26. Based on what you read in this chapter, and what you may access via the Web, develop a detailed training program for one of these hotel positions: security guard, housekeeper, or door person.

Students’ answers will vary.

Key Terms: Employee Orientation – A procedure for providing new employees with basic background information about the firm.

Training – The process of teaching new or current employees the basic skills they need to perform their jobs.

Negligent Training – A situation where an employer fails to train adequately, and the employee subsequently harms a third party.

Task Analysis – A detailed study of a job to identify the skills required.

Performance Analysis – Verifying that there is a performance deficiency and determining whether that deficiency should be corrected through training or through some other means (such as transferring the employee).

..

Chapter 8: Training and Developing Employees

8-16

Competency Model – A graphic model that consolidates, usually in one diagram, a precise overview of the competencies (the knowledge, skills, and behaviors) someone would need to do a job well.

The Cloud – Refers to placing software programs and services on vendors’ remote servers, from which they can then deliver these programs and services seamlessly to employee’s digital devices.

On-The-Job Training (OJT) – Training a person to learn a job while working at it.

Apprenticeship Training – A structured process by which people become skilled workers through a combination of classroom instruction and on-the-job training.

Job Instruction Training (JIT) – Listing each job's basic tasks, along with key points in order to provide step-by-step training for employees.

Programmed Learning – A systematic method for teaching job skills involving presenting questions or facts, allowing the person to respond, and giving the learner immediate feedback on the accuracy of his or her answers.

Behavior Modeling – A training technique in which trainees are first shown good management techniques in a film, are then asked to play roles in a simulated situation, and are then given feedback and praise by their supervisor.

Electronic Performance Support Systems (EPSS) – Sets of computerized tools and displays that automate training, documentation, and phone support, integrate this automation into applications, and provide support that’s faster, cheaper, and more effective than traditional methods.

Job Aid – A set of instructions, diagrams, or similar methods available at the job site to guide workers.

Virtual Classroom – Teaching method that uses special collaboration software to enable multiple remote learners, using their PCs or laptops, to participate in live audio and visual discussions, communicate via written text, and learn via content such as PowerPoint slides.

Web 2.0 Learning – Training that uses online technologies such as social networks, virtual worlds (such as Second Life), and systems that blend synchronous and asynchronous delivery with blogs, chat rooms, bookmark sharing, and tools such as 3-D simulations.

Lifelong Learning – Provides employees with continuing learning experiences over their tenure with the firm, with the aims of ensuring they have the opportunity to learn the skills they need to do their jobs and to expand their occupational horizons.

Cross-Training – Training employees to do different tasks or jobs than their own; doing so facilitates flexibility and job rotation.

..

Chapter 8: Training and Developing Employees

8-17

Management Development – Any attempt to improve current or future management performance by imparting knowledge, changing attitudes, or increasing skills.

Job Rotation – A management training technique that involves moving a trainee from department to department to broaden his or her experience and identify strong and weak points.

Action Learning – A training technique by which management trainees are allowed to work full time analyzing and solving problems in other departments.

Case Study Method – A development method in which the manager is presented with a written description of an organizational problem to diagnose and solve.

Management Game – A development technique in which teams of managers compete with one another by making computerized decisions regarding realistic but simulated companies.

Role-Playing – A training technique in which trainees act out the parts in a realistic management situation.

In-House Development Center – A company-based method for exposing prospective managers to realistic exercises to develop improved management skills.

Executive Coach – An outside consultant who questions the executive’s associates in order to identify the executive’s strengths and weaknesses, and then counsel the executive so he or she can capitalize on those strengths and overcome the weaknesses.

Organizational Development – A special approach to organizational change in which employees themselves formulate and implement the change that’s required.

Controlled Experimentation – Formal methods for testing the effectiveness of a training program, preferably with before-and-after tests and a control group.

..

Part Three Training and Development Chapter 9 Performance Management and Appraisal Lecture Outline: Basics of Performance Appraisal The Performance Appraisal Process Why Appraise Performance?

Defining the Employee’s Goals and Performance Standards Improving Performance: HR as a Profit Center Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses Who Should Do the Appraising?

Traditional Tools for Appraising Performance Graphic Rating Scale Method Alternation Ranking Method Paired Comparison Method Forced Distribution Method Critical Incident Method Narrative Forms Behaviorally Anchored Rating Scales Management by Objectives Appraisal in Practice: Using Forms, Installed Software, or Cloud-Based Systems Electronic Performance Monitoring Conversation Days Using Multiple Methods Trends Shaping HR: Customized Talent Management HR and the Gig Economy: Rating Uber Drivers Dealing with Rater Error Appraisal Problems Potential Rating Problems Diversity Counts: The Problem of Bias The Need for Fairness Know Your Employment Law Managing the Appraisal Interview How to Conduct the Appraisal Interview How to Handle a Defensive Subordinate How to Criticize a Subordinate How to Handle a Written Warning Employee Engagement Guide for Managers Use the Appraisal Interview to Build Engagement Performance Management Total Quality Management and Performance Appraisal

..

Chapter 9: Performance Management and Appraisal

9-2

What Is Performance Management?

Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media Performance Management in Action Improving Performance: The Strategic Context The Manager’s Role in Performance Management Chapter Review

Where Are We Now… The purpose of this chapter is to show you how to appraise employees’ performance. The main topics we cover include the basics of performance appraisal, tools for appraising performance, dealing with rater error appraisal problems, the appraisal interview, employee engagement guide for managers, and performance management.

Interesting Issues: “Deloitte” is the name under which thousands of professionals in independent firms around the world provide audit, consulting, tax, and related services to clients. These dispersed Deloitte firms, while all under the Deloitte umbrella, are independent firms not responsible for each other’s obligations. In the United States, Deloitte USA LLP strives to deliver to its many clients results that are quantifiable and enduring. As a company that offers complex audit and consulting services to America’s top companies, consistently delivering such results depends on having a human resource strategy dedicated to getting the best from its employees. Particularly with an increasingly Millennial workforce, that requires an effective performance management system.

We’ll see what they did.

Learning Objectives: 9-1.

9-2.

9-3.

9-4.

9-5.

9-6.

Describe the performance appraisal process.

Discuss the pros and cons of at least eight traditional performance appraisal methods.

Give examples of how to deal with potential appraisal problems.

List steps to take in the appraisal interview.

Explain key points in how to use the appraisal interview to boost employee engagement.

Explain how you would take a performance management approach to appraisal.

Annotated Outline: I. Basics of Performance Appraisal A. The Performance Appraisal Process – stripped to its essentials, performance appraisal always involves the 3-step performance appraisal process: (1) setting work standards; (2) assessing the employee’s actual performance relative to those standards, which usually involves some rating form; and (3) providing feedback to the employee with the aim of helping him or her to eliminate performance deficiencies or to continue to perform above par. ..

Chapter 9: Performance Management and Appraisal

9-3

B. Why Appraise Performance? – for several reasons: 1) many employers still base pay, promotion, and retention on employee appraisals; 2) appraisals play a central role in the employer's performance management process; 3) the appraisal lets the manager and subordinate develop a plan for correcting any deficiencies, and reinforce those things the employee does correctly; 4) they serve a useful career planning purpose; and 5) appraisals play a role in identifying training and development needs.

C. Defining the Employee’s Goal and Performance Standards – includes comparing “what should be” with “what is” and assess to what extent the employee is attaining his or her numerical goals. Effective goals should be SMART = specific, measurable, attainable, relevant, and timely.

D. Improving Performance: HR as a Profit Center E. Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses How to Set Effective goals involve four guidelines: 1) Assign specific goals, 2) Assign measurable goals, 3) Assign challenging but doable goals, 4) Encourage participation.

F. Who Should Do the Appraising?

1. The immediate supervisor is at the heart of the appraisal process. Getting a supervisor’s appraisal is relatively straightforward and makes sense.

However, it does not stop with him or her.

2. Peer Appraisals – being appraised by one’s peer can be effective. One’s peer sees aspects of the person that the boss may never see, so peers’ opinions can be useful developmentally. a. Crowd Appraisals – social media tools allow almost everyone in the company (the “crowd,” as in “crowd appraisals”) to continuously appraise their peers’ work.

Employers often combine such reviews with Globoforce (www.globoforce.com)– type rewards sites, to automate the rewarding and recognizing of colleagues. b. Virtual Games – many employers conduct peer appraisals by using virtual appraisal games.

3. Rating Committees – consist of multiple raters, typically the employee’s immediate supervisor and three or four other supervisors.

4. Self-Ratings – tend to be higher than supervisor or peer ratings.

5. Appraisal by Subordinates – also known as upward feedback. It is where subordinates anonymously rate their supervisor’s performance.

6. 360-Degree Feedback – ratings are collected from the employee’s supervisors, subordinates, peers, and internal or external customers. One study found significant correlation between 360-degree ratings and conventional ratings. Firms should carefully assess potential costs, carefully train those giving feedback, and not rely solely on 360-degree feedback.

II. Techniques for Appraising Performance A. Graphic Rating Scale Method – it is the simplest and most popular performance appraisal technique. A scale is used to list a number of traits and a range of performance for each, then the employee is rated by identifying the score that best describes his/her performance level for each trait. Managers ..

Chapter 9: Performance Management and Appraisal

9-4

must decide which job performance aspects to measure. Some options include generic dimensions, actual job duties, or behaviorally recognizable. competencies. Figure 9-2 illustrates.

B. Alternation Ranking Method – employees are ranked from best to worst on a particular trait, choosing highest, then lowest, until all are ranked.

C. Paired Comparison Method – it involves ranking employees by making a chart of all possible pairs of employees for each trait and indicating which one is the better employee of the pair.

D. Forced Distribution Method – predetermined percentages of rates are placed in various performance categories, which is similar to grading on a curve.

E. Critical Incident Method – a supervisor keeps a record of positive and negative examples of a subordinate’s work-related behavior, and reviews the record with the employee at predetermined times.

F. Narrative Forms – the method involves rating the employee’s performance for each performance factor, writing down examples and an improvement plan, aiding the employee in understanding where his/her performance was good or bad, and summarizing with a focus on problem solving.

G. Behaviorally Anchored Rating Scales (BARS) – a method that combines the benefits of narratives, critical incidents, and quantified scales by anchoring a scale with specific behavioral examples of good or poor performance. The five steps in developing a BARS are: 1) write critical incidents; 2) develop performance dimensions; 3) reallocate incidents; 4) scale the incidents; and 5) develop a final instrument. The advantages of BARS include a more accurate gauge, clearer standards, feedback, independent dimensions, and consistency.

H. Management by Objectives (MBO) – the manager sets specific measurable goals with each employee and then periodically discusses the employee’s progress toward these goals. The process consists of six steps: 1) set the organization's goals; 2) set departmental goals; 3) discuss departmental goals; 4) define expected results (set individual goals); 5) conduct performance reviews; and 6) provide feedback.

I. Appraisal in Practice: Using Forms, Installed Software, or Cloud-Based Systems – employers use either hard-copy forms, installed appraisal software packages, or cloud-based systems to actually conduct appraisals. Computerization expedites appraisals. Most computerized appraisal packages today (whether installed locally or cloud-based) are modules—components of talent management systems that also include, applicant tracking systems.

J. Electronic Performance Monitoring – these systems use computer network technology to allow managers to monitor their employees’ computers and employee rate, accuracy, and time spent working online.

K. Conversation Days – manager-employee conversation that focuses on areas of improvement, growth, and setting stretch goals.

L. Using Multiple Methods – most managers use a rating form that merges several approaches.

M. Trends Shaping HR: Customized Talent Management N. HR and the Gig Economy: Rating Uber Drivers

..

Chapter 9: Performance Management and Appraisal

9-5

III. Dealing with Rater Error Appraisal Problems – it can be difficult to rate performance for several reasons, such as a systematic error in judgment that occurs when people evaluate each other: unclear standards, halo effect, central tendency, leniency or strictness, and bias.

A. Potential Rating Problems: 1. Unclear Standards – ambiguous traits and degrees of merit can result in an unfair appraisal.

2. Halo Effect – the influence of a rater’s general impression on ratings of specific qualities can be a problem.

3. Central Tendency – this occurs when supervisors stick to the middle of the rating scales, thus rating everyone average.

4. Leniency or Strictness – supervisors have the tendency to rate everyone either high or low.

5. Regency Effects – this involves letting what the employee has done recently blind the manager to the employee’s performance over the rest of the year.

B. Diversity Counts: The Problem of Bias – the tendency to allow individual differences such as age, race, and sex affect employee appraisal ratings is a problem.

C. The Need for Fairness – due to a supervisor’s ineptness or the method’s inherent unfairness many are unfair.

D. Know Your Employment Law – it’s important for an employer to ensure that appraisals are legally defensible.

IV. Managing the Appraisal Interview – the supervisor and subordinate review the appraisal and make plans to remedy deficiencies and reinforce strengths.

A. How to Conduct the Appraisal Interview – prepare for the interview by assembling the data, preparing the employee, and choosing the time and place. Be direct and specific, using objective examples; don’t get personal; encourage the person to talk; and reach agreement.

1. Make It a Dialogue. Whether subordinates express satisfaction with the appraisal interview depends on their not feeling threatened, having an opportunity to present their feelings, and being able to influence the course of the interview.

B. How to Handle a Defensive Subordinate – recognize that defensive behavior is normal; never attack a person’s defenses; postpone action; and recognize your own limitations.

C. How to Criticize a Subordinate – when required, criticize in a private and constructive manner that lets the person maintain his/her dignity and sense of worth.

D. How to Handle a Written Warning – written warnings should identify the standards by which the employee is judged, make it clear that the employee was aware of the standard, specify any deficiencies relative of the standard, and show that the employee had an opportunity to correct the behavior.

..

Chapter 9: Performance Management and Appraisal V. Employee Engagement Guide for Managers A. Use the Appraisal Interview to Build Engagement – managers can use the appraisal interview to improve their employee’s engagement by doing some of the following: 1. Take the opportunity to show the employee how his or her efforts contribute to the “big picture.”

2. Use the interview to emphasize the meaningfulness to the company of what the employee is doing.

3. Be candid and objective but do so supportively and without unnecessarily undermining the employee’s self-image.

4. Make certain the employee has what he or she needs to do a good job.

5. Managers should be candid and honest. Focus on the strengths.

6. Show your employees that you listen to their ideas and value their contributions.

7. Allow the opportunity for the employee to discuss where he or she sees himself or herself heading career-wise to improve their career.

8. Make sure that the interviewee views the appraisal and the rewards or remedial actions as fair.

VI. Performance Management A. Total Quality Management and Performance (TQM) – Total Quality Management programs are organizationwide programs that integrate all functions and processes of the business. TQM advocates argue that the organization is a system of interrelated parts, and that employees’ performance is more a function of things like training, communication, tools, and supervision than of their motivation.

B. Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media C. Performance Management in Action – the trend today is to provide real-time feedback on performance. GE began using a smart phone app it calls PD@GE to let supervisors assess employees continuously.

D. Improving Performance: Strategic Context E. The Manager’s Role in Performance Management – link employees’ goals to the company’s goals, give employees continuous feedback, provide required resources and coaching, reward good performance, and remember that employees’ performance reflects more than just whether they’re motivated.

Chapter Review Chapter Section Summaries: 9-1. Performance appraisal means evaluating an employee’s current or past performance relative to his or her performance standards.

9-2. The appraisal is generally conducted using one or more popular appraisal methods or tools.

..

9-6

Chapter 9: Performance Management and Appraisal

9-7

9-3. The appraisal process can be improved by eliminating chronic problems that often undermine appraisals and graphic rating scales in particular.

9-4. An appraisal typically culminates in an appraisal interview.

9-5. The manager can use the appraisal interview to improve the employees’ level of engagement.

9-6. Performance management is the continuous process of identifying, measuring, and developing the performance of individuals and teams and aligning their performance with the organization’s goals.

Discussion Questions: 9-1. What is the purpose of a performance appraisal?

Students’ responses will vary. Managers appraise their subordinates’ performance to obtain input on which promotion and salary raise decisions can be made, to develop plans for correcting performance deficiencies, and for career-planning purposes.

9-2. Answer the question, “Who should do the appraising?”

Appraisals by the immediate supervisor are still the heart of most appraisal processes.

However, with more firms using self-managing teams, appraisal of an employee by his or her peers—peer appraisal—is popular, as is 360-degree feedback. With 360-degree feedback, the employer collects performance information all around an employee—from his or her supervisors, subordinates, peers, and internal or external customers—generally for developmental rather than pay purposes. Some employers obtain employees’ self-ratings, usually in conjunction with supervisors’ ratings. Many employers even have subordinates rate their managers, usually for developmental rather than for pay purposes. Anonymity affects the feedback.

9-3. Discuss the pros and cons of four performance appraisal tools.

The text lists eight different performance appraisal tools. Students might discuss the pros and cons of any four of these eight. An example of some of the pros and cons is: Graphic Rating Scale method is easy to use, simple, and does not take much time to administer.

However, different supervisors may interpret a numerical rating differently and the traits rated may or may not relate to performance.

9-4. Explain how you would use the alternation ranking method, the paired comparison method, and the forced distribution method.

The alternation ranking method would be used by listing all employees to be rated, deciding who is the best in a trait to be rated, and which employee is the worst. Then decide who is the second best, and the second worst ... the third best and the third worst ... and so on until all the employees have been ranked for that trait. Then do the same with the next trait to be rated. With the paired comparison, for each trait to be rated, the supervisor would have a ..

Chapter 9: Performance Management and Appraisal

9-8

sheet with employees’ names in pairs. For each pair, the supervisor would circle the one of the two employees that is better in that trait. Forced distribution gives the supervisor a set rating scale (such as 1 through 5). The supervisor is limited to giving a pre-determined percentage of his or her employees' rating.

9-5. Explain in your own words how you would go about developing a behaviorally anchored rating scale.

Each student should express the five steps in his or her own words. Those five steps are: 1) generate critical incidents; 2) develop performance dimensions; 3) reallocate incidents; 4) scale the incidents; and 5) develop a final instrument.

9-6. Explain the problems to be avoided in appraising performance.

The five main rating scale problems listed in the text are: 1) unclear standards; 2) halo effect; 3) central tendency; 4) leniency or strictness; 5) regency effects; and 6) bias.

9-7. Compare and contrast performance management and performance appraisal.

Students’ responses will vary.

Performance management is the continuous process of identifying, measuring, and developing the performance of individuals and teams and aligning their performance with the organization’s goals. It means continuous interactions and feedback to ensure continuous improvement in the employee’s and team’s capacity and performance. Most important, it requires remembering that your employee’s performance usually reflects more than just whether he or she is “motivated.” Performance appraisal means evaluating an employee’s current or past performance relative to his or her performance standards.

Managers appraise their subordinates’ performance to obtain input on which promotion and salary raise decisions can be made, to develop plans for correcting performance deficiencies, and for career-planning purposes.

Individual and Group Activities: 9-8. Working individually or in groups, develop a graphic rating scale for the following jobs: secretary, professor, bus driver.

Answer should include job characteristics for each position. In each case, the students should come up with a defining statement that clarifies what the job characteristic means.

9-9. Working individually or in groups, describe the advantages and disadvantages of using the forced distribution appraisal method for college professors.

Students should review the section on the forced distribution method and describe how the use of this method would impact the rating of their college professors.

..

Chapter 9: Performance Management and Appraisal

9-9

9-10. Working individually or in groups, develop, over the period of a week, a set of critical incidents covering the classroom performance of one of your instructors.

If you had the class conduct a job analysis and create a job description for an instructor in Chapter 3, it would be helpful to refer to that to help identify what kinds of behavior and tasks the instructor should be doing. This will give a good basis for students to observe and watch for critical incidents. If they find critical incidents that are not based in these other documents, it will be a good opportunity to go back and review how all this ties together and that we haven't communicated to the instructor in the job description these behaviors or tasks that they are now wanting to rate them on.

9-11. Appendices A and B at the end of this book list the knowledge someone studying for the HRCI (Appendix A) or SHRM (Appendix B) certification exam needs to have in each area of human resource management (such as in Strategic Management and Workforce Planning). In groups of several students, do four things: (1) review Appendix A and/or B; (2) identify the material in this chapter that relates to the Appendix A and/or B required knowledge lists; (3) write four multiple-choice exam questions on this material that you believe would be suitable for inclusion in the HRCI exam and/or the SHRM exam; and (4) if time permits, have someone from your team post your team’s questions in front of the class, so that students in all teams can answer the exam questions created by the other teams.

Students can work in small groups, complete the four activities, and present their group’s questions to the class.

9-12. When he was doing his show The Apprentice, Donald Trump often told apprentices “You’re fired!” Review recent (or archived) episodes of Donald Trump’s The Apprentice and answer this: What performance appraisal system did Mr. Trump use, and do you think it resulted in valid appraisals? What techniques discussed in this chapter did he seem to apply? How would you suggest he might change his appraisal system to make it more effective?

Most critics agree that Trump's method of providing performance feedback could be vastly improved. Lead a discussion by first asking students to identify the methods Trump used, a critique on how well he used any methods discussed in this chapter, and then suggest which methods outlined in this chapter would be more effective, and specifically how it would be applied in the scenario/episode they selected.

Experiential Exercise: Grading the Professor Purpose: The purpose of this exercise is to give you practice in developing and using a performance appraisal form.

..

Chapter 9: Performance Management and Appraisal

9-10

Required Understanding: You are going to develop a performance appraisal form for an instructor and should therefore be thoroughly familiar with the discussion of performance appraisals in this chapter.

How to Set up the Exercise/Instructions: Divide the class into groups of four or five students.

9-13. First, based on what you now know about performance appraisal, do you think Figure 9-1 is an effective scale for appraising instructors? Why? Why not?

9-14. Next, your group should develop its own tool for appraising the performance of an instructor. Decide which of the appraisal tools (graphic rating scales, alternation ranking, and so on) you are going to use, and then design the instrument itself.

9-15. Next, have a spokesperson from each group post his or her group’s appraisal tool on the board. How similar are the tools? Do they all measure the same factors? Which factor appears most often? Which do you think is the most effective tool on the board?

9-16. The class should select the top 10 factors from all of the appraisal tools presented to create what the class perceives to be the most effective tool for appraising the performance of the instructor.

Application Case: Appraising the Secretaries at Sweetwater U 9-17. Do you think that the experts' recommendations will be sufficient to get most of the administrators to fill out the rating forms properly? Why? Why not? What additional actions (if any) do you think will be necessary?

While controversial, the recommendations would, in fact, encourage administrators to fill the forms out correctly. Using the more detailed form and not tying the performance ratings to salary increases would allow the managers to feel more free about rating the secretaries accurately. There would, however, need to be some strong training sessions (both for administrators and secretaries) to help them understand the new system. Since all secretaries have traditionally received the same salary increases and have been pleased with that, it would be advisable to consider lowering the maximum increase to an amount that could be given to all secretaries while staying within budget. Then all secretaries with a satisfactory rating or better would receive that increase.

9-18. Do you think that Vice President Winchester would be better off dropping graphic rating forms, substituting instead one of the other techniques we discussed in this chapter such as a ranking method? Why or why not?

Certainly other methods could be used. He has already had a taste of what would result if he went to a forced distribution or other ranking method. A BARS system might be best,

..

Chapter 9: Performance Management and Appraisal

9-11

but it could be costly to develop if the clerical staff has positions that are significantly different.

9-19. What performance appraisal system would you develop for the secretaries if you were Rob Winchester? Defend your answer.

If the development costs are not too great, the BARS system would give the strongest solution to the current situation. The behavioral anchors would make it more difficult to just rate everyone at the top. It would also help to eliminate the different interpretations of what the rating scales mean.

Continuing Case: Carter Cleaning Company – The Performance Appraisal 9-20. Is Jennifer right about the need to evaluate the workers formally? The managers?

Why or why not?

Based on the information presented in the chapter, the students need to determine if the workers and managers should be evaluated formally or informally, and they need to provide reasons for their decision. Outcome: Describe the process of performance appraisal and different appraisal methods.

9-21. Develop a performance appraisal method for the workers and managers in each store.

The students need to be familiar with the different appraisal methods discussed in the chapter. They should use the sample appraisal forms given in the chapter as guides.

Hotel Paris: Improving Performance at the Hotel Paris – The New Performance Management System 9-22. Choose one job, such as front-desk clerk. Based on any information you have (including job descriptions you may have created in other chapters), write a list of duties, competencies, and performance standards for that chosen job.

Answers should include competencies that will help Hotel Paris become more service oriented. Use examples from the case itself, such as the “ability to check a guest in or out in five minutes or less,” to get the class started. Discuss what has made students happy or unhappy when checking into a hotel, or in seeking other services.

9-23. Based on that, create a performance appraisal form for appraising that job.

There are samples in the text. If possible, before class ask students to bring in sample performance appraisal forms, either from jobs they have held or samples from the Internet.

Suggest combining graphic rating scales with the critical incident method to improve on..

Chapter 9: Performance Management and Appraisal

9-12

going coverage of employee performance. Also stress that a once-yearly formal appraisal will not be sufficient unless it is supplemented by regular verbal feedback.

Key Terms: Performance Appraisal – Evaluating an employee’s current and/or past performance relative to his or her performance standards.

Performance Appraisal Process – A three-step appraisal process involving (1) setting work standards, (2) assessing the employee’s actual performance relative to those standards, and (3) providing feedback to the employee with the aim of helping him or her to eliminate performance deficiencies or to continue to perform above par.

Graphic Rating Scale – A scale that lists a number of traits and a range of performance for each. The employee is then rated by identifying the score that best describes his or her level of performance for each trait.

Alternation Ranking Method – Ranking employees from best to worst on a particular trait, choosing highest, then lowest, until all are ranked.

Paired Comparison Method – Ranking employees by making a chart of all possible pairs of the employees for each trait and indicating which is the better employee of the pair.

Forced Distribution Method – Similar to grading on a curve; predetermined percentages of rates are placed in various performance categories.

Critical Incident Method – Keeping a record of uncommonly good or undesirable examples of an employee's work-related behavior and reviewing it with the employee at predetermined times.

Behaviorally Anchored Rating Scale (BARS) – An appraisal method that aims at combining the benefits of narrative critical incidents and quantified ratings by anchoring a quantified scale with specific narrative examples of good and poor performance.

Electronic Performance Monitoring (EPM) – Having supervisors electronically monitor the amount of computerized data an employee is processing per day, and thereby his or her performance.

Unclear Standards – An appraisal scale that is too open to interpretation.

Halo Effect – In performance appraisal, the problem that occurs when a supervisor's rating of a subordinate on one trait biases the rating of that person on other traits.

Central Tendency – A tendency to rate all employees the same way, such as rating them all average.

..

Chapter 9: Performance Management and Appraisal

9-13

Strictness/Leniency – The problem that occurs when a supervisor has a tendency to rate all subordinates either high or low.

Bias – The tendency to allow individual differences such as age, race, and sex to affect the appraisal ratings employees receive.

Appraisal Interview – An interview in which the supervisor and subordinate review the appraisal and make plans to remedy deficiencies and reinforce strengths.

Performance Management – The continuous process of identifying, measuring, and developing the performance of individuals and teams and aligning their performance with the organization’s goals.

..

Part Three Training and Development Chapter 10 Managing Careers and Retention Lecture Outline: Career Management Careers Today The Psychological Contract The Employee’s Role in Career Management HR and the Gig Economy: The Portfolio Career The Employer’s Role in Career Management Employer Career Management Methods Improving Performance Through HRIS: Integrating Talent Management and Career and Succession Planning Diversity Counts: Toward Career Success The Manager as Mentor and Coach Employee Engagement Guide for Managers Career Management Commitment-Oriented Career Development Efforts Improving Performance: HR Practices Around the Globe Managing Employee Turnover and Retention Improving Performance: HR as a Profit Center Managing Voluntary Turnover A Comprehensive Approach to Retaining Employees Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media Improving Performance: The Strategic Context Job Withdrawal Employee Life-Cycle Career Management Making Promotion Decisions Know Your Employment Law Diversity Counts: The Gender Gap Managing Transfers Managing Retirements Managing Dismissals Grounds for Dismissal Know Your Employment Law Avoiding Wrongful Discharge Suits Supervisor Liability Security Measures The Termination Interview and Exit Process Layoffs and the Plant Closing Law ..

Chapter 10: Managing Employee Retention, Engagement, and Careers

10-2

Adjusting to Downsizings and Mergers Chapter Review

Where Are We Now… The main purpose of this chapter is to explain how to support your employees’ career development needs and improve employee retention. The main topics we’ll address are career management, improving employee engagement through career development, managing employee turnover and retention, employee life-cycle management, and managing dismissals.

Interesting Issues: With national grocery chains like Kroger’s, local chains like Publix, and giants like Walmart and Amazon, it’s not easy finding a grocery niche but Fresh Thyme Farmers Market did so. They’ve only been in business since 2014, but already have more than 50 stores in 10 states, with plans to open 20 more stores soon. Their strategy is to offer fresh local organic foods, with about half of each store devoted to fresh produce. Its stores have dietitians on staff, and employees pride themselves on getting customers to eat healthy. The question is, how do you attract and retain employees like those. We’ll see what they did.

Learning Objectives: 10-1. Discuss what employers and supervisors can do to support employees’ career development needs.

10-2. Explain why career development can improve employee engagement.

10-3. Describe a comprehensive approach to retaining employees.

10-4. List and briefly explain the main decisions employers should address in reaching promotion and other employee life-cycle career decisions.

10-5. Explain each of the main grounds for dismissal.

Annotated Outline: I. Career Management – is a process of enabling employees to better understand and develop their career skills and interests and to use these skills and interests most effectively both within the company and after they leave that firm.

A. Careers Today – people once viewed careers as a sort of upward stairway from job to job. Today, many people do still move up but many (or most) find themselves having to reinvent themselves.

B. The Psychological Contract – this is what psychologists say is what the employer and employee expect from each other. This is an “unwritten agreement that exists between the employers and employees.” The psychological contract identifies each party’s mutual expectations.

C. The Employee’s Role in Career Management – although the employee, the manager, and the employer all have roles in the employee’s career development, ultimately however, it is the employee who must shoulder responsibility for his or her own career. The employee is to assess interests, skills, and values; seek out ..

Chapter 10: Managing Employee Retention, Engagement, and Careers

10-3

career information resources; and generally take those steps that must be taken to ensure a happy and fulfilling career.

D. HR and the Gig Economy: The Portfolio Career E. The Employer’s Role in Career Management – the employer should give a realistic job preview, provide a challenging first job, and assign mentors.

These are things an employer can do to help prevent reality shock, a phenomenon that occurs when a new employee’s high expectations and enthusiasm confront the reality of a boring, unchallenging job.

F. Employer Career Management Methods – career planning workshops and career coaches are methods employers use for career guidance. Career planning workshops are “a planned learning event in which participants are expected to be actively involved, completing career planning exercises and inventories, and participating in career skills practice sessions.”

Career coaches generally help employees create 1- to 5-year plans showing where their careers with the firm may lead. Career coaches help individual employees identify their development needs and obtain the training, professional development, and networking opportunities that they require to satisfy those needs.

G. Improving Performance Through HRIS: Integrating Talent Management and Career and Succession Planning H. Diversity Counts: Toward Career Success – people with disabilities tend to have less career success. Some barriers may be self-imposed. The problem reflects unfortunate assumptions and actions by managers and coworkers who may view those with disabilities as unable to perform various jobs.

I. The Manager as Mentor and Coach – for the supervisor, mentoring can be both valuable and risky. It is valuable insofar as you can influence in a positive way the careers and lives of your less experienced subordinates and colleagues. The danger is it can backfire. Coaching focuses on teaching daily tasks that you can easily relearn, so coaching’s downside is usually limited.

II. Employee Engagement Guide for Managers A. Career Management – due to labor market turbulences, many people ask the question “why should they be loyal to their employers?” Employers today therefore have to think through how they’re going to maintain employee engagement, and thereby minimize voluntary departures, and maximize employee effort.

B. Commitment-Oriented Career Development Efforts – the employer’s career development process should send the signal that the employer cares about the employee’s career success. Career-oriented appraisal allows the supervisor and employee to jointly merge the latter’s past performance, career preferences, and developmental needs into a formal career plan.

C. Improving Performance: HR Practices Around the Globe

..

Chapter 10: Managing Employee Retention, Engagement, and Careers

10-4

III. Managing Employee Turnover and Retention – not all employees’ career plans will coincide with the company’s need. Turnover—the rate at which employees leave the firm—varies markedly among industries, whether voluntary or involuntary.

A. Improving Performance: HR as a Profit Center B. Managing Voluntary Turnover – identifying why employees voluntarily leave is not so easy. People who are dissatisfied with their jobs are more likely to leave, but the sources of dissatisfaction are many and varied. The manager should understand that retaining employees is a talent management issue, and that the best retention strategies are therefore multifunctional. Thus, trying to formulate a “retention strategy” requires one to consider all practices.

C. A Comprehensive Approach to Retaining Employees – identifying the problem is an important step that can be done by doing the following: exit interview, attitude surveys, hotlines, and stay interview. Once analyzed, some of the simple solutions may be the following: raise pay, hire smart, discuss careers, provide direction, offer flexiblity, use high-performance HR practices, and counteroffer.

D. Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media E. Improving Performance: The Strategic Context F. Job Withdrawal – generally has been identified as “actions intended to place physical or psychological distance between employees and their work environments.” Absences and voluntary turnover are the two obvious types.

IV. Employee Life-Cycle Career Management A. Making Promotion Decisions – promotions usually provide opportunities to reward the exceptional performance and to fill open positions with tested and loyal employees. However, unfairness, arbitrariness, or secrecy can diminish the effectiveness of the promotion process for all concerned.

B. Know Your Employment Law – Establish Clear Guidelines for Managing Promotions 1. Decision 1: Is Seniority or Competence the Rule? Today’s focus on competitiveness favors competence. However, union agreements and civil service regulations often emphasize seniority.

2. Decision 2: How Should We Measure Competence? Define the job, set standards, use one or more appraisal tools to record the employee’s performance, and use a valid procedure for predicting a candidate’s potential for future performance.

3. Decision 3: Is the Process Formal or Informal? Each firm will determine whether the promotional process is formal or informal.

4. Decision 4: Vertical, Horizontal, or Other? Promotions can be vertical (within the same functional area) or horizontal (in different functional areas).

5. Practical Considerations – there are several practice steps that should be taken by employers and managers: 1) establish eligibility requirements; 2) review the job description; 3) review candidates’ performance and history, and 4) hire only those who meet the requirements.

..

Chapter 10: Managing Employee Retention, Engagement, and Careers

10-5

C. Diversity Counts: The Gender Gap – women still don’t reach the top of the career ladder in numbers proportionate to their numbers in U.S. industry. Women constitute more than 45% of the workforce, but hold less than 2% of top management positions.

To help eliminate the barriers that impede women’s career progress, employers can take some of the following specific steps: a) eliminate barriers, b) improve networking and mentoring, c) break the glass ceiling, and d) adopt flexible career tracks.

D. Managing Transfers – transfers are moves from one job to another, usually with no change in salary or grade. Transfers are a way to give displaced employees a chance for another assignment or, perhaps, some personal growth.

E. Managing Retirements – studies show that employees who are more committed and loyal to the employer are more likely to stay beyond their normal retirement age. It helps to create a culture that honors experience. Employers use several techniques to keep older workers, such as offering part-time employment, which is an alternative to outright retirement, or hiring them as consultants or temporary workers. Also offering flexible work arrangements, encouraging them to work past traditional retirement age, providing training to upgrade skills, and instituting a phased retirement program.

V. Managing Dismissals – not all employee separations are voluntary. Some career plans and appraisals end not in promotion or graceful retirement but in dismissal – involuntary termination of an employee’s employment with the firm.

A. Grounds for Dismissal – there are four bases for dismissal: unsatisfactory performance, misconduct, lack of qualifications for the job, and changed requirements of (or elimination of) the job.

1. Insubordination – a form of misconduct, is sometimes the grounds for dismissal.

The two basic categories of insubordination are: 1) unwillingness to carry out the manager’s orders, and 2) disrespectful behavior toward the manager. (This assumes that the orders were legitimate and that the manager did not incite the reaction through his or her own extreme behavior).

B. Know Your Employment Law: Termination at Will – there are three main protections against wrongful discharge which are statutory exceptions, common law exceptions, and public policy exceptions.

C. Avoiding Wrongful Discharge Suits – wrongful discharge (or termination) occurs when an employee’s dismissal does not comply with the law or with the contractual arrangement stated or implied by the employer. To avoid it requires several things: 1. Have employment policies include grievance procedures that help show you how treat employees fairly.

2. Review and refine all employment-related policies, procedures, and documents to limit challenges.

3. Procedural steps include: a. Have applicants sign the employment application. Make sure it contains a statement that “the employer can terminate at any time.” b. Review your employee manual to delete statements that could undermine your defense in a wrongful discharge case. For example, delete “employees can be terminated only for just cause.” c. Have written rules listing infractions that may require discipline and discharge.

..

Chapter 10: Managing Employee Retention, Engagement, and Careers

10-6

d. If a rule is broken, get the worker’s side of the story in front of witnesses, and preferably, get it signed. Then check out the story. e. Be sure that employees get a written appraisal at least annually. If an employee shows evidence of incompetence, give that person a warning. Provide an opportunity to improve. f. Keep careful confidential records of all actions such as employee appraisals, warnings or notices, and so on. g. Finally, ask the questions in Figure 10-4.

D. Supervisor Liability – courts may hold managers personally liable for their supervisory actions, including dismissal. The Fair Labor Standards Act defines an employer to include “any person acting directly or indirectly in the interest of an employer in relation to any employee.” This can mean the individual supervisor.

E. Security Measures – using a checklist to ensure (for instance) that dismissed employees return all keys and company property, and (often) accompanying them out of the building. The employer should also disable Internet-related passwords and accounts of former employees, plug any holes that could allow an ex-employee to gain illegal online access, and have rules for the return of company laptops and handhelds.

F. The Termination Interview and Exit Process – dismissing an employee is one of the most difficult tasks you can face at work. Guidelines for the termination interview are as follows: 1. Plan the interview carefully 2. Get to the point 3. Describe the situation 4. Listen 5. Review the severance package 6. Identify the next step The exit process often includes outplacement counseling, an exit interview, and a specific exit process with a checklist. For the employee, most people surrender to the usual stages of shock, denial, and anger. However, the better first step is usually to think why you lost the job.

G. Layoffs and the Plant Closing Law – for the employer, reduced sales or profits or the desire for more productivity may require layoffs. Employees (as we’ve seen) may leave for better jobs, to retire, or for other reasons. The Worker Adjustment and Retraining Notification Act (WARN Act, or the plant closing law) requires employers of 100 or more employees to give 60 days’ notice before closing a facility or starting a layoff of 50 or more people.

It’s not surprising that layoffs often result in “deleterious psychological and physical health outcomes” for those losing their jobs, as well as for survivors.

H. Adjusting to Downsizing and Mergers – the basic idea is to cut costs and raise profitability. Downsizings (some call them “productivity transformation programs”) require careful consideration of several matters.

1. First is making sure the right people are let go; this requires having an effective appraisal system in place.

2. Second is compliance with all applicable laws, including WARN. 3. Third is executing the dismissals in a manner that is just and fair.

..

Chapter 10: Managing Employee Retention, Engagement, and Careers

10-7

4. Fourth is security, for instance, retrieving keys and ensuring that those leaving, don’t take prohibited items with them.

5. Fifth is reducing the remaining employees’ uncertainty and addressing their concerns. This typically involves a postdownsizing announcement and program, including meetings where senior managers field questions from the remaining employees.

Chapter Review Chapter Section Summaries: 10-1. Employees are ultimately responsible for their own career, but employers and managers also have roles in career management.

10-2. The employer’s career planning and development process and practices (including careeroriented appraisal) help to foster employee engagement.

10-3. Managing voluntary turnover requires identifying its causes and then addressing them. A comprehensive approach to retaining employees should be multifaceted.

10-4. Employers need to address employee life-cycle career management issues.

10-5. Managing dismissals is an important part of any supervisor’s job.

Discussion Questions: 10-1. Why is it advisable for an employee retention effort to be comprehensive? What activities would you say is involved in such a program?

Students’ responses will vary. A comprehensive approach to retaining employees should be multifaceted, and include improved selection, a well-thought-out training and career development program, assistance in helping employees lay out potential career plans, providing employees with meaningful work and recognition and rewards, promoting work– life balance, acknowledging employees’ achievements, and providing all this within a supportive company culture.

10-2. What is the employee’s role in the career development process? The manager’s role?

The employer’s role?

Employees must understand that it is their role to take charge of their own career development. The manager should support the employee’s career development needs and schedule regular performance appraisals. The employer’s role depends on how long the employee has been with the organization, but it should include providing a process and a structure to develop employees’ careers.

10-3. What are the main decisions employers should address in reaching promotion decisions?

..

Chapter 10: Managing Employee Retention, Engagement, and Careers

10-8

The decisions to make are: 1) Is seniority or competence the rule?; 2) How should we measure competence?; 3) Is the process formal or informal?; 4) Is the process vertical, horizontal, or other?

10-4. Discuss at least four procedural suggestions for managing dismissals effectively.

Students’ responses may vary. Review and refine all employment-related policies, procedures, and documents to limit challenges. Procedural steps include:       

Have applicants sign the employment application. Make sure it contains a statement that “the employer can terminate at any time.”

Review your employee manual to delete statements that could undermine your defense in a wrongful discharge case. For example, delete “employees can be terminated only for just cause.”

Have written rules listing infractions that may require discipline and discharge.

If a rule is broken, get the worker’s side of the story in front of witnesses, and preferably get it signed. Then check out the story.

Be sure that employees get a written appraisal at least annually. If an employee shows evidence of incompetence, give that person a warning. Provide an opportunity to improve.

Keep careful confidential records of all actions such as employee appraisals, warnings or notices, and so on.

Finally, ask the questions in Figure 10-4.

10-5. What would you as a supervisor do to avoid someone accusing you of wrongful dismissal?

There are several ways to reduce the likelihood of having personal liability become an issue.  Follow company policies and procedures. An employee may initiate a claim against a supervisor who he or she alleges did not follow policies and procedures.  Carefully consider and fully document the basis for any termination decision.  Administer the dismissal in a manner that does not add to the employee’s emotional hardship (as would having the employee publicly collect his or her belongings and leave the office).  Do not act in anger, since doing so undermines the appearance of objectivity.  Finally, use the HR department for advice regarding how to handle difficult dismissal situations.

Individual and Group Activities: 10-6. Many rightfully offer IBM as an example of an employer that works hard to improve employee retention and engagement. Browse through the employment pages of IBM’s website (such as www-03.ibm.com/employment/index.shtml). In this chapter, we

..

Chapter 10: Managing Employee Retention, Engagement, and Careers

10-9

discussed actions employers can take to improve employee retention and engagement.

From the information on IBM’s Web pages, what is IBM doing to support retention and engagement?

Look for students to integrate the principles in this chapter in the analysis and suggestions.

10-7. In groups of four or five students, meet with one or two administrators and faculty members in your college or university and, based on this, write a two-page paper on the topic “the faculty promotion process at our college.” What do you think of the process? Based on our discussion in this chapter, could you make any suggestions for improving it?

Look for students to integrate the principles in this chapter in the analysis and suggestions.

10-8. Working individually or in groups, choose two occupations (such as management consultant, HR manager, or salesperson) and use sources such as O*NET to size up the future demand for this occupation in the next 10 years or so. Does this seem like a good occupation to pursue? Why or why not?

Students should be able to support their conclusions with data and information from these sources.

10-9. In groups of four or five students, interview a small business owner or an HR manager with the aim of writing a two-page paper addressing the topic “steps our company is taking to reduce voluntary employee turnover.” What is this employer’s turnover rate now? How would you suggest it improve its turnover rate?

Look for students to integrate the principles in this chapter in the analysis and suggestions.

10-10. Appendices A and B at the end of this book list the knowledge someone studying for the HRCI (Appendix A) or SHRM (Appendix B) certification exam needs to have in each area of human resource management (such as in Strategic Management and Workforce Planning). In groups of several students, do four things: (1) review Appendix A and/or B; (2) identify the material in this chapter that relates to the Appendix A and/or B required knowledge lists; (3) write four multiple-choice exam questions on this material that you believe would be suitable for inclusion in the HRCI exam and/or the SHRM exam; and (4) if time permits, have someone from your team post your team’s questions in front of the class, so that students in all teams can answer the exam questions created by the other teams.

Look for students to integrate the principles in this chapter in the analysis and suggestions.

10-11. Several years ago, a survey of college graduates in the United Kingdom found that although many hadn’t found their first jobs, most were already planning “career breaks” and to keep up their hobbies and interests outside work. As one report of the findings put it, “the next generation of workers is determined not to wind up on

..

Chapter 10: Managing Employee Retention, Engagement, and Careers

10-10

the hamster wheel of long hours with no play.” Part of the problem seems to be that many already see their friends “putting in more than 48 hours a week” at work.

Career experts reviewing the results concluded that many of these recent college grads “are not looking for high-pay, high-profile jobs anymore.” Instead, they seem to be looking to “compartmentalize” their lives. They want to keep the number of hours they spend at work down, so they can maintain their hobbies and outside interests. If you were mentoring one of these people at work, what three bits of career advice would you give him or her? Why? What (if anything) would you suggest their employers do to accommodate these graduates’ stated career wishes?

The advice needs to be relevant to the issues surrounding the blending of this world view with the political realities of the workforce.

10-12. Websites such as Sporting News occasionally run a story listing what they called the greatest coaches (for example, key “greatest coaches” into Google search). Look at this list, and pick out two of the names. Then research these people online to determine what behaviors they exhibited that seemed to account for why they were great coaches. How do these behaviors compare with what this chapter had to say about effective coaching?

Student conclusions should accurately reflect the concepts in this chapter on coaching.

Experiential Exercise: Where Am I Going . . . and Why? Purpose: The purpose of this exercise is to provide you with experience in analyzing your career preferences.

Required Understanding: Students should be thoroughly familiar with the “Employee’s Role in Career Management” section in this chapter, as well as using O*NET (which we discussed in Chapter 4).

How to Set up the Exercise/Instructions: Using O*NET and the “Employee’s Role in Career Management” section in this chapter, analyze your career-related inclinations (you can also take the Self-Directed Search for about $10 at www.self-directed-search.com). Based on this analysis, answer the following questions (if you wish, you may do this analysis in teams of three or four students).

10-13. What does your research suggest to you about what would be your preferable occupational options?

Student conclusions should accurately reflect the concepts in this chapter.

10-14. What are the prospects for these occupations?

Students’ answers will vary.

..

Chapter 10: Managing Employee Retention, Engagement, and Careers

10-11

10-15. Given these prospects and your own occupational inclinations, outline a brief, onepage career plan for yourself, including current occupational inclinations, career goals, and an action plan listing four or five development steps you will need to take in order to get from where you are now career-wise to where you want to be, based on your career goals.

Student conclusions should accurately reflect the concepts in this chapter.

Application Case: Uber Technologies Inc. 10-16. Without doing any more research beyond what you learned in this chapter, what steps would you suggest Uber take to improve employee retention?

Students’ answers will vary.

10-17. Was there any information in previous chapters of this book that would help to illustrate other steps Uber could take to improve retention?

Look for students to pull information from previous chapters (e.g. the selection chapter).

10-18. Use other Internet sources, includingUber.com, to finalize an answer to the question: What other steps should Uber take to improve employee retention?

Students’ answers will vary depending on the Websites they use.

Continuing Case: Carter Cleaning Company – The Career Planning Program 10-19. What would be the advantages to Carter Cleaning of setting up a career planning program?

Some examples of the advantages of setting up a career planning program for employees include increasing job satisfaction, helping employees navigate through the company, and helping employees think about and plan their careers.

10-20. Who should participate in the program? All employees? Selected employees?

Students should justify why they think certain employees should or should not participate in the program.

10-21. Outline and describe the career development program you would propose for the cleaners, pressers, counter people, and managers at the Carter Cleaning Centers.

Based on the career planning activities discussed in the chapter, students should design a

..

Chapter 10: Managing Employee Retention, Engagement, and Careers

10-12

tailored career planning and development program for the employees.

Hotel Paris: Improving Performance at the Hotel Paris – The New Career Management System 10-22. “Many hotel jobs are inherently ‘dead end’; for example, maids, laundry workers, and valets, either have no great aspirations to move up, or are just using these jobs temporarily, for instance, to help out with household expenses.” First, do you agree with this statement? Why, or why not? Second, list three specific career activities you would recommend Lisa implement for these employees.

There are no dead end jobs; every job offers an employee the opportunity to be seen and if performing successfully, to be considered for other jobs within the organization. Some possible career activities include job posting programs, educational assistance, career pathing, job rotation, etc.

10-23. Using what you learned in this chapter of Dessler Human Resource Management, build on the company’s new system by recommending two more specific career development activities the hotel should implement.

The hotel should use the performance management system to do specific career counseling. First, however, a training program to assist supervisors in how to coach employees should be developed.

10-24. What other specific career development activities would you recommend in light of the fact that the Hotel Paris’s hotels and employees are dispersed around the world?

Students’ answers will vary. Discuss the feasibility of expatriation programs in a hotel environment.

Key Terms: Career – The occupational positions a person has had over many years.

Career Management – The process for enabling employees to better understand and develop their career skills and interests, and to use these skills and interests more effectively.

Career Development – The lifelong series of activities that contribute to a person’s career exploration, establishment, success, and fulfillment.

Career Planning – The deliberate process through which someone becomes aware of personal skills, interests, knowledge, motivations, and other characteristics, and establishes action plans to attain specific goals.

..

Chapter 10: Managing Employee Retention, Engagement, and Careers

10-13

Portfolio Careers – Careers based on using one’s skills to create a livelihood from multiple income sources, often from several jobs paying different rates.

Reality Shock – Results of a period that may occur at the initial career entry when the new employee’s high job expectations confront the reality of a boring, or otherwise unattractive work situation.

Mentoring – Advising, counseling, and guiding.

Coaching – Educating, instructing, and training subordinates.

Promotion – Advancement to a position of increased responsibility.

Transfers – Reassignments to similar positions in other parts of the firm.

Dismissal – Involuntary termination of an employee’s employment with the firm.

Insubordination – Willful disregard or disobedience of the boss’s authority or legitimate orders; criticizing the boss in public.

Terminate at Will – In the absence of a contract, either the employer or the employee can terminate at will the employment relationship.

Termination Interview – The interview in which an employee is informed of the fact that he or she has been dismissed.

Outplacement Counseling – A formal process by which a terminated person is trained and counseled in the techniques of self-appraisal and securing a new position.

Exit Interviews – Interviews with employees who are leaving the firm, conducted for obtaining information about the job or related matters, to give the employer insight about the company.

Layoff – An employer sending employees home due to a lack of work; this is typically a temporary situation.

Downsizing – The process of reducing, usually dramatically, the number of people employed by a firm.

..

Part Four Compensation Chapter 11 Establishing Strategic Pay Plans Lecture Outline: Basic Factors in Determining Pay Rates Aligning Total Rewards with Strategy Equity and Its Impact on Pay Rates Legal Considerations in Compensation Know Your Employment Law – The Workday Know Your Employment Law – The Independent Contractor HR and the Gig Economy: Are Gig Workers Employees or Independent Contractors Union Influences on Compensation Decisions Pay Policies Improving Performance: The Strategic Context Improving Performance: HR Practices Around the Globe Job Evaluation Methods Compensable Factors Preparing for the Job Evaluation Job Evaluation Methods: Ranking Job Evaluation Methods: Job Classification Job Evaluation Methods: Point Method Computerized Job Evaluations How to Create A Market-Competitive Pay Plan Choose Benchmark Jobs Select Compensable Factors Assign Weights to Compensable Factors Convert Percentages to Points for Each Factor Define Each Factor’s Degrees Determine for Each Factor Its Factor Degrees’ Points Review Job Descriptions and Job Specifications Evaluate the Jobs Draw the Current (Internal) Wage Curve Conduct a Market Analysis: Salary Surveys Draw the Market (External) Wage Curve Compare and Adjust Current and Market Wage Rates for Jobs Develop Pay Grades Establish Rate Ranges Address Remaining Jobs Correct Out-of-Line Rates Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses ..

Chapter 11: Establishing Strategic Pay Plans

11-2

Pricing Managerial and Professional Jobs What Determines Executive Pay? Compensating Executives Compensating Professional Employees Improving Performance Through HRIS: Payroll Administration Contemporary Topics in Compensation Competency-Based Pay Broadbanding Comparable Worth Diversity Counts: The Pay Gap Board Oversight of Executive Pay Employee Engagement Guide For Managers Total Rewards Programs Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media Total Rewards and Employee Engagement Chapter Review

Where Are We Now… The main purpose of this chapter is to show you how to establish a pay plan. The main topics we cover are basic factors in determining pay rates; job evaluation methods; how to create a marketcompetitive pay plan; pricing managerial and professional jobs; contemporary topics in compensation; and total rewards for employee engagement.

Interesting Issues: In the grocery business, when Walmart opens a store, the other stores’ usual reaction is to cut costs, particularly wages and benefits. So as Wegmans Food Markets, Inc., adds more stores and increasingly competes with Walmart, its management needs to decide this: Should we cut pay to better compete based on cost, or pursue a different compensation policy? We’ll see how Wegmans boosted profits by raising pay.

Learning Objectives: 11-1.

11-2.

11-3.

11-4.

11-5.

11-6.

List the basic factors determining pay rates.

Define and give an example of how to conduct a job evaluation.

Explain in detail how to establish a market-competitive pay plan.

Explain how to price managerial and professional jobs.

Explain the difference between competency-based and traditional pay plans.

Describe the importance of total rewards for improving employee engagement.

Annotated Outline:

..

Chapter 11: Establishing Strategic Pay Plans

11-3

I. Basic Factors in Determining Pay Rates – employee compensation refers to all forms of pay or rewards going to employees, which include direct financial payments and indirect payments. Direct financial payments include wages, salaries, incentives, commissions, and bonuses. Indirect payments include financial benefits like employer-paid insurance and vacations.

A. Aligning Total Rewards with Strategy – the compensation plan should first advance the firm’s strategic aims – management should produce an aligned reward strategy.

This means creating a compensation package that produces the employee behaviors the firm needs to achieve its competitive strategy.

B. Equity and Its Impact on Pay Rates – the equity theory of motivation postulates that people are motivated to maintain a balance between what they perceive as their contributions and their rewards. External and internal equity are crucial in pay rates. External equity refers to how pay compares with rates in other organizations. Internal equity refers to employees viewing their pay as equitable given other pay rates in the organization.

Individual equity refers to the fairness of an individual’s pay as compared with what his/her coworkers are earning for the same or very similar jobs in the company. Last, procedural equity refers to the perceived fairness of the processes and procedures used to make decisions regarding the allocation of pay.

C. Legal Considerations in Compensation – there are many laws that govern compensation. For example, the Fair Labor Standards Act (FLSA) regulates the minimum wage and requires that overtime be paid at a rate of one and one half times the normal rate of pay for hours worked over 40 in a workweek. Employees are categorized as exempt from the act or nonexempt from its provisions. Other compensation laws include Davis-Bacon Act, Walsh-Healey Public Contract Act, and Title VII of the 1964 Civil Rights Act. D. Know Your Employment Law – The Workday – employers need to be vigilant about employees who arrive early or leave late, lest the extra time spent on the employer’s property obligate the employer to compensate the employee for that time.

E. Know Your Employment Law – The Independent Contractor F. HR and the Gig Economy: Are Gig Workers Employees or Independent Contractors G. Union Influences on Compensation Decisions – union and labor relations laws also influence pay plan design. The National Labor Relations Act of 1935 (Wagner Act) granted employees the right to unionize and to bargain collectively. Also, the Wagner Act was created by the National Labor Relations Board (NLRB) to oversee employer practices and ensure that employees receive their rights.

H. Pay Policies – Employers need policies on a variety of compensation-related matters.

These would include, for instance, how to set base salary (below, at, or above market rates); what employees can get stock options; how to award salary increases; how to handle leaves for military service, jury duty, and holidays; and whether to emphasize seniority or performance through annual raises.

..

Chapter 11: Establishing Strategic Pay Plans

I. Improving Performance: The Strategic Context J. Improving Performance: HR Practices Around the Globe II. Job Evaluation Methods – is a formal and systematic comparision of jobs to determine the work of one job relative to another. The aim is to determine a job’s relative worth and eventually establish a wage or salary structure. The basic principle of job evaluation is this: jobs that require greater qualifications, more responsibilities, and more complex job duties should receive more pay than jobs with lesser requirements.

A. Compensable Factors – factors that jobs have in common can be used to establish how the jobs compare to one another. The fundamental, compensable element of a job, such as skills, effort, responsibility, and working conditions.

B. Preparing for the Job Evaluation – job evaluation is a judgmental process and demands close cooperation among supervisors, HR specialists, employees, and union representatives. The main steps include identifying the need for the job evaluation, getting cooperation, and then choosing an evaluation committee. The committee then performs the actual evaluation which consists of three main functions: 1) identifying 10 to 15 key benchmark jobs, 2) selecting compensable factors, and 3) evaluating the worth.

C. Job Evaluation Methods: Ranking – the simplest job evaluation method ranks each job relative to all other jobs, usually based on some overall factor like “job difficulty.” There are several steps in the job ranking method: obtain job information, select and group jobs, select compensable factors, rank jobs, combine ratings, compare current pay with what others are paying based on salary survey, and assign a new pay scale.

D. Job Evaluation Methods: Job Classification – this is a simple, widely used method in which raters categorize jobs into groups; all the jobs in each group are of roughly the same value for pay purposes. The groups are called classes if they contain similar jobs or grades if they contain jobs that are similar in difficulty but otherwise different. Also known as job grading.

E. Job Evaluation Methods: Point Method – it involves identifying several compensable factors for the jobs, as well as the degree to which each factor is present in each job. Assume there are five degrees of the compensable factor “responsibility” a job could contain. Further, assume you assign a different number of points to each degree of each compensable factor. Once the evaluation committee determines the degree to which each compensable factor (like “responsibility” and “effort”) is present in the job, the committee can calculate a total point value for the job by adding up the corresponding points for each factor. The result is a quantitative point rating for each job.

F. Computerized Job Evaluations – using quantitative job evaluation methods such as the point method can be time-consuming. Computer-aided job

..

11-4

Chapter 11: Establishing Strategic Pay Plans

11-5

evaluation streamlines this process. Most computerized systems have two main components: structured questionnaires and statistical models. These elements allow the computer program to price jobs more or less automatically by assigning points.

III. How to Create a Market-Competitive Pay Plan A. Choose Benchmark Jobs – these are representative of the entire range of jobs the organization needs to evaluate.

B. Select Compensable Factors – the choice of compensable factors depends on tradition (as noted, the Equal Pay Act of 1963 uses four compensable factors − skill, effort, responsibility, and working conditions) and on strategic and practical considerations. The employer should carefully define each factor to ensure that the evaluation committee members apply the factors with consistency.

C. Assign Weights to Compensable Factors – this determines the relative amount of each compensable factor the job contains. Assume there is a total of 100 percentage points for each job that needs to be allocated among those compensable factors selected.

D. Convert Percentages to Points for Each Factor – using the provided formula, percentages weights assigned to each compensable factor are converted to point values for each factor.

E. Define Each Factor’s Degrees – next, define each of several degrees for each factor so that raters may judge the amount or degree of a factor existing in a job. The number of degrees usually does not exceed five or six, and the actual number depends mostly on judgment.

F. Determine for Each Factor Its Factor Degrees’ Points – the evaluation committee must be able to determine the number of points each job contains. To do this, the committee must be able to examine each job and (from the degree definitions) determine what degree of each compensable factor that job has. The committee then needs to know how many points each degree of each compensable factor is worth. To do this, we must first assign points to each degree of each compensable factor.

G. Review Job Descriptions and Job Specifications – the heart of job evaluation involves determining the amount or degree to which the job contains the selected compensable factors such as skill, effort, responsibility, and working conditions. Those conducting the job evaluation will frequently do so by reviewing each job’s job description and job specification.

H. Evaluate the Jobs – the committee determines the degree to which each compensable factor is present in each job. Knowing the skill, effort, responsibility, and conditions degrees for each job, and knowing the number of points we previously assigned to each degree of each compensable factor, we can now determine how many skill, effort, responsibility, and conditions points each benchmark job should contain. Finally, we can then add up these degree points to get a total point value for each benchmark job.

..

Chapter 11: Establishing Strategic Pay Plans

11-6

I. Draw the Current (Internal) Wage Curve – plotting each job’s points and wage rate produces a scatter plot. A wage curve can be drawn through these plots to show how point values relate to current wage rates.

J. Conduct a Market Analysis: Salary Surveys – virtually all employers conduct at least an informal telephone, newspaper, or Internet salary survey to price benchmark jobs and benefits.

1. Commercial, Professional, and Government Salary Surveys – many employers use surveys published by consulting firms, professional associations, or government agencies. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) annually conducts area wage surveys, industry wage surveys, and professional, administrative, technical, and clerical (PATC) surveys for the National Compensation Survey.

2. Using the Internet to Do Compensation Surveys – a rapidly expanding array of Internet-based options makes it fairly easy for anyone to access published compensation survey information.

K. Draw the Market (External) Wage Curve – the current (internal) wage curve does not reveal whether our pay rates are too high, or too low, or just right, relative to what other firms are paying. For this, we need to draw a market or external wage curve. The market/external wage curve compares our jobs’ points with market pay rates for these jobs.

L. Compare and Adjust Current and Market Wage Rates for Jobs – next, combine both the current/internal and market/external wage curves on one graph. The market wage curve might be higher than our current wage curve or below our current wage curve. Based on comparing the current/internal wage curve and market/external wage curve, the company must decide whether to adjust the current pay rates for our jobs, and if so how.

M. Developing Pay Grades – the committee will probably group similar jobs into grades for pay purposes, instead of having to deal with hundreds of pay rates. A pay (or wage) grade is comprised of jobs of approximately equal difficulty or importance as determined by job evaluation.

N. Establish Rate Ranges – most employers develop vertical pay (rate) ranges for each horizontal pay grade. These pay ranges may appear as vertical boxes within each grade, showing minimum, maximum, and midpoint pay rates for that pay grade. You may depict the pay ranges as steps or levels, with specific corresponding pay rates for each step within each pay grade.

O. Address Remaining Jobs – once the job evaluation of the benchmark jobs is complete, the remaining jobs must be added either through a formal process (like the one described for benchmark jobs) or informally, where the company feels they fit.

P. Correcting Out-of-Line Rates – the wage rate for a job may fall well off the wage line or well outside the rate range for its grade. Which means that, the average pay for the job is currently too high or too low, relative to other jobs in the firm. If the point falls well below the line, a pay raise for the job may be required. If the point falls well above the wage line, a pay cut or freeze may be required.

Q. Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses

..

Chapter 11: Establishing Strategic Pay Plans

11-7

IV. Pricing Managerial and Professional Jobs A. What Determines Executive Pay? – one study concluded that three main factors account for about two-thirds of executive compensation variance: job complexity (span of control, the number of functional divisions over which the executive has direct responsibility, and management level), the ability to pay (total profit and rate of return), and the executive’s human capital (educational level, field of study, work experience).

B. Compensating Executives – basic compensation elements for top executives include: base pay, short-term incentives, long-term incentives, and executive benefits and perks. Shareholder activism has tightened the restrictions on what companies pay top executives.

C. Compensating Professional Employees – employers must first ensure that the person is actually a “professional” under the law. The Fair Labor Standards Act “provides a professional has to earn at least $455 per week, and the person’s main duties must “be the performance of work requiring advanced knowledge” and “the advanced knowledge must be customarily acquired by a prolonged course of specialized intellectual instruction.”

D. Improving Performance through HRIS: Payroll Administration – is one of the first functions most employers computerize or outsource, and for good reason. Administering the payroll system – keeping track of each employee’s worker status, wage rate, dependents, benefits, overtime, tax status, and so on; computing each paycheck; and then directing the actual printing of checks or direct deposits is a time-consuming task, one complicated by the need to comply with many federal, state, and local wage, hour, and other laws.

V. Contemporary Topics in Compensation A. Competency-Based Pay 1. What Is Competency-Based Pay? – the company pays for the employee’s range, depth, and types of skills and knowledge, rather than for the job title he or she holds. With more companies organizing around teams, you want to encourage employees to get and to use the skills required to rotate among jobs.

2. Competencies are demonstrable personal characteristics such as knowledge, skills, and personal behaviors such as leadership. Why pay employees based on the skill levels they achieve, rather than based on the jobs they’re assigned to? Because, for example, a company that organizes a facility around teams may want to encourage employees to get and to use the skills required to rotate among jobs.

As an employee achieves, and is tested on each level of each skill, he or she would receive a bump in pay.

B. Broadbanding – this method involves collapsing salary grades and ranges into just a few wide levels or bands. Instead of 10 salary grades, the firm might collapse into three broadbands. You can move an employee from job to job within the broadband, without the employee’s moving outside the rate range associated with a traditional pay grade. This makes it easier to train someone on a higher level

..

Chapter 11: Establishing Strategic Pay Plans

11-8

job, or to have him or her fill in on a lower level job without worrying about pay levels.

C. Comparable Worth – refers to the requirement to pay men and women equal wages for jobs that are dissimilar but of comparable value (for instance measured in points) to the employer. The Gunther Supreme Court Case involved Washington County, Oregon prison matrons who claimed sex discrimination. Washington County finally agreed to pay 35,000 employees in female-dominated jobs almost $500 million in pay raises over 7 years to settle the suit.

D. Diversity Counts: The Pay Gap – although the gap is narrowing a bit, women still earn only about 81% as much as men. Education may reduce the wage gap.

E. Board Oversight of Executive Pay – boards are clamping down on executive pay. The Sarbanes-Oxley Act makes executives personally liable for lapses in corporate financial oversight.

As of 2018, public corporations in the United States must compute the ratio of CEO to median company employee pay. The net result is that lawyers specializing in executive pay suggest that boards of directors ask themselves these questions:  Has our compensation committee identified its duties and processes?  Is our compensation committee using the appropriate compensation advisors?  Are there particular executive compensation issues that our committee should address?  Do our procedures demonstrate diligence and independence (including careful deliberations and records)?  Is our committee appropriately communicating its decisions? How will shareholders react?

VI. Employee Engagement Guide For Managers A. Total Rewards Programs – total rewards encompass the traditional financial compensation components. However, they also include personal and professional growth opportunities and a motivating work environment.

B. Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media C. Total Rewards and Employee Engagement – when it comes to employee engagement, both material and nonmaterial rewards—total rewards—seem essential.

Chapter Review Chapter Section Summaries: 11-1. In establishing strategic pay plans, managers first need to understand some basic factors in determining pay rates.

11-2. Employers use two basic approaches to setting pay rates: market-based approaches and job evaluation methods.

..

Chapter 11: Establishing Strategic Pay Plans

11-9

11-3. We said the process of creating a market-competitive pay plan while ensuring external, internal, and procedural equity consist of 16 steps.

11-4. Pricing managerial and professional jobs involves some special issues.

11-5. We addressed five important special topics in compensation.

11-6. Research shows that if employee engagement is the aim, it makes sense to emphasize total rewards, not just financial rewards.

Discussion Questions: 11-1. What is the difference between exempt and nonexempt jobs?

Students’ responses will vary. Specific categories of employees are exempt from the FLSA (Fair Labor Standards Act) or certain provisions of the act, and particularly from the act’s overtime provisions. They are “exempt employees.” A person’s exemption depends on his or her responsibilities, duties, and salary. Bona fide executive, administrative (like office managers), and professional employees (like architects) are generally exempt from the minimum wage and overtime requirements of the act. A whitecollar worker earning more than $100,000 and performing any one exempt administrative, executive, or professional duty is automatically ineligible for overtime pay. Other employees can generally earn up to $23,660 per year and still automatically get overtime pay (so most employees earning less than $455 per week are nonexempt and earn overtime). Figure 11-1 lists some examples of typically exempt and nonexempt jobs.

11-2. Should the job evaluation depend on an appraisal of the jobholder’s performance?

Why? Why not?

No. Job evaluation involves comparing jobs to one another based on their content.

Individual performance is covered under performance evaluation and does not affect the content of the job.

11-3. What is the relationship between compensable factors and job specifications?

Compensable factors include skill, effort, responsibility, working conditions, problem solving, know-how, accountability, and the like. Many of these factors are obtainable from job specifications that are part of the job analysis.

11-4. Define and give an example of how to conduct a job evaluation.

Students’ responses will vary. Job evaluation methods involve assigning values to each of the company’s jobs. This helps to produce a pay plan in which each job’s pay is equitable based on its value to the employer. Popular job evaluation methods include ranking, job classification, and the point method. Students can share their examples of job evaluations using different methods.

11-5. The average pay for most university presidents is around $300,000 per year, but many earn much more. For example, the president of NYU received about $1 million ..

Chapter 11: Establishing Strategic Pay Plans

11-10

in 1 year. Discuss why you would (or would not) pay university presidents as much or more than many corporate CEOs. Students’ answers will vary but should use the information found in the text to explain and defend their answers.

11-6. Do small companies need to develop a pay plan? Why or why not?

Yes, small companies need to develop a pay plan. Students should use information learned in the chapter to justify their responses.

11-7. After Walmart raised its minimum starting pay to $10 an hour, some longer-term employees (like one earning $12 per hour) complained that the strictly entry-level increase was unfair to them. And when the head of a company called Gravity Payments decided to pay all his employees at least $70,000 a year, some longertenure employees complained that it was unfair to raise new peoples’ salaries and not theirs. How should Walmart and Gravity address these complaints?

Students’ answers will vary but should use the information found in the text to explain and defend their answers.

Individual and Group Activities: 11-8. Working individually or in groups, conduct salary surveys for the following positions: entry-level accountant and entry-level chemical engineer. What sources did you use, and what conclusions did you reach? If you were the HR manager for a local engineering firm, what would you recommend that you pay for each job?

Students should be expected to use several of the resources indicated in the chapter for gathering this information. Results should be checked for bias or contamination such as only surveying the largest firms in the area, or the unwillingness of some firms to provide this information. Student recommendations should be based on sound logic and conclusions from the data they collect.

11-9. Working individually or in groups, develop compensation policies for the teller position at a local bank. Assume that there are four tellers: two were hired in May and the other two were hired in December. The compensation policies should address the following: appraisals, raises, holidays, vacation pay, overtime pay, method of pay, garnishments, and time cards.

Students’ answers will vary but look for responses to incorporate material from the chapter.

11-10. Working individually or in groups, access relevant Web sites to determine what equitable pay ranges are for these jobs: chemical engineer, marketing manager, and

..

Chapter 11: Establishing Strategic Pay Plans

11-11

HR manager, all with a bachelor’s degree and 5 years’ experience. Do so for the following cities: New York, New York; San Francisco, California; Houston, Texas; Denver, Colorado; Miami, Florida; Atlanta, Georgia; Chicago, Illinois; Birmingham, Alabama; Detroit, Michigan; and Washington, D.C. For each position in each city, what are the pay ranges and the average pay? Does geographical location impact the salaries of the different positions? If so, how?

The students should use resources and Internet sites discussed in the chapter to determine the pay ranges and average pay in each city.

11-11. Appendices A and B at the end of this book list the knowledge someone studying for the HRCI (Appendix A) or SHRM (Appendix B) certification exam needs to have in each area of human resource management (such as in Strategic Management and Workforce Planning). In groups of several students, do four things: (1) review Appendix A and/or B; (2) identify the material in this chapter that relates to the Appendix A and/or B required knowledge lists; (3) write four multiple-choice exam questions on this material that you believe would be suitable for inclusion in the HRCI exam and/or the SHRM exam; and (4) if time permits, have someone from your team post your team’s questions in front of the class, so that students in all teams can answer the exam questions created by the other teams.

Material from this chapter that relates to the test would include: determining pay rates, corporate policies and competitive strategy, equity and its impact on pay rates, the salary survey, job evaluation, pay grades, wage curves, fine-tuning pay rates, compensating managers, compensating professional employees, competency-based pay, strategic compensation, and comparable worth. Virtually everything in this chapter applies. Look for questions that have more than one plausible answer.

11-12. Working individually or in groups, use the point system described in steps 1 to 16 in this chapter. Do so for a job description that you find online—the list like that at http://hiring.monster.com/hr/hr-best-practices/recruiting-hiring-advice/ jobdescriptions/sample-job-descriptions.aspx is useful. To simplify things, assume there is only one compensable factor you have to use, and that it is job complexity, so that you can use Figure 11-5.

Students’ answers will vary.

11-13. How do you think politicians in the United States should address the problem of income inequality?

Students’ answers will vary but look for responses to incorporate material from the chapter.

Experiential Exercises: Ranking the College’s Administrators

..

Chapter 11: Establishing Strategic Pay Plans

11-12

Purpose: The purpose of this exercise is to give you experience in performing a job evaluation using the ranking method.

Required Understanding: You should be thoroughly familiar with the ranking method of job evaluation and obtain job descriptions for your college’s dean, department chairperson, director of admissions, library director, registrar, and your professor.

How to Set up the Exercise/Instructions: Divide the class into groups of four or five students.

The groups will perform a job evaluation of the positions of dean, department chairperson, and professor using the ranking method.

Perform a job evaluation by ranking the jobs. You may use one or more compensable factors.

11-14. If time permits, a spokesperson from each group can put his or her group’s rankings on the board. Did the groups end up with about the same results? How did they differ? Why do you think they differed?

A spokesperson from each group can put the group’s rankings on the board. Students can compare rankings and discuss their conclusions.

Application Case: Salary Inequities at AstraZeneca 11-15. Although the case with OFCCP is closed, we wonder if there are any less discriminatory explanations possible for why our women sales reps on average earned less than men. If so, what are they?

Students’ answers will vary. Some responses may include: hours worked, sales closed, education, or KSA’s.

11-16. Our own company now uses a point method to evaluate jobs for pay purposes, and each resulting job class also has a rate range associated with it. Sales associates are now paid a salary that is not based on incentive pay. List three specific things we can do to ensure that a similar problem (inequitable pay based on gender) does not arise again, assuming they continue using the point plan.   

Make sure that job analysis is completed and tasks that are not needed to do the job, are not listed as part of the job requirements.

Make sure that bias is left out of the selection process.

Provide training on diversity in the work place to recruiters, and selection or hiring managers.

11-17. What sort of compensation plan would you recommend for us, and why?

Students’ answers will vary depending on which type of compensation plan they choose.

..

Chapter 11: Establishing Strategic Pay Plans

11-13

Continuing Case: Carter Cleaning Company – The New Pay Plan 11-18. Is the company at the point where it should be setting up a formal salary structure based on a complete job evaluation? Why? Yes, the company should set up a formal salary structure complete with job evaluations.

The students should reference points in the chapter to justify their responses.

11-19. Is Jack Carter’s policy of paying 10% more than the prevailing rates a sound one, and how could that be determined?

The students should use their judgment based on information presented in the chapter in giving their responses.

11-20. Similarly, is Carter’s male–female differential wise? If not, why not?

The salesperson’s male-female differential is not wise. The students should reference the Equal Pay Act of 1963 when providing their rationale.

11-21. Specifically, what would you suggest Jennifer do now with respect to her company’s pay plan?

There are many things that students could reasonably suggest – among them: eliminate the gender pay differential, establish performance or competency-based pay, and establish a formal pay structure.

Hotel Paris: Improving Performance at the Hotel Paris – The New Compensation Plan 11-22. Lisa knew little about setting up a new compensation plan. Based on what you learned in Dessler Human Resource Management, what would you tell her if she asked, “How do I set up a new compensation plan for the Hotel Paris?”

Students’ answers will vary widely. Look for examples with good tie-ins between policies, behaviors, and proposed outcomes.

11-23. Would you suggest that Hotel Paris implement a competency-based pay plan for its nonmanagerial staff? Why or why not? Outline what they need to do for one.

The current plan is not linked to Hotel Paris’ strategic goals, and the link between pay and performance is weak and sometimes counterproductive. Competency-based pay would enable management to reward employees for exhibiting the skills Hotel Paris values.

..

Chapter 11: Establishing Strategic Pay Plans

11-14

11-24. Devise a ranking job evaluation system for the Hotel Paris’s nonmanagerial employees (housekeepers, valets, front-desk clerks, phone operators, waitstaff, groundskeepers, and security guards) and use it to show the worth of these jobs relative to one another.

Students’ answers will vary. It is important to discuss how frequently each job interacts with the customer, what competencies are needed in each position, how students believe these jobs are paid in the local market, and whether assumptions are appropriate in light of what Hotel Paris is trying to do strategically.

Key Terms: Employee Compensation – All forms of pay or rewards going to employees and arising from their employment.

Direct Financial Payments – Pay in the form of wages, salaries, incentives, commissions, and bonuses.

Indirect Financial Payments – Pay in the form of financial benefits, such as insurance.

Davis-Bacon Act (1931) – A law passed in 1931 that sets wage rates for laborers employed by contractors working for the federal government.

Walsh-Healey Public Contract Act (1936) – A law that requires minimum wage and working conditions for employees working on any government contract amounting to more than $10,000.

Title VII of the 1964 Civil Rights Act – This act makes it unlawful for employers to discriminate against any individual with respect to hiring, compensation, terms, conditions, or privileges of employment because of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin.

Fair Labor Standards Act (1938) – This act provides for minimum wages, maximum hours, overtime pay, and child labor protection. The law has been amended many times and covers most employees.

Equal Pay Act – A 1963 amendment to the Fair Labor Standards Act designed to require equal pay for women doing the same work as men.

Employee Retirement Income Security Act (ERISA) – The 1974 law that provides government protection of pensions for all employees with company pension plans. It also regulates vesting rights (employees who leave before retirement may claim compensation from the pension plan).

Job Evaluation – A systematic comparison done in order to determine the worth of one job relative to another.

..

Chapter 11: Establishing Strategic Pay Plans

11-15

Market-Competitive Pay Plan – Pay plan where pay rates are equitable both internally (based on each job’s relative value) and externally (in other words when compared with what other employers are paying).

Compensable Factor – A fundamental, compensable element of a job, such as skills, effort, responsibility, and working conditions.

Benchmark Job – A job that is used to anchor the employer's pay scale and around which other jobs are arranged in order of relative worth.

Ranking Method – The simplest method of job evaluation that involves ranking each job relative to all other jobs, usually based on overall difficulty.

Job Classification (or job grading) – A method for categorizing jobs into groups.

Classes – Grouping jobs based on a set of rules for each group or class, such as amount of independent judgment, skill, physical effort, and so forth, required. Classes usually contain similar jobs.

Grades – A job classification system like the class system, although grades often contain dissimilar jobs, such as secretaries, mechanics, and firefighters. Grade descriptions are written based on compensable factors listed in classification systems.

Grade Definition – Written descriptions of the level of, say, responsibility and knowledge required by jobs in each grade. Similar jobs can then be combined into grades or classes.

Point Method – The job evaluation method in which a number of compensable factors are identified and then the degree to which each of these factors is present on the job is determined.

Market-Competitive Pay System – A pay system in which the employer’s actual pay rates are competitive with those in the relevant labor market.

Wage Curve – Shows the relationship between the value of the job and the average wage paid for this job.

Salary Survey – A survey aimed at determining prevailing wage rates. A good salary survey provides specific wage rates for specific jobs. Formal written questionnaire surveys are the most comprehensive, but telephone surveys and newspaper ads are also sources of information.

Pay (or wage) Grade – A pay grade is comprised of jobs of approximately equal difficulty.

Pay (or rate) Ranges – A series of steps or levels within a pay grade, usually based upon years of service.

Compa Ratio – Equals an employee’s pay rate divided by the pay range midpoint for his or her pay grade.

..

Chapter 11: Establishing Strategic Pay Plans

11-16

Competency-Based Pay – Where the company pays for the employee’s range, depth, and types of skills and knowledge, rather than for the job title he or she holds.

Broadbanding – Consolidating salary grades and ranges into just a few levels or “bands,” each of which contains a relatively wide range of jobs and salary levels.

Comparable Worth – The concept by which women who are usually paid less than men, can claim that men in comparable rather than strictly equal jobs, are paid more.

..

Part Four Compensation Chapter 12 Pay for Performance and Financial Incentives Lecture Outline: Money’s Role in Motivation Incentive Pay Terminology Linking Strategy, Performance, and Incentive Pay Motivation and Incentives Demotivators and Edward Deci Expectancy theory and Victor Vroom Behavior Modification/Reinforcement and B.F. Skinner Know Your Employment Law Individual Employee Incentive and Recognition Programs Piecework Advantages and Disadvantages Merit Pay as an Incentive Merit Pay Options Incentives for Professional Employees Nonfinancial and Recognition-Based Awards Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses HR and the Gig Economy: Recognition, Nonfinancial Rewards, and Gig Workers Job Design Improving Performance: The Strategic Context Incentives for Salespeople Salary Plan Commission Plan Combination Plan Maximizing Sales Results Enterprise Incentive Management Sales Incentives in Action Incentives for Managers and Executives Strategy and the Executive’s Long-Term and Total Rewards Package Sarbanes-Oxley Short-Term Incentives and the Annual Bonus Eligibility Fund Size The Individual Awards Long Term Incentives Stock Options ..

Chapter 12: Pay for Performance and Financial Incentives

12- 2

Improving Performance: HR Practices Around the Globe Other Stock Plans Potential Problems Ethics and Incentives Some Other Executive Incentives Team and Organization-Wide Incentive Plans How to Design Team Incentives Evidence-Based HR: Inequities That Undercut Team Incentives Profit-Sharing Plans Scanlon Plans Other Gainsharing Plans At-Risk Pay Plans Employee Stock Ownership Plans Broad-Based Stock Options Incentive Plans in Practice: Nucor Employee Engagement Guide for Managers Incentives and Engagement Chapter Review

Where Are We Now...

The main purpose of this chapter is to explain how managers use incentives to motivate employees. The main topics we’ll discuss are money’s role in motivation, individual employee incentive and recognition programs, incentives for salespeople, incentives for managers and executives, team and organization-wide incentive plans and incentives, and employee engagement.

Interesting Issues: The owners of a 21-store fast-food franchise in the Midwest knew that their stores’ performance and profits depended on their employees’ performance. They hoped a new employee incentive program could boost their employees’ and their stores’ performance. We’ll see that they did.

Learning Objectives: 12-1.

12-2.

12-3.

12-4.

12-5.

12-6.

Explain how you would apply four motivation theories in formulating an incentive plan.

Discuss the main incentives for individual employees.

Discuss the pros and cons of commissions versus straight pay for salespeople.

Describe the main incentives for managers and executives.

Name and describe the most popular organization-wide incentive plans.

Explain how to use incentives to improve employee engagement.

..

Chapter 12: Pay for Performance and Financial Incentives

Annotated Outline: I.

Money’s Role in Motivation – Frederick Taylor made three contributions in the late 1800s: He saw the need for 1) formulating a “fair day’s work,” namely precise output standards for each job, 2) the scientific management movement, which emphasized improvement of work through observation and analysis, and 3) using incentives pay to reward employees who produce over standards.

A. Incentive Pay Terminology – often managers use two terms synonymously with incentative plans: Pay-for-performance and Variable pay. They both tie the employee’s pay to the employee’s performance. Variable pay is more specific; it is usually an incentive plan that ties pay to some measure of the firm’s overall profitbaility.

B. Linking Strategy, Performance, and Incentive Pay – compensation experts argue that managers should understand the motivational bases of incentive plans when tying workers’ pay to their performance.

C. Motivation and Incentives – the law of individual differences means that people differ in personality, abilities, values, and needs. They therefore react to different incentives in different ways. Several theorists have contributed relevance to designing incentive plans.

1. Motivators and Frederick Herzberg – hygiene-motivator theory divides needs into two factors. Hygiene factors include such things as working conditions, salary, and incentives.

Motivators factors include those factors that make the job more intrinsically motivating, like challenge, feedback, and recognition.

2. Demotivators and Edward Deci – Deci found that extrinsic rewards could at times actually detract from a person’s intrinsic motivation.

3. Expectancy Theory and Victor Vroom – the theory suggests that a person’s motivation to exert some level of effort is a function of three things: the person’s expectancy (in terms of probability) that his or her effort will lead to performance; instrumentality, or the perceived connection (if any) between successful performance and actually obtaining the rewards; and valence, which represents the perceived value the person attaches to the reward.

4. Behavior Modification/Reinforcement and B. F. Skinner – Psychologist B.F. Skinner proposed that to understand behavior, one must understand the consequences of that behavior. Behavior modification means changing behavior through rewards or punishments that are contingent upon performance.

D. Know Your Employment Law

..

12- 3

Chapter 12: Pay for Performance and Financial Incentives II.

12- 4

Individual Employee Incentive and Recognition Programs A. Piecework – piecework involves paying the worker a sum (piece rate) for each unit he/she produces. Straight piecework entails a strict proportionality between results and rewards regardless of output. With a standard hour plan, the worker gets a premium equal to the percent by which his/her performance exceeds the standard.

1. Advantages and Disadvantages. Piecework incentive plans have advantages. They are simple to calculate and easily understood by employees. Piecework plans appear equitable, and their incentive value is powerful since they tie pay directly to performance. Piecework also has disadvantages. One is that employers’ raise production standards when workers earn “excessive” wages. Also, piece rates are quoted on a per piece basis, and in worker’s minds the production standard becomes tied to what they earn. Piecework plans can thus engender rigidity.

B. Merit Pay as an Incentive – merit pay or a merit raise is any salary increase the firm awards to an employee based on his/her individual performance. It is different from a bonus in that it usually becomes part of the employee’s base salary, whereas a bonus is a one-time payment.

1. Merit Pay Options. Two merit pay adaptations are popular. One awards merit raises in a lump sum once a year. The other adaptation ties merit awards to both individual and organizational performance.

C. Incentives for Professional Employees – professional employees are those whose work involves the application of learned knowledge to the solution of the employer’s problems, such as lawyers, doctors, economists, and engineers.

Making incentive pay decisions for professional employees can be challenging because such employees are usually paid well anyway. Dual-career ladders are another way to manage professionals’ pay.

D. Nonfinancial and Recognition-Based Awards – recognition programs usually refer to formal programs, such as employee-of-the-month programs. Social recognition programs are more informal manager-employee exchanges, including praise and approval. Performance feedback is similar but provides quantitative or qualitative information on performance in order to change the performance or maintain it. Most employers combine both financial and nonfinancial incentives to motivate employees.

E. Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media – there are many reasons to use Internet sites to manage awards programs. The sites can offer a much broader range of products than most employers could catalog and offer by themselves.

And perhaps most importantly, the whole process is expedited, so it’s much easier to bestow and deliver the awards.

F. Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses 1. Make sure the employee has a doable goal and that he or she agrees with it.

2. Recognizing an employee’s contribution is a powerful motivation tool.

3. Use social recognition apps for positive reinforcement.

G. HR and the Gig Economy: Recognition, Nonfinancial Rewards, and Gig Workers

..

Chapter 12: Pay for Performance and Financial Incentives

12- 5

1. Provide Meaning and Structure 2. Create a Sense of Belonging and Connection 3. Value and Respect Your Workforce Job Design – research has shown that job design is a primary driver of employee engagement.

H. Improving Performance: The Strategic Context III.

Incentives for Salespeople A. Salary Plan – fixed salaries are offered by some firms. Straight salary makes it simple to switch territories or to reassign salespeople, and it can foster loyalty among the sales staff. A disadvantage is that it can constrict sales and demotivate potentially high-performing salespeople.

B. Commission Plan – salespeople are paid for results, and only for results; thus, such plans tend to attract high-performing salespeople who see that effort clearly leads to rewards. But, it may cause them to neglect non-selling duties like servicing small accounts, cultivating dedicated customers, and pushing hard-to-sell items.

C. Combination Plan – most companies pay salespeople a combination of salary and commissions, usually with a sizable salary component. Combination plans give salespeople a floor to their earnings and still provide an incentive for superior performance. But, they can become complicated, and misunderstandings can result.

D. Maximizing Sales Results – setting effective quotas is an art. In today’s fastchanging business scene, sales quotas must become more flexible than they have been in the past. There is a tendency to set commission rates informally, without considering how much each sale must contribute to covering expenses.

1. Enterprise Incentive Management. Many employers use Enterprise Incentive Management (EIM) software to track and control sales commissions.

E. Sales Incentives in Action – car salespersons’ compensation ranges from 100% commission to a small base salary with commission accounting for most of the total compensation. This approach encourages the salesperson to hold firm on the retail price, and to push “after sale products” like floor mats and side moldings. There may also be extra incentives to sell packages such as rustproofing. Commission plans like these still dominate, but not as much.

Many dealerships are substituting salary plus bonus plans for commissions.

This reflects the growing emphasis on “one price no hassle” pricing.

IV. Incentives for Managers and Executives A. Strategy and the Executive’s Long-Term and Total Rewards Package – few HR practices have as profound or obvious an impact on strategic success as the company’s long-term incentives. In creating the compensation package, you should: 1) define the strategic context for the executive compensation program, including the internal and external issues that face the company, and the firm’s business objectives; 2) shape each component of the executive compensation package based on your strategic aims, and then group the components into a

..

Chapter 12: Pay for Performance and Financial Incentives

12- 6

balanced plan that makes sense in terms of these aims; 3) create a stock option plan that gives the executive compensation package the special character it needs to meet the unique needs of the executives, the company, and the firm’s strategy; 4) using multiple, strategy-based performance criteria for incentivizing executives is best: financial performance, number of strategic goals met, employee productivity measures, customer satisfaction surveys, and employee morale surveys; and 5) the performance standards should include a combination of market benchmarks (such as performance against competitors) as well as business performance standards (such as earnings per share growth).

1. Sarbanes-Oxley – the law affects how employers formulate their executive incentive programs and injects a higher level of responsibility into executives’ and board members’ decisions.

B. Short-Term Incentives and The Annual Bonus – is aimed at motivating the short-term performance of managers and executives.

1. Eligibility usually includes both top and lower-level managers.

2. Fund size refers to the total amount of bonus money the firm makes available. A nondeductible formula is where employers use a straight percentage (usually of the company’s net income) to create the short-term incentive fund. A deductible formula assumes that the fund should start to accumulate only after the firm has met a specified level of earnings.

3. The Individual Awards – typically, a target bonus (as well as maximum amount) is set for each eligible position, and the actual award reflects the person’s performance. Many firms end up tying short-term bonuses to both organizational and individual performance. Perhaps the simplest method is the split-award plan.

4. Long-term incentives – employers use long-term incentives to inject a long-term perspective into their executives’ decisions. Popular long-term incentives include cash, stock options, stock, stock appreciation rights, and phantom stock.

5. Stock Options – these account for over half of executives’ compensation.

A stock option is the right to purchase a specific number of shares of company stock at a specific price during a specific period of time; the executive thus hopes to profit by exercising his/her option to buy the shares in the future but at today’s price.

6. Other Stock Plans – stock appreciation rights permit the recipient to exercise the stock option (by buying the stock) or to take any appreciation in the stock price in cash, stock, or some combination of these. A performance achievement plan awards shares of stock for the achievement of predetermined financial targets. In a restricted stock plan, shares are usually awarded without cost to the executive, but selling the stock is restricted for a specified time period.

..

Chapter 12: Pay for Performance and Financial Incentives

12- 7

7. Potential Problems – two problems plague executive incentives: short termism and lack of range. Many plans encourage short-term thinking.

Solutions: a. Use multiple metrics b. Reward performance relative to competitors c. Include nonfinancial targets 8. Ethics and Incentives – simplistic, financial-performanceoriented incentives, in the absence of strong ethical standards may breed unethical behavior. The solution is to foster an ethical culture.

C. Improving Performance: HR Practices Around the Globe D. Some Other Executive Incentives – companies provide various incentives to persuade executives to remain with the firm, such as golden parachutes and loans.

V.

Team and Organization-Wide Incentive Plans A. How to Design Team Incentives – team (or group) incentive plans pay incentives to the team based on the team’s performance. Occasionally, the employer may want to pay team members according to some other formula such as based on how well the best team member does.

B. Evidence-Based HR: Inequities that Undercut Team Incentives – research suggests that team incentives are often counterproductive.

C. Profit-Sharing Plans – involve employees receiving a share of the company’s annual profits. There are several types of profit-sharing plans: cash plans and deferred profit-sharing plans.

D. Scanlon Plans – this is an incentive plan developed in 1937 by Joseph Scanlon. The basic features of the plan include: philosophy of cooperation, identity, competence, involvement system, and sharing of benefits formula.

E. Other Gainsharing Plans – are incentive plans that engage many or all employees in a common effort to achieve a company’s productivity objectives, with any resulting cost-savings gains shared among employees and the company.

F. At-Risk Pay Plans – put some portion of the employee’s normal pay at risk (forego it), subject to the firm meeting its financial goals.

G. Employee Stock Ownership Plans (ESOP) – are company-wide plans in which a firm contributes shares of its own stock (or cash to purchase the stock) to a trust established to purchase shares of the firm’s stock for employees.

1. Broad-Based Stock Options – some employers offer these with the basic of thinking that shared ownership in the company with employees makes motivational and practical sense.

H. Incentive Plans in Practice: Nucor – Nucor Corp. is the largest steel producer in the United States. It also has the highest productivity and lowest labor cost per ton. Employees can earn bonuses of 100% or more of base salary, and all Nucor employees participate in one of their four performance-based incentive

..

Chapter 12: Pay for Performance and Financial Incentives

12- 8

plans, which are: production incentive plan, department manager incentive plan, professional and clerical bonus plan, and senior officer incentive plan.

VI. Employee Engagement Guide for Managers A. Incentives and Engagement – although the compensation professionals believed that total rewards programs can influence employee engagement, many of them did not specifically include employee engagement as one of the goals of their compensation plans. They concluded that the most direct ways to encourage employee engagement with incentives are 1) to measure the extent to which supervisors are encouraging their subordinates to be engaged, and 2) to use incentives to reward supervisors for improving employee engagement. Even more importantly than the rewards themselves – getting employees involved in developing the rewards programs was the “gold standard” for building employee cooperation and commitment.

Chapter Review Chapter Section Summaries: 12-1. In designing an effective financial incentive plan, it’s important to understand the relationship between money and motivation.

12-2. Piecework is an individual employee incentives and recognition program incentive plan in which a person is paid a sum for each item he or she makes.

12-3. Incentives for salespeople are typically sales commissions.

12-4. Managers take many things into consideration when formulating incentives for managers and executives.

12-5. With more employers organizing their efforts around teams, team and organizationalwide incentive plans are more important.

12-6. Consciously make employee engagement a goal of your compensation plan.

Discussion Questions: 12-1. Compare and contrast six types of incentive plans.

Various types of incentive plans were presented in the text, including piecework plans, straight and guaranteed plans, standard hour plans, plans for salespersons (commissions and combination plans), and group incentive plans. With the piecework plans, earnings are tied directly to what the individual worker produces and are more appropriate in a manufacturing organization. Commissions are more appropriate for salespeople in situations where they are largely unsupervised. In group incentive plans like the Scanlon Plan, all workers involved in developing and implementing cost savings share in the benefits of the suggestions.

..

Chapter 12: Pay for Performance and Financial Incentives

12- 9

12-2. Explain five reasons why incentive plans fail.

This item can be assigned as a Discussion Question. . Here are two reason why incentive plans fail. Although about 85% of large employers reportedly use some type of group-or team-based incentives, studies suggest that team incentives are often counterproductive.

Inequity was the big problem. Sometimes all team members’ financial compensation was the same, although one or two people “did the lion’s share of the work.” Students’ responses will vary. Profit-sharing plans are plans in which all or most employees receive a share of the firm’s annual profits. While that sounds good in theory, free riders may again be a problem: Some may ask, “If everyone gets paid the same whether they work hard or not, why bother?”

12-3. Describe the nature of some important management incentives.

Two widely used management incentive plans are merit pay and profit-sharing plans.

Merit pay is any salary increase that is awarded to an employee on his or her individual performance. Advocates argue that only pay tied directly to performance can motivate improved performance. Profit-sharing plans distribute a portion of the company's profits to employees in the form of a bonus. Research shows that benefits are more subtle than increased productivity – benefits are possibly in the form of better worker commitment.

Long-term incentives might also be included.

12-4. You are applying for a job as a manager and are at the point of negotiating salary and incentives. What questions would you ask your prospective employer concerning incentives? Describe the incentives package you would try to negotiate for yourself.

Students’ answers will vary but should include discussion on long-term and total rewards incentives, including the advantages and disadvantages of both.

12-5. In this chapter, we listed a number of guidelines for instituting a pay-forperformance plan. Do you think these points make sense in terms of motivation theory? Why or why not?

Students’ answers will vary but should include discussion on piecework and standard hour plans, including the advantages and disadvantages of each.

12-6. What is merit pay? Do you think it’s a good idea to award employees merit raises?

Why or why not?

Merit pay is a salary increase that is awarded to an employee based on his or her individual performance. It is a good idea to award merit raises when you have a good performance appraisal system and employees' individual effort can be fairly and accurately evaluated or measured.

..

Chapter 12: Pay for Performance and Financial Incentives

12- 10

12-7. Give four examples of when you would suggest using team or group incentive programs rather than individual incentive programs.

This item can be assigned as a Discussion Question. Students’ responses will vary.

Scanlon plans have five basic features. The first is Scanlon’s philosophy of cooperation.

This philosophy assumes that managers and workers must rid themselves of the “us” and “them” attitudes. A second feature is identity. This means that the company must articulate its mission or purpose, and employees must understand how the business operates .Competence is a third basic feature. The program, say three experts, “explicitly recognizes that a Scanlon plan demands a high level of competence. This suggests careful selection and training. The fourth feature is the involvement system. Employees present improvement suggestions to committees, which transmit the valuable ones to the executive-level committee. The fifth element is the sharing of benefits formula.

Individual and Group Activities: 12-8. Working individually or in groups, create an incentive plan for the following positions: chemical engineer, plant manager, used-car salesperson. What factors did you have to consider in reaching your conclusions?

Suggest giving the chemical engineer a merit raise system because he or she has little perceived control or impact over the production or profitability of the company. The plant manager should receive an annual bonus tied to the profitability of the plant, as well as a stock option plan to encourage long-term planning as well. The used-car salesperson would likely receive a straight commission plan because sales are more directly dependent on his or her ability to sell those cars to prospective customers.

12-9. A state university system in the Southeast instituted a “Teacher Incentive Program” (TIP) for its faculty. Faculty committees within each of the university’s colleges were told to award $5,000 raises (not bonuses) to about 40% of their faculty members based on how good a job they did teaching undergraduates, and how many courses they taught per year. What are the potential advantages and pitfalls of such an incentive program? How well do you think it was accepted by the faculty? Do you think it had the desired effect?

This program would put a premium on undergraduate teaching as opposed to research or graduate teaching. If it were to work, the best teachers would be motivated to teach at the undergraduate level in order to increase their earnings. The pitfalls are many. Some research or graduate faculty may actually earn more through consulting or other outside means; thus they will not be motivated by this system. If research is important to this organization, or the graduate programs are vital, this incentive plan could damage those programs. The awarding of the money is likely to be inconsistent because specific guidelines have not been spelled out. More likely, the rewarding of the raises may become more political as the committees who have other values determine the awards. It is very likely that the system was met with great opposition by the faculty.

..

Chapter 12: Pay for Performance and Financial Incentives

12- 11

12-10. Appendices A and B at the end of this book list the knowledge someone studying for the HRCI (Appendix A) or SHRM (Appendix B) certification exam needs to have in each area of human resource management (such as in Strategic Management and Workforce Planning). In groups of several students, do four things: (1) review Appendix A and/or B; (2) identify the material in this chapter that relates to the Appendix A and/or B required knowledge lists; (3) write four multiple-choice exam questions on this material that you believe would be suitable for inclusion in the HRCI exam and/or the SHRM exam; and (4) if time permits, have someone from your team post your team’s questions in front of the class, so that students in all teams can answer the exam questions created by the other teams.

This question can be assigned as an out-of-class group project.

12-11. Several years ago, the pension plan of the Utility Workers Union of America proposed that shareholders change the corporate bylaws of Dominion Resources, Inc., so that in the future management had to get shareholder approval of executive pay exceeding $1 million, as well as detailed information about the firm’s executive incentive plans. Many unions pointed out that, usually, under IRS regulations, corporations can’t deduct more than $1 million in pay for any of a company’s top five paid executives. Under the new rules the Utility Workers Union is pushing, boards of directors will no longer be able to approve executive pay above $1 million; instead, shareholders would have to vote on it. In terms of effectively running a company, what do you think are the pros and cons of the unions’ recommendations?

Would you vote for or against the unions’ recommendation? Why? Most students may support this recommendation, but they need to be able to clearly state rational reasoning as to why. Hopefully, you will have some students who oppose it in order to clearly give both sides to the argument. You may want to make sure both sides are well represented.

Experiential Exercise: Motivating the Sales Force at Express Auto Purpose: The purpose of this exercise is to give you practice developing an incentive plan.

Required Understanding: Be thoroughly familiar with this chapter, and read the following: Express Auto, an automobile mega-dealership with more than 600 employees that represents 22 brands, has just received a very discouraging set of survey results. Customer satisfaction scores have fallen for the ninth straight quarter. Customer complaints include the following:  It was hard to get prompt feedback from mechanics by phone.  Salespeople often did not return phone calls.  The finance people seemed “pushy.”  New cars were often not properly cleaned or had minor items that needed immediate repair or adjustment.  Cars often had to be returned to have repair work redone.

..

Chapter 12: Pay for Performance and Financial Incentives

12- 12

Table 12-3 describes Express Auto’s current compensation system.

How to Set up the Exercise/Instructions: Divide the class into groups of four to five students.

One or more groups should analyze each of the five teams in column one. Each student group should analyze the compensation package for its Express Auto team. Each group should address these questions: 12-12. In what ways might your team’s compensation plan contribute to the customer service problems?

Sales force: pay is based almost entirely on commission. The salesperson has no motivation to assist customers who they do not believe will result in a sale. Finance office: bonuses for getting customers to use the company financing encourage finance employees to coerce customers into making that choice. Detailing: pay is based entirely on the number of cars detailed per day. There is no measure of quality, nor requirement of it regarding pay. Mechanics: pay is based almost entirely on number of cars serviced as well as servicing them faster than the standard estimated repair time. There is no measurement of quality or accuracy of repairs. Receptionist/phone service people: straight hourly rate does not have any performance rewards.

12-13. What recommendations would you make to improve the compensation system in a way that would likely improve customer satisfaction?

The dealership already has a customer satisfaction survey in place. They need to link results from quality measures to the incentives that their employees receive. Examples are: Sales force: one might decrease the commission somewhat and place that amount in a pool that is distributed based on customer comments about specific sales personnel.

Finance office: bonuses for using company financing should be no more than bonuses based on customer satisfaction ratings. Detailing: there must be a measure of quality and detailers should be docked for any problem that results from their lack of attention to detail. Mechanics: re-works should dock a mechanic’s pay and mechanics whose work results in no complaints should receive a significant bonus. Receptionist/phone service people: those who answer the phone should be able to gain either performance increases in pay, or bonuses based on customer satisfaction ratings. In general, the approach should be like “teaching to the test.” If you want test scores to improve, you teach what will be on the test. If you want measures of customer satisfaction to improve, you reward (or punish) people for those measures.

Application Case: The HubSpot.com Sales Incentive Plan 12-14. How exactly would you change the HubSpot sales compensation plan to solve this client retention problem? Please be specific about what your new plan would consist of.

..

Chapter 12: Pay for Performance and Financial Incentives

12- 13

Answers will vary and students can offer specific ideas about solving the client retention problem. However, students should consider the following topics covered in the chapter.  Consciously make employee engagement a goal of the compensation plan; appraise and incentivize supervisors partly based on their effectiveness in improving their subordinates’ engagement; and if possible enable employees to participate in devising the compensation plan.  Organization-wide incentive plans are plans in which all or most employees can participate. These include profit-sharing plans in which employees share in the company’s profits; gainsharing plans engage employees in a common effort to achieve productivity objectives and thereby share the gains. With employee stock ownership plans, the employer contributes shares of its own stock to a trust established to purchase shares of the firm’s stock for employees.

12-15. Management defined the client churn problem as a sales problem, to be solved with a modified sales compensation plan. What else could have caused the client churn problem and how would you have solved that?

Answers will vary. One explanation of churn might be competing products that serve the customer better than HubSpot. However, students should review Figure 12-1 in the chapter that covers motivating the sales force. Here are some basic motivational tools that HubSpot should use to foster improvement in the sales force and reduce client churn:  The best option for motivating an employee is making sure the employee has a doable goal and that he or she agrees with it. It makes little sense to try to motivate employees with incentives if they don’t know their goals or don’t agree with them.  Recognizing an employee’s contribution is a powerful motivation tool.

Recognition has a positive impact on performance, either alone or combined with financial rewards.  Use social recognition apps for positive reinforcement. Online tools such as Globoforce enable employees to recognize each other’s contributions in real time, and encourage them to emulate outstanding behaviors.

Continuing Case: Carter Cleaning Company – The Incentive Plan 12-16. Should this plan be extended to pressers in the other stores?

No, not in its present form. While the piece-rate plan does make more effective use of Walt’s time and saves the company energy money, the quality control issue is a problem.

An incentive for quality needs to be included.

12-17. Should other employees (cleaner/spotters, counter people) be put on a similar plan?

Why? Why not? If so, how exactly?

It makes sense for some positions but not for others. Cleaner-spotters are production employees who could also benefit from a similar plan. It would have to have a quality

..

Chapter 12: Pay for Performance and Financial Incentives

12- 14

incentive that makes sure they actually get the garments cleaned correctly! An incentive plan that focuses on customer satisfaction makes more sense for the counter people.

12-18. Is there another incentive plan you think would work better for the pressers?

Describe it.

Some ideas might include combination plans (salary plus piece-rate), profit-sharing, or merit pay (higher pay for those who produce more).

12-19. A store manager’s job is to keep total wages to no more than 30% of sales and to maintain the fuel bill and the supply bill at about 9% of sales each. Managers can also directly affect sales by ensuring courteous customer service and by ensuring that the work is done properly. What suggestions would you make to Jennifer and her father for an incentive plan for store managers or front-desk clerks?

Profit-sharing, gain sharing, performance plans, annual bonus, recognition, and merit pay are all options.

Hotel Paris: Improving Performance at the Hotel Paris – The New Incentive Plan 12-20. Discuss what you think of the measurable criteria that Lisa and the CFO set for their new incentive plan.

Having a large percentage of employees eligible for merit increases or incentive pay is good, but will also be expensive. A 10% difference in reward level will likely motivate improved performance. In order to justify the expense, there should be some proof that the behaviors which will be rewarded are linked to improved organizational financial performance. Lisa will need to track and communicate these connections. It is also important that the Hotel Paris find ways to measure what they plan to reward.

12-21. Given what you know about the Hotel Paris’ strategic goals, list three or four specific behaviors you would incentivize for each of the following groups of employees: front desk clerks, hotel managers, valets, and housekeepers.

Answers will vary but may include:  Front desk clerks – speed of check-in, number of positive comments by guests, decrease in number of complaints.  Hotel managers – decrease in absenteeism, process improvements.  Valets – time taken to deliver luggage from curb to room, decrease in number of wrong deliveries, positive feedback received.  Housekeepers – decrease in number of complaints, decrease in number of deliveries to rooms of forgotten items, increase in number of rooms available for early check-in.

..

Chapter 12: Pay for Performance and Financial Incentives

12- 15

12-22. Based on what you learned in this chapter of Dessler Human Resource Management, lay out a complete incentive plan (including all long- and short-term incentives) for the Hotel Paris’ hotel managers.

The Hotel Paris has placed outstanding customer service as a major goal for all employees especially the management staff. Unfortunately, the current pay plan does not link pay to performance. Therefore, both short- and long-term incentives should be considered to help support management staff who are modeling the importance of providing outstanding customer service to the entire hotel staff. Also an incentive plan should be implemented to recognize and reward the accomplishment of organizational goals. Short-term incentives should include periodic recognition and reward programs to all staff who demonstrate outstanding customer service on a routine basis. In addition, an annual bonus based on performance and goal accomplishments could be implemented to those key staff responsible for front line customer service as well as the accomplishment of other goals which advance the mission of the organization. The organization should also consider implementing a merit pay program that would link pay to effective job performance. Long-term bonuses could include profit sharing based on hotel occupancy and customer service reviews.

Key Terms: Financial Incentives – Financial rewards paid to workers whose production exceeds some predetermined standard.

Productivity – The ratio of outputs (goods and services) divided by the inputs (resources such as labor and capital).

Fair Day’s Work – Standards of output devised based on careful, scientific analysis.

Scientific Management Movement – Management approach based on improving work methods through observation and analysis.

Pay-for-performance – Any plan that ties pay to some measure of performance, such as productivity or profitability.

Variable Pay – Any plan that ties pay to productivity or profitability, usually as one-time lump payments.

Intrinsic Motivation – Motivation that derives from the pleasure someone gets from doing the job or task.

Expectancy – A person’s expectation that his or her efforts will lead to performance.

Instrumentality – The perceived relationship between successful performance and obtaining the reward.

..

Chapter 12: Pay for Performance and Financial Incentives

12- 16

Valence – The perceived value a person attaches to the reward.

Behavior Modification – Using contingent rewards or punishment to change behavior.

Piecework – A system of pay based on the number of items processed by each individual worker in a unit of time, such as items per hour or items per day.

Straight Piecework – An incentive plan in which a person is paid a sum for each item he or she makes or sells, with a strict proportionality between results and rewards.

Standard Hour Plan – A plan by which a worker is paid a basic hourly rate, but is paid an extra percentage of his or her base rate for production exceeding the standard per hour or per day.

Similar to piecework payment but based on a percent premium.

Merit Pay (merit raise) – Any salary increase awarded to an employee based on his or her individual performance.

Annual Bonus – Plans that are designed to motivate short-term performance of managers and are tied to company profitability.

Stock Option – The right to purchase a stated number of shares of a company stock at today's price at some time in the future.

Golden Parachute – Payments companies make in connection with a change in ownership or control of a company.

Team (or Group) Incentive Plan – A plan in which a production standard is set for a specific work group, and its members are paid incentives if the group exceeds the production standard.

Organization-Wide Incentive Plan – Incentive plans in which all or most employees can participate.

Profit-Sharing Plan – A plan whereby employees share in the company's profits.

Scanlon Plan – An incentive plan developed in 1937 by Joseph Scanlon and designed to encourage cooperation, involvement, and sharing of benefits.

Gainsharing Plan – An incentive plan that engages employees in a common effort to achieve productivity objectives and share the gains.

Earnings At-Risk Pay Plan – Plans that put some portion of the employees’ normal pay at risk if they don’t meet their goals, in return for possibly obtaining a much larger bonus if they exceed their goals.

Employee Stock Ownership Plan (ESOP) – A corporation contributes shares of its own stock to a trust in which additional contributions are made annually. The trust distributes the stock to employees on retirement or separation from service. ..

Part Four Compensation Chapter 13 Benefits and Services Lecture Outline: Introduction: The Benefits Picture Today Policy Issues Pay for Time Not Worked Unemployment Insurance Vacations and Holidays Know Your Employment Law Sick Leave Improving Performance: HR as a Profit Center Know Your Employment Law Improving Performance: HR Practices Around the Globe Supplemental Unemployment Benefits Insurance Benefits Workers’ Compensation Hospitalization, Health, and Disability Insurance Know Your Employment Law Trends in Employer Health-Care Cost Control Improving Performance: HR as a Profit Center Long-Term Care Life Insurance Benefits for Part-Time and Contingent Workers HR and the Gig Economy: Gig Worker Benefits Retirement Benefits Social Security Pension Plans Know Your Employment Law Pensions and Early Retirement Improved Performance Through HRIS: Online Benefits Management Systems Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media Personal Services and Family-Friendly Benefits Personal Services Family-Friendly Benefits Other Personal Services Benefits Diversity Counts: Domestic Partner Benefits Improving Performance: The Strategic Context Executive Perquisites Flexible Benefits Programs ..

Chapter 13: Benefits and Services

13-2

The Cafeteria Approach Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses Flexible Work Schedules Employee Engagement Guide For Managers Costco’s Compensation Plan Chapter Review

Where Are We Now… The main purpose of this chapter is to explain the third major pay component: employee benefits.

The main topics we discuss are pay for time not worked benefits, insurance benefits, retirement benefits, and using benefits to improve engagement and performance. This chapter will complete our discussion on employee compensation.

Interesting Issues: About 25 years ago, Gary Erickson was biking through California and got an idea that changed his life—to create tastier and healthier bars than those then available. That was the beginning of Clif Bar, a company Erickson started as a small bakery and then grew into one with hundreds of employees selling healthy foods and drinks. He wanted an employee benefits plan for his employees that highlighted Clif Bar’s healthy/sustainable focus; we’ll see what he did.

Learning Objectives: 13-1.

13-2.

13-3.

13-4.

13-5.

13-6.

Name and define each of the main pay for time not worked benefits.

Describe each of the main insurance benefits.

Discuss the main retirement benefits.

Outline the main employees’ services benefits.

Explain the main flexible benefit programs.

Explain how to use benefits to improve engagement, productivity, and performance.

Annotated Outline: Introduction: The Benefits Picture Today – benefits are indirect financial and nonfinancial payments.

A. Policy Issues – the list of policy issues includes what benefits to offer, who receives coverage, whether to include retirees in the plan, whether to deny benefits to employees during initial “probationary” periods, how to finance benefits, cost-containment procedures, and how to communicate benefits’ options to employees. Benefits can be classified by 1) pay for time not worked; 2) insurance benefits; 3) retirement benefits; and 4) services. Some benefits are required by law, while others are discretionary.

I. Pay for Time Not Worked – also called supplemental pay benefits; it is a very costly benefit because of the large amount of time off most employees receive.

..

Chapter 13: Benefits and Services

13-3

A. Unemployment Insurance – all states have unemployment insurance or compensation acts (that follow federal guidelines), which provide for weekly benefits if a person is unable to work through some fault other than his/her own. The benefits derive from an unemployment tax on employers that can range from 0.1% to 5% of taxable payroll in most states. An employer’s unemployment tax rate reflects its rate of personnel terminations.

B. Vacations and Holidays – the number of paid employee vacation days and holidays varies considerably from employer to employer. Firms have to address several holidayand vacation-related policy issues. There are a myriad of laws that affect benefits.

Vacation and holiday pay legal issues are discussed.

C. Sick Leave – provides pay to employees when they’re out of work due to illness. Most sick leave policies grant full pay for a specified number of permissible sick days. To minimize employees using their sick leave as extensions to their vacations, some employers are repurchasing unused sick leave at the end of the year by paying their employees a daily equivalent sum for each sick leave day not used or creating a leave bank or paid time off (PTO).

D. Cost-Reduction Tactics – employers use several tactics to reduce excessive sick leave absence. Some repurchase unused sick leave at the end of the year by paying their employees a sum for each unused sick day. The problem is that legitimately sick employees may come to work. Many employers use pooled paid leave plans (or “banks”). These plans lump together sick leave, vacation, and personal days into a single leave pool.

E. Improving Performance: HR as a Profit Center F. Leaves and the Family Medical Leave Act – the law stipulates that: 1) private employers of 50 or more employees must provide eligible employees up to 12 weeks of unpaid leave for their own serious illness, the birth or adoption of a child, or the care of a seriously ill child, spouse, or parent; 2) employers may require employees to take any unused paid sick leave as part of the 12-week leave provided in the law; 3) employees taking leave are entitled to receive health benefits while they are on unpaid leave; and 4) employers must guarantee employees the right to return to their previous or equivalent position with no loss of benefits at the end of the leave; however, the law provides a limited exception from this provision. Vague interpretations of the law have resulted in leaves sometimes being approved even when they were not legitimate.

G. Know Your Employment Law H. Severance Pay – a one-time payment when terminating an employee, severance is considered a humanitarian gesture and good public relations. Most managers expect employees to give them at least one or two weeks’ notice if they plan to quit; it therefore seems appropriate to provide at least one or two weeks’ severance if an employee is being dismissed. A severance plan may be subject to ERISA if the employer has a legal obligation to make severance payments, as is the case under some union contracts. Even voluntary plans could become subject to ERISA if the employer identifies it as a plan established or maintained by the employer in employee handbooks.

I. Supplemental Unemployment Benefits – these benefits supplement the employee’s unemployment compensation and help the person maintain his/her standard of living for a time while he/she is out of work due to layoffs, reduced workweeks, and relocations.

They are becoming more prevalent in union agreements.

..

Chapter 13: Benefits and Services

13-4

II. Insurance Benefits A. Workers’ Compensation – refers to the sure, prompt income and medical benefits provided in work-related accidents to the victims or their dependents, regardless of fault.

Every state has its own workers’ compensation law and administrative commission, and some run their own insurance programs. Most states require employers to carry workers’ compensation insurance. Neither the state nor the federal government contributes any funds for workers’ compensation.

1. How Benefits Are Determined – workers’ compensation can be monetary or medical.

Monetary awards are based on a formula regarding the disability involved and the worker’s average weekly wages. Some disabilities or losses also receive monetary awards based on a schedule of those losses.

2. Controlling Workers’ Compensation Costs – the costs of insurance premiums depend on the number and dollar amount of claims, thus minimizing such claims is important. Some ways to reduce such claims is to screen out accident-prone workers, reduce accident-causing conditions in facilities, institute effective safety and health programs, and comply with government standards on these matters. Many firms institute rehabilitation programs to get injured employees back on the job as fast as possible, since workers’ compensation costs accumulate as long as the person is out of work.

B. Hospitalization, Health, and Disability Insurance – these benefits are aimed at providing protection against hospitalization costs and loss of income arising from accidents or illness occurring from off-the-job causes. They are offered by most employers because medical care and insurance are so expensive. Employer health and hospitalization plans must comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act. Accidental death and dismemberment coverage provides a lump-sum benefit in addition to life insurance benefits when death is accidental. Disability insurance provides income protection for loss of salary due to illness or accident.

1. A health maintenance organization (HMO) is a medical organization consisting of several specialists operating out of a community-based health-care center.

2. Preferred provider organizations (PPOs), a cross between HMOs and the traditional doctor/patient arrangement, are groups of health care providers that contract to provide medical care services at a reduced fee. The costs of mental health treatment are rising because of widespread drug and alcohol problems.

There is an increase in the number of states requiring employers to offer a minimum package of mental health benefits.

3. The Mental Health Parity Act of 1996 sets minimum mental health care benefits at the national level.

C. Know Your Employment Law D. Trends in Employer Health-Care Cost Control – many employers are changing their medical plans and using cost-containment specialists to reduce health-care costs. Also, consumer education is among the most important initiatives in health administration.

Employees must know the costs of health choices in order to make better decisions.

More employers are requiring employees to pay higher premiums and co-payments.

Clinical prevention programs include mammograms, immunizations, and routine

..

Chapter 13: Benefits and Services

13-5

checkups. Wellness programs, claim audits, as well as other cost-control options are discussed.

E. Improving Performance: HR as a Profit Center F. Long-Term Care – is a new benefit aimed at supporting people in their old age. The Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA), enacted in 1996, lets employers and employees deduct the cost of long-term care insurance premiums from their annual income taxes.

G. Life Insurance – most employers provide group life insurance plans, which usually accept all employees, regardless of health or physical condition. Accidental death and dismemberment coverage provides a lump-sum benefit in addition to life insurance benefits when death is accidental.

H. Benefits for Part-Time and Contingent Workers – some firms provide holiday, sick leave, vacation benefits, and some form of health-care benefits for employees who work less than 35 hours a week.

III. Retirement Benefits A. Social Security – provides three types of benefits: retirement benefits, survivor’s (death) benefits, and disability payments. Retirement benefits provide an income if you retire at age 62 or thereafter and are insured under the Social Security Act. Survivor’s (death) benefits provide monthly payments to your dependents regardless of your age at death if you were insured under the Social Security Act. Disability payments provide monthly payments to employees who become totally disabled (and their dependents) if they work and meet certain requirements. The Social Security system also administers the Medicare program, which provides a wide range of health services to people 65 or older.

B. Pension Plans – there are a variety of pension plans. Defined contribution plans specify what contributions the employer will make to the employee’s retirement or savings fund.

In a 401(k) plan, an employee authorizes the employer to deduct a certain amount of money from his/her paycheck before taxes and to invest it in the 401(k) plan. Many federal laws govern pensions.

1. 401(k) Plans – this is a popular defined contribution plan in which the employee can have money deducted from his or her paycheck and deposited in the account before payroll taxes.

2. Other Plans – in a savings thrift plan, employees contribute a portion of their earnings to a fund. The employer usually matches this contribution in whole or in part. In deferred profit-sharing plans, employers contribute a portion of their profits to the pension fund. An employee stock ownership plan (ESOP) is a tax-deductible stock bonus plan.

3. Cash Balance Pension Plans – these are defined benefit plans for federal tax purposes, but have the portability advantages of defined contribution plans. Defined benefit plans are most advantageous to older employees with long service terms. Younger employees, or those who want to change jobs, usually prefer defined contribution plans. The cash balance plan has both portability and predictable benefits.

C. Know Your Employment Law D. Pensions and Early Retirement – the company opens up (for a limited time only) the opportunity for employees to retire earlier than usual, with a financial incentive, which

..

Chapter 13: Benefits and Services

13-6

is generally a combination of improved or liberalized pension benefits plus a cash payment.

E. Improving Performance Through HRIS: Online Benefits Management Systems – benefits administration can be an enormously labor-intensive and time-consuming activity for an HR department. One of the main ways HR managers are increasing the productivity of their benefits dollars is by increasing the utilization of technology.

F. Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media IV. Personal Services and Family-Friendly Benefits A. Personal services are being provided by many companies. Options may include credit unions, legal services, and counseling.

1. Employee Assistance Programs – EAPs provide employees with counseling and/or treatment for problems such as alcoholism, gambling, or stress.

B. Family-Friendly (Work-Life) Benefits – there are more families in which both adults work, more one-parent households, more women working, and more people over 55 working. Onsite child care, fitness and medical facilities, flexible work scheduling, telecommuting, occasional sabbaticals, loan programs for home computers, stock options, concierge services, and even insurance for the family pet are all part of the compensation package in the new workplace. Employers are increasingly granting fathers time off, or flexible schedules, to take care of the kids.

1. Subsidized child care is an increasingly desirable benefit, which tends to improve recruiting results, lower absenteeism, improve morale, garner favorable publicity, and lower turnover.

2. Sick Child Benefits – unexpected absences due to last-minute child-care emergencies can be problematic for employers, who then need to hire temporary help or cope with reduced productivity. Emergency child-care benefits are being offered by more employers.

3. Elder Care – programs are being offered to employers to help employees who must care for elderly who can’t fully care for themselves.

4. Educational Subsidies – the percentage of employers offering education benefits is diminishing. It’s expensive and the employer may be paying its best employees to leave.

C. Other Personal Services Benefits – employers often provide services for on site programs such as ATMs, mobile libraries, car washes, oil changes, dry cleaning, haircuts, and organic grocery delivery as just a few options to help boost employees’ efficiency by reducing the need for them to seek services off-site. Non-monetary benefits such as schedule flexibility and additional training and development are also offered.

D. Diversity Counts: Domestic Partner Benefits E. Improving Performance: The Strategic Context F. Executive Perquisites – perks include management loans, salary guarantees, protection for executives if their firms become targets of acquisitions or mergers, financial counseling, relocation benefits, time off with pay, outplacement assistance, company cars, chauffeured limousines, security systems, company planes and yachts, executive dining rooms, physical fitness programs, legal services, tax assistance, liberal expense accounts, club memberships, season tickets, credit cards, and children’s education.

..

Chapter 13: Benefits and Services

13-7

V. Flexible Benefits Programs – when given the opportunity to choose, employees do prefer flexibility in their benefits plan.

A. The Cafeteria Approach – a cafeteria benefits plan, which is generally synonymous with a flexible benefits plan, is where each employee is given a benefits fund budget to spend on whichever benefits he/she wants once the employer limits the total cost for each benefits package and includes certain non-optional items. Flexible spending accounts let employees pay for certain benefits expenses with pretax dollars. Core plus option plans establish a core set of benefits, which are usually mandatory for all employees; then the employees can choose from various benefits options.

B. Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses C. Flexible Work Schedules 1. Flextime – is an arrangement by which employees have flexibility in scheduling their workday around core hours.

2. Telecommuting – telecommuters work at home and use phones and the Internet to conduct business.

3. Compressed Workweeks – may consist of four 10-hour days, three 12-hour days, or other such combinations.

4. Other Flexible Work Arrangements – there are many other arrangements that employers may offer. Job sharing is when two people share one full-time job. Job sharing can be useful for retirement-aged employees, allowing the company to retain the employee, who experiences reduced hours. Work sharing is when a whole group reduces its hours to prevent layoffs.

VI. Employee Engagement Guide for Managers 1. Costco’s Compensation Plan – the HR strategy is to deflect Walmart’s famously low costs and wages by paying employees more, and thereby producing improved employee engagement, productivity, and customer service. Costco’s employee benefits are also highly competitive, particularly when compared with the typically sparse offerings in the retail industry. Costco doesn’t directly measure employee engagement; it says it tracks engagement by “byproducts,” such as turnover and productivity. Costco, like other large chains with traditionally excellent customer service like Nordstrom and the Container Store, also do well financially, in part by treating employees well and keeping engagement up.

Chapter Review Chapter Section Summaries: 13-1. Employers provide numerous pay for time not worked benefits.

13-2. Most employers also provide required or voluntary insurance benefits.

13-3. Retirement benefits are important to employees today.

13-4. Most employers also provide various personal services and family-friendly benefits.

13-5. Employees prefer choice in their benefits plans, so flexible benefits programs are important.

..

Chapter 13: Benefits and Services

13-8

13-6. Costco’s HR strategy is to deflect Walmart’s low wages by paying employees more, thereby producing more employee engagement.

Discussion Questions: 13-1. What is unemployment insurance? Is an organization required to pay unemployment benefits to all dismissed employees? Explain how you would go about minimizing your organization’s unemployment insurance tax.

Unemployment insurance provides benefits to an individual who is unable to work through some fault other than his/her own. An organization is not required to pay unemployment benefits to all dismissed employees. You could minimize your organization’s unemployment insurance tax by making sure that all your managers understand the unemployment insurance code, training managers and supervisors on discipline and discharge, conducting exit interviews, verifying employment claims, filing protests against a former employee's claim on a timely basis, knowing your local unemployment insurance official, and auditing the annual benefit charges statement.

13-2. Explain how ERISA protects employees’ pension rights.

Under ERISA, pension rights must be vested under one of three formulas. Also, ERISA established the Pension Benefits Guarantee Corporation to help ensure that pensions meet vesting obligations. The PBGC also insures pensions should a plan terminate without sufficient funds to meet its vested obligations.

13-3. Describe the main retirement benefits.

Social Security – provides three types of benefits: retirement benefits, survivor’s (death) benefits, and disability payments. Retirement benefits provide an income if you retire at age 62 or thereafter and are insured under the Social Security Act. Survivor’s (death) benefits provide monthly payments to your dependents regardless of your age at death if you were insured under the Social Security Act. Disability payments provide monthly payments to employees who become totally disabled (and their dependents) if they work and meet certain requirements. The Social Security system also administers the Medicare program, which provides a wide range of health services to people 65 or older.

Pension Plans – there are a variety of pension plans. Defined contribution plans specify what contributions the employer will make to the employee’s retirement or savings fund.

In a 401(k) plan, an employee authorizes the employer to deduct a certain amount of money from his/her paycheck before taxes and to invest it in the 401(k) plan. Many federal laws govern pensions.

1. 401(k) Plans – this is a popular defined contribution plan in which the employee can have money deducted from his or her paycheck and deposited in the account before payroll taxes.

Other Plans – in a savings thrift plan, employees contribute a portion of their earnings to a fund. The employer usually matches this contribution in whole or in

..

Chapter 13: Benefits and Services

13-9

part. In deferred profit-sharing plans, employers contribute a portion of their profits to the pension fund. An employee stock ownership plan (ESOP) is a tax-deductible stock bonus plan.

Cash Balance Pension Plans – these are defined benefit plans for federal tax purposes, but have the portability advantages of defined contribution plans. Defined benefit plans are most advantageous to older employees with long service terms.

Younger employees, or those who want to change jobs, usually prefer defined contribution plans. The cash balance plan has both portability and predictable benefits.

13-4. What are the main provisions of the FMLA? Family Medical Leave Act – the law stipulates that: 1) private employers of 50 or more employees must provide eligible employees up to 12 weeks of unpaid leave for their own serious illness, the birth or adoption of a child, or the care of a seriously ill child, spouse, or parent; 2) employers may require employees to take any unused paid sick leave as part of the 12-week leave provided in the law; 3) employees taking leave are entitled to receive health benefits while they are on unpaid leave; and 4) employers must guarantee employees the right to return to their previous or equivalent position with no loss of benefits at the end of the leave; however, the law provides a limited exception from this provision. Vague interpretations of the law have resulted in leaves sometimes being approved even when they were not legitimate.

Individual and Group Activities: 13-5. Working individually or in groups, research the unemployment insurance rate and laws of your state. Write a summary detailing your state’s unemployment laws.

Assuming Company X has a 30% rate of annual personnel terminations, calculate Company X’s approximate unemployment tax rate in your state.

Suggest that the students use the Internet to research the unemployment rate and laws for your state.

13-6. Assume you run a small business. Working individually or in groups, visit the Web site www.dol.gov/elaws. See the Small Business Retirement Savings Advisor. Write a two-page summary explaining: (1) the various retirement savings programs available to small business employers, and (2) which retirement savings program you would choose for your small business and why.

Based on what they learned from the chapter and the results of their Internet search, the students should include at a minimum a 401(k) plan that can be accessed online.

13-7. You are the HR consultant to a small business with about 40 employees. Now the firm offers only 5 days of vacation, 5 paid holidays, and legally mandated benefits such as

..

Chapter 13: Benefits and Services

13-10

unemployment insurance payments. Develop a list of other benefits you believe it should offer, along with your reasons for suggesting them.

The specific ones to recommend would depend partly on the profile of the employees of the firm. In the absence of that information, the least costly addition of benefits would be to add some sick leave (or personal days) and consider additional vacation and/or holidays.

The next benefit that they might look to would be to add the availability of some kind of health plan that could include a contributory cost to the employee. This would be less expensive to the company and add real value to the employees because of group discounts.

13-8. Appendices A and B at the end of this book list the knowledge someone studying for the HRCI (Appendix A) or SHRM (Appendix B) certification exam needs to have in each area of human resource management (such as in Strategic Management and Workforce Planning). In groups of several students, do four things: (1) review Appendix A and/or B; (2) identify the material in this chapter that relates to the Appendix A and/or B required knowledge lists; (3) write four multiple-choice exam questions on this material that you believe would be suitable for inclusion in the HRCI exam; and (4) if time permits, have someone from your team post your team’s questions in front of the class, so that students in all teams can answer the exam questions created by the other teams.

The material in this chapter that relates to the HRCI certification exam includes: unemployment insurance, vacations and holidays, sick leave, parental leave and FMLA, severance pay, supplemental unemployment benefits, workers’ compensation, hospitalization, health and disability insurance, life insurance, benefits for part-time workers, social security, pension plans, pension planning, pensions and the law, pension trends, executive perquisites, and flexible benefits programs. Multiple-choice questions should reflect material in this chapter and should have answer choices which could appear plausible.

Experiential Exercise: Revising the Benefits Package Purpose: The purpose of this exercise is to provide practice in developing a benefits package for a small business.

Required Understanding: Be very familiar with the material presented in this chapter. In addition, review Chapter 11 to reacquaint yourself with sources of compensation survey information, and come to class prepared to share with your group the benefits package for the small business in which you work or in which someone with whom you’re familiar works.

How to Set up the Exercise/Instructions: Divide the class into groups of four or five students. Your assignment is as follows: Maria Cortes runs a small personnel recruiting office in Miami and has decided to start offering an expanded benefits package to her 25 employees. At the current time, the only benefits are 7 paid holidays per year and 5 sick

..

Chapter 13: Benefits and Services

13-11

days per year. In her company, there are 2 other managers, as well as 17 full-time recruiters and 5 secretarial staff members. Your assignment is as follows: In the time allotted, your group should create a benefits package in keeping with the size and requirements of this firm.

Application Case: Striking for Benefits 13-9. Assume you are mediating this dispute. Discuss five creative solutions you would suggest for how the grocers could reduce the health insurance benefits and the cost of their total benefits package without making any employees pay more.

It is suggested that you consider giving this exercise as a group assignment. Finding five creative solutions will be challenging, but things that should be considered include: altering deductibles but providing grandfathered employees extra pay to compensate; altering the pay schedule by increasing the pay for existing employees to compensate for additional health care costs passed on to them, but new employees not getting that pay increase; etc.

13-10. From the grocery chains’ point of view, what is the downside of having two classes of employees, one of which has superior health insurance benefits? How would you suggest they handle the problem?

Morale is a critical problem. Anytime there are two classes, jealousy and resentment increase and morale decreases. Also, administration costs increase. Some of the suggestions in question #1 might avoid the two classes.

13-11. Similarly, from the point of view of the union, what are the downsides of having to represent two classes of employees, and how would you suggest handling the situation?

The “lower class” employees will feel that they were “sold out” by the union and may lose faith in the value of the union. Initially the union will be safe because of the larger number of employees in the “better” group, but eventually that will change.

Continuing Case: Carter Cleaning Company – The New Benefit Plan 13:12. Draw up a policy statement regarding vacations, sick leave, and paid days off for Carter Cleaning Centers.

The students are likely to create different policy statements, which will reflect their different preferences for benefits. You should get the students to discuss how Carter Cleaning Centers might allow for flexibility in their pay for time not worked.

..

Chapter 13: Benefits and Services

13-12

13-13. What would you tell Jennifer are the advantages and disadvantages to Carter Cleaning Centers of providing its employees with health, hospitalization, and life insurance programs?

The student should refer to the hospitalization, medical, and disability insurance section of the chapter to develop their lists of advantages and disadvantages.

13-14. Would you advise establishing some type of day care center for the Carter Cleaning employees? Why or why not?

A better approach for a small company such as Carter would be to locate a licensed day care provider that would be willing to give a discount to Carter employees. From that starting point, Jennifer could then consider whether to subsidize childcare.

Hotel Paris: Improving Performance at the Hotel Paris – The New Benefits Plan 13-15. What is your opinion of the new Hotel Paris benefits plan?

Students’ answers will vary.

13-16. Because employers typically make benefits available to all employees, they may not have the motivational effects of incentive plans. Given this, list five employee behaviors you believe Hotel Paris could try to improve through an enhanced benefits plan, and explain why you chose them.

Answers will vary. Some possible answers include calling in sick, leaving early or coming in late, being short with customers or staff, passing illness to other staff members by coming in sick, and showing a lack of motivation.

13-17. Given your answer to question 13-16 and what you read in this chapter of Dessler Human Resource Management, explain specifically what other benefits you would recommend the Hotel Paris implement to achieve these behavioral improvements.

Students’ answers will vary.

13-18. Explain specifically what other benefits you would recommend the Hotel Paris implement to achieve these behavioral improvements.

Flexible benefit plans would allow employees in different age groups, with different needs, to adjust their benefits to their situation. An on-site child care facility or voucher system may be a possibility depending on need.

..

Chapter 13: Benefits and Services

13-13

Key Terms: Benefits – Indirect financial and nonfinancial payments employees receive for continuing their employment with the company.

Supplemental Pay Benefits – Benefits for time not worked such as unemployment insurance, vacation and holiday pay, and sick pay.

Unemployment Insurance (or compensation) – Provides benefits if a person is unable to work through some fault other than his or her own.

Sick Leave – Provides pay to an employee when he or she is out of work because of illness.

Severance Pay – A one-time payment some employers provide when terminating an employee.

Supplemental Unemployment Benefits – Provide for a guaranteed annual income in certain industries where employers must shut down to change machinery or due to reduced work. These benefits are paid by the company and supplement unemployment benefits.

Workers’ Compensation – Provides income and medical benefits to work-related accident victims or their dependents regardless of fault.

Health Maintenance Organization (HMO) – A prepaid health care system that generally provides routine round-the-clock medical services as well as preventative medicine in a clinic-type arrangement for employees, who pay a nominal fee in addition to the fixed annual fee the employer pays.

Group Life Insurance – Provides lower rates for the employer or employee and includes all employees, including new employees, regardless of health or physical condition.

Social Security – Federal program that provides three types of benefits: retirement income at age 62 and thereafter; survivor's or death benefits payable to the employee's dependents regardless of age at time of death; and disability benefits payable to disabled employees and their dependents.

These benefits are payable only if the employee is insured under the Social Security Act. Pension Plans – Plans that provide a fixed sum when employees reach a predetermined retirement age or when they can no longer work due to disability.

Defined Benefit Pension Plan – A plan that contains a formula for determining retirement benefits.

Defined Contribution Pension Plan – A plan in which the employer's contribution to employee's retirement or savings funds is specified.

Portability – Instituting policies that enable employees to easily take their accumulated pension funds when they leave an employer.

..

Chapter 13: Benefits and Services

13-14

401(k) Plan – A defined contribution plan based on section 401(k) of the Internal Revenue Code.

Savings and Thrift Plan – Plan where employees contribute a portion of their earnings to a fund; the employer usually matches this contribution in whole or in part.

Deferred Profit-Sharing Plan – A plan in which a certain amount of profits is credited to each employee’s account, payable at retirement, termination, or death.

Employee Stock Ownership Plan (ESOP) – A qualified, tax-deductible stock bonus plan in which employers contribute stock to a trust for eventual use by employees.

Cash Balance Plans – Plans under which the employer contributes a percentage of employees’ current pay to employees’ pension plans every year, and employees earn interest on this amount.

Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1975 (ERSIA) – Signed into law by President Ford to require that pension rights be vested, and protected by a government agency, the PBGC. Pension Benefits Guarantee Corporation (PBGC) – Established under ERISA to ensure that pensions meet vesting obligations; also insures pensions should a plan terminate without sufficient funds to meet its vested obligations.

Early Retirement Window – A type of offering by which employees are encouraged to retire early, the incentive being liberal pension benefits plus perhaps a cash payment.

Employee Assistance Program (EAP) – A formal employer program for providing employees with counseling and/or treatment programs for problems such as alcoholism, gambling, or stress.

Family-Friendly (or work-life) Benefits – Benefits such as child care and fitness facilities, that make it easier for employees to balance their work and family responsibilities.

Cafeteria Benefits Plan – Individualized plans allowed by employers to accommodate employee preferences for benefits.

Flextime – A work schedule in which employees’ workdays are built around a core of midday hours and employees determine, within limits, what other hours they will work.

Compressed Workweek – A schedule in which employees work fewer but longer days each week.

Job Sharing – Allows two or more people to share a full-time job.

Work Sharing – Refers to a temporary reduction in work hours by a group of employees during economic downturns as a way to prevent layoffs.

..

Part Five Enrichment Topics in Human Resource Management Chapter 14 Building Positive Employee Relations

Lecture Outline: What is Employee Relations?

Employee Relations Programs For Building And Maintaining Positive Employee Relations Ensuring Fair Treatment Improving Performance: The Strategic Context Bullying and Victimization Improving Employee Relations Through Communication Programs Develop Employee Recognition/Relations Programs Use Employee Involvement Programs Improving Performance: HR As a Profit Center The Ethical Organization Ethics and Employee Rights What Shapes Ethical Behavior at Work?

How Any Manager Can Create an Ethical Environment How Human Resource Managers Can Create More Ethical Environments Improving Performance: HR Tools For Line Managers and Small Businesses Know Your Employment Law The Three Pillars of Fair Discipline Diversity Counts: Comparing Males and Females in a Discipline Situation How to Discipline an Employee Discipline Without Punishment Employee Engagement Guide for Managers How Companies Become “Best Companies to Work For” The “Best Companies to Work For” SAS: Great Benefits, Trust, and Work-Life Balance Google: Happiness and People Analytics FedEx: Guaranteed Fair Treatment A “Best Company” Human Resource Philosophy?

Chapter Review

Where Are We Now… The main purpose of this chapter is to explain the building blocks of positive employee relations.

Our topics include what is employee relations, managing employee relations, using human Copyright © 2017 Pearson Education, Inc.

Chapter 14: Building Positive Employee Relations

14-2

resources management tools to promote ethics and fair treatment, managing employee discipline, and developing employee engagement and great places to work for.

Interesting Issues: After a worker uprising over pay and work rules at Apple Inc.’s Foxconn IPhone assembly plant in Shenzhen, China, Apple asked the plant’s owner to have the Fair Labor Association (FLA) survey the plant’s workers. The FLA found “tons of issues.” We’ll see what they found and what Foxconn’s management did to improve the situation.

Learning Objectives: 14-1.

14-2.

14-3.

14-4.

14-5.

Define employee relations.

Discuss at least four methods for managing employee relations.

Explain what is meant by ethical behavior.

Explain what is meant by fair disciplinary practices.

Answer the question: “How do companies become “Best Companies to Work For?"

Annotated Outline: I.

What is Employee Relations? – it’s the managerial activity that involves establishing and maintaining the positive employee-employer relationship that contributes to satisfactory productivity, motivation, morale, and discipline, and to maintaining a positive, productive, and cohesive work environment.

II.

Employee Relations Programs For Building And Maintaining Positive Employee Relations A. Ensuring Fair Treatment – unfair treatment reduces morale, increases stress, and has negative effects on performance. Employees of abusive supervisors are more likely to quit, and to report lower job and life satisfaction and higher stress. The effects on employees of such abusiveness are particularly pronounced where the abusive supervisors seem to have support from higher-ups. The employer and the manager are responsible for ensuring that the employee is treated fairly and with respect.

1. Procedural justice refers to justice in the allocation of rewards or discipline, in terms of the procedures being evenhanded and fair.

2. Distributive justice refers to a system for distributing rewards and discipline in which the actual results or outcomes are even handed and fair.

B. Improving Performance: The Strategic Context C. Bullying and Victimization – some unfairness is blatant. Bullying—singling out someone to harass and mistreat—is an increasingly serious problem. The U.S.

..

Chapter 14: Building Positive Employee Relations

14-3

government (www.stopbullying.gov/#) points out that while definitions of bullying vary, most would agree that bullying involves three things: 1. Imbalance of power – people who bully use their power to control or harm, and the people being bullied may have a hard time defending themselves.

2. Intent to cause harm – actions done by accident are not bullying; the person bullying has a goal to cause harm.

3. Repetition – incidents of bullying happen to the same person over and over by the same person or group, and that bullying can take many forms: a. Verbal: name-calling, teasing. b. Social: spreading rumors, leaving people out on purpose, breaking up friendships. c. Physical: hitting, punching, shoving. d. Cyberbullying: using the Internet, mobile phones, or other digital technologies to harm others.

D. Improving Employee Relations Through Communication Programs – many employers use communications programs to bolster their employee relations efforts on the reasonable assumption that employees feel better about their employers when they are “kept in the loop.” The employers can use the following: open door policy, employee handbook, email, hard copy memoranda, focus groups, ombudsman, suggestion boxes, telephone, messaging, Web-based hotlines, and exit interviews.

1. Using Organizational Climate Surveys – these are used to “take the pulse” of their employees’ attitudes toward a variety of organizational issues including leadership, safety, role clarity, fairness, pay, and to thereby get a sense of whether their employee relations need improvement.

E. Develop Employee Recognition/Relations Programs – instituting recognition and service award programs requires planning. Service award programs require reviewing the tenure of existing employees and establishing meaningful award periods (1 year, 5 years, etc.). Recognition Programs require developing criteria for recognition (such as customer service, cost savings, etc.), creating forms and procedures for submitting and reviewing nominations, selecting meaningful recognition awards, and establishing a process for actually awarding the recognition awards.

F. Using Employee Involvement Programs – employers encourage employee involvement in various ways, such as focus groups and employee suggestion systems.

G. Improving Performance: HR As a Profit Center H. HR and the Gig Economy: Employee Relations and Gig Workers III.

The Ethical Organization – ethics are “the principles of conduct governing an individual or a group”; the principles that people use to decide what their conduct should be.

A. Ethics and Employee Rights – the enforceable rights embedded in employment law also govern what employers and employees can do.

..

Chapter 14: Building Positive Employee Relations

14-4

B. What Shapes Ethical Behavior at Work? – three factors combine to determine the ethical choices we make: 1)”Bad Apples” which are people who are inclined to make unethical choices must deal with 2)”Bad Cases” which are the ethical situations that are ripe for unethical choices while working in 3)”Bad Barrels” which is the company environment that foster or condone unethical choices.

C. The Person: (What Makes Bad Apples?) – because people bring to their jobs their own ideas of what is morally right and wrong, the individual must shoulder much of the credit (or blame) for the ethical choices he or she makes.

1. Which Ethical Situations Make for Ethically Dangerous Situations (Bad Cases)? – people seem more likely to “do the wrong thing” in “less serious” situations. People tend to cut more ethical corners on small things.

2. What Are the “Bad Barrels” – The Outside Factors That Mold Ethical Choices? – companies that promote an “everyone for him or herself” culture were more likely to suffer from unethical choices.

3. How Managers Can Create More Ethical Environments – by reducing job-related pressures, walk the talk, and reinforce the desirable behavior.

The level of misconduct at work drops dramatically when employees say their supervisors exhibit ethical behavior. Take it seriously.

4. How Human Resource Managers Can Create More Ethical Environments – by instituting ethics training and codes, enforce the rules, encourage whistleblowers, and foster an ethical culture. Encourage whistleblowers. Use rewards and discipline.

D. Improving Performance: HR Tools For Line Managers and Small Businesses E. Know Your Employment Law: Electronic Monitoring – there are two main restrictions on workplace monitoring. One is the Electronic Communications Privacy Act (ECPA). The other are common-law protections (protections that evolved from court decisions, for instance, decisions against defaming employees by publicizing highly personal matters about them).

IV.

Managing Employee Discipline – the purpose of discipline is to encourage employees to behave sensibly at work (where sensible means adhering to rules and regulations).

A. The Three Pillars of Fair Discipline – the manager builds a fair discipline process on three pillars: 1) rules and regulations, 2) a system of progressive penalties, and 3) an appeals process.

B. Diversity Counts: Comparing Males and Females in a Discipline Situation C. How to Discipline an Employee – to help guide managers and head off errors, fair discipline guidelines would include the following: 1. Make sure the evidence supports the charge of employee wrongdoing.

2. Make sure to protect the employee’s due process rights.

3. Adequately warn the employee of the disciplinary consequences of his or her alleged misconduct. Have employee sign a form.

4. The rule that allegedly was violated should be “reasonably related” to the efficient and safe operation of the particular work environment.

5. Objectively investigate the matter before administering discipline.

6. The investigation should produce substantial evidence of misconduct.

..

Chapter 14: Building Positive Employee Relations

14-5

7. Apply applicable rules, orders, or penalties without discrimination.

8. Maintain the employee’s rights to counsel.

9. Don’t rob your subordinate of his or her dignity, for instance by disciplining the person in public.

10. Listen to what the person has to say.

11. Remember that the burden of proof is on you.

12. Get the facts.

13. Don’t act while angry.

14. Adhere to your company’s disciplinary appeals process.

D. Discipline Without Punishment – aims to reduce the punitive nature of the discipline.

Steps include the following: 1. Issue an oral reminder for a first infraction.

2. Should another incident arise within 6 weeks, issue a formal written reminder, and place a copy in the employee’s personnel file.

3. Give a paid, one-day “decision-making leave.”

4. If no further incidents occur in the next year or so, purge the 1-day paid suspension from the person’s file. If the behavior is repeated, the next step is dismissal.

5. The process would not apply to exceptional circumstances. Criminal behavior or in-plant fighting might be grounds for immediate dismissal, for instance.

V.

Employee Engagement Guide for Managers A. How Companies Become “Best Companies to Work For” – the focus is on programs managers use to cultivate positive employee relations.

B. The “Best Companies” to Work For – based on an extensive multinational survey of employees by the Great Place to Work Institute (www.greatplacetowork.com).

The Great Place to Work Institute defines a great workplace “as one where employees trust the people they work for, have pride in the work they do, and enjoy the people they work with.”

C. SAS: Great Benefits, Trust, and Work-Life Balance – SAS, whose headquarters is in Cary, North Carolina, is a leader in providing business analytics software and services to companies. The company is privately owned and has long been known for the quality of its benefits and for the support it provides for its employees’ work-life balance.

D. Google: Happiness and People Analytics – the founders turned to SAS to better understand what made it consistently a “Best Company to Work For,” and thus made benefits equal to or exceed those of SAS including providing on-site dry cleaners, bowling alleys, cafés, transportation to and from campus, and nap pods.

E. FedEx: Guaranteed Fair Treatment – this company has been one of the “Fortune Magazine’s 100 Best Companies to Work For” for 12 of the past 15 years.

Excellent benefits, competitive salaries, and a focus on promoting from within help to explain this; however, it may be FedEx’s emphasis on building trust through communications that most sets it apart. The Guarantee Fair Treatment Process (GFTP) is a sort of turbocharged grievance process, an appeal can go all

..

Chapter 14: Building Positive Employee Relations

14-6

the way to top executives. GFTP is available to all permanent employees. It has three steps: 1) management review, 2) officer complaint, and 3) executive appeal review. FedEx uses survey feedback.

F. A “Best Company” Human Resources Philosophy – every personnel decision you make, the people you hire, the training you provide, your leadership style, and the like, reflects (for better or worse) the basic philosophy. One thing that also molds your own philosophy is that of your organization’s top management. While it may not be stated, it is usually communicated by their actions and permeates every level and department.

Chapter Review Chapter Section Summaries: 14-1. Employee relations is the activity that involves establishing and maintaining the positive employee-employer relationships.

14-2. Managers and HR Management use programs to develop positive employee relations.

14-3. Ethics refers to the principles of conduct governing an individual or a group, and specifically to standards you use to decide what your conduct should be.

14-4. A fair and just discipline process is based on rules and regulations, a system of progressive penalties, and an appeal process.

14-5. There are several things that any manager intent on building positive employee relations and employee engagement can draw from by studying “Best Companies to Work For.”

Discussion Questions: 14-1. Explain how you would ensure fairness in disciplining, discussing particularly the prerequisites to disciplining, disciplining guidelines, and the discipline without punishment approach.

There are many things that can be helpful: Make sure the evidence supports the charge of employee wrongdoing. • Ensure that the employee’s due process rights are protected. • Warn the employee of the disciplinary consequences. • The rule that was allegedly violated should be “reasonably related” to the efficient and safe operation of the particular work environment. • Fairly and adequately investigate the matter before administering discipline. • The investigation should produce substantial evidence of misconduct. • Rules, orders, or penalties should be applied evenhandedly. • The penalty should be reasonably related to the misconduct and to the employee’s past work history. • Maintain the employee’s right to counsel. • Don’t rob a subordinate of his or her dignity.

• Remember that the burden of proof is on you. • Get the facts. Don’t base a decision on hearsay or on your general impression. • Don’t act while angry. • Create a formalized appeals process. • Make sure all rules and policies are communicated and clearly explained in advance.

..

Chapter 14: Building Positive Employee Relations

14-7

14-2. Why is it important in our litigious society to manage electronic monitoring properly?

Students can have a lively discussion about privacy issues and electronic monitoring.

This question could be debated with teams taking opposite sides of the issues.

14-3. Provide two examples of behaviors that would probably be unethical but legal, and three that would probably be illegal but ethical.

When most students think of ethical behavior, they think of rules for distinguishing between right and wrong, such as the Golden Rule ("do unto others as you would have them do unto you"), or a code of professional conduct like the Hippocratic Oath ("first of all, do no harm"). But the difference between ethical/unethical and legal/illegal behavior can become blurred and often debated. Here are several examples to help make the distinction more clear.

Unethical but legal: o Submitting the same paper for two different course assignments. o Listing information on your resume that is incorrect in order to obtain a job that you might not otherwise be qualified for. o Performing non-work-related activities while you are being paid by your employer.

Illegal but ethical: o Operating a motor vehicle while over your state’s legal limit for alcohol intoxication. o Stopping at a red light but then proceeding through the intersection before you receive the green light. o Driving over the legal speed limit.

14-4. List 10 things your college or university does to encourage ethical behavior by students and/or faculty.

This item can be assigned as a Discussion Question. Students’ responses will vary. The following are specific steps your college or university can take to create a more ethical environment:  Reduce job-related pressures  Make it clear what’s okay and not okay.  Model the desired behavior (“Walk the Talk”  Reinforce the desired behavior, not the undesirable behavior.  Take it seriously.

14-5. You need to select a nanny for your or a relative’s child, and want someone ethical.

What would you do to help ensure you ended up hiring someone ethical?

Asking questions about values and paying attention to both the answers and the nonverbal cues that accompany them, finding out how the nanny acted in past situations, ..

Chapter 14: Building Positive Employee Relations

14-8

and clarifying expectations as fully as possible, will all go a long way toward ensuring that the nanny is ethical.

14-6. You believe your coworker is being bullied. How would you verify this and what would you do about it if it is true?

It is important to conduct a full investigation of suspicions. Asking trusted employees for feedback on performance in the unit on a regular basis often will assist in clarifying where problems exist. Once the allegations are clear, meeting with the employee to discuss the situation, and their reasons is crucial. Depending on the situation, the reasons, and the severity of the offense, progressive discipline would be the next step.

14-7. Define employee relations and discuss at least four methods for managing it.

Employee relations is the activity that involves establishing and maintaining the positive employee–employer relationships that contribute to satisfactory productivity, motivation, morale, and discipline, and to maintaining a positive, productive, and cohesive work environment.

Individual and Group Activities: 14-8. Working individually or in groups, interview managers or administrators at your employer or college in order to determine the extent to which the employer or college endeavors to build two-way communication, and the specific types of programs used. Do the managers think they are effective? What do the employees (or faculty members) think of the programs in use at the employer or college?

Encourage students to be precise and inquisitive in their pursuit of this information.

14-9. Working individually or in groups, obtain copies of the student handbook for your college and determine to what extent there is a formal process through which students can air grievances. Based on your contacts with other students, has it been an effective grievance process? Why or why not?

Ask what effect this has on the sense of organizational justice.

14-10. Working individually or in groups, determine the nature of the academic discipline process in your college. Do you think it is effective? Based on what you read in this chapter, would you recommend any modifications?

Encourage students to be inquisitive and insightful as they examine this critical and real issue.

14-11. Appendices A and B at the end of this book list the knowledge someone studying for the HRCI (Appendix A) or SHRM (Appendix B) certification exam needs to have in each area of human resource management (such as in Strategic Management and

..

Chapter 14: Building Positive Employee Relations

14-9

Workforce Planning). In groups of several students, do four things: (1) review Appendix A and/or B; (2) identify the material in this chapter that relates to the Appendix A and/or B required knowledge lists; (3) write four multiple-choice exam questions on this material that you believe would be suitable for inclusion in the HRCI exam and/or the SHRM exam; and (4) if time permits, have someone from your team post your team’s questions in front of the class, so that students in all teams can answer the exam questions created by the other teams.

Material from this chapter that applies to the HRCI exam would include: the meaning of ethics, ethics and the law, ethics fair treatment and justice, what shapes ethics behavior at work, ethics policies and codes, the organization’s culture, HR ethics activities, building two-way communications, formal disciplinary appeals processes, discipline without punishment, employee privacy, grounds for dismissal, avoiding wrongful discharge suits, personal supervisory liability, the termination interview, layoffs and the plant closing law, and adjusting to downsizings and mergers.

14-12. In a research study at Ohio State University, a professor found that even honest people, left to their own devices, would steal from their employers. In this study, the researchers gave financial services workers the opportunity to steal a small amount of money after participating in an after-work project for which the pay was inadequate. Would the employees steal to make up for the underpayment? In most cases, yes. Employees who scored low on an honesty test stole whether or not their office had an ethics program that said stealing from the company was illegal.

Employees who scored high on the honesty test also stole, but only if their office did not have such an employee ethics program—the “honest” people didn’t steal if there was an ethics policy.

Individually or in groups, answer these questions: Do you think findings like these are generalizable? In other words, would they apply across the board to employees in other types of companies and situations? If your answer is yes, what do you think this implies about the need for and wisdom of having an ethics program.

You should receive a wide variety of responses to this question. It is a real question of whether the employees who scored high on honesty tests will, in fact, respond differently based on the existence of an ethics policy.

Experiential Exercise: Discipline or Not? Purpose: The purpose of this exercise is to provide you with some experience in analyzing and handling an actual disciplinary action.

Required Understanding: Students should be thoroughly familiar with the facts of the following incident, titled “Botched Batch.” Do not read the “award” or “discussion” sections until after the groups have completed their deliberations.

..

Chapter 14: Building Positive Employee Relations

14-10

How to Set up the Exercise/Instructions: Divide the class into groups of four or five students.

Each group should take the arbitrator’s point of view and assume that they are to analyze the case and make the arbitrator’s decision. Review the case again at this point, but please do not read the award and discussion sections. Each group should answer the following questions: 14-13. Based on what you read in this chapter, including all relevant guidelines, what would your decision be if you were the arbitrator? Why? Students can share their decision with the class.

14-14. Do you think that after their experience in this arbitration the parties involved will be more or less inclined to settle grievances by themselves without resorting to arbitration?

Students can give their opinions on whether the parties will grievances or resort to arbitration Botched Batch Facts: A computer department employee made an entry error that botched an entire run of computer reports. Efforts to rectify the situation produced a second set of improperly run reports.

Because of the series of errors, the employer incurred extra costs of $2,400, plus a weekend of overtime work by other computer department staffers. Management suspended the employee for 3 days for negligence, and revoked a promotion for which the employee had previously been approved.

Protesting the discipline, the employee stressed that she had attempted to correct her error in the early stages of the run by notifying the manager of computer operations of her mistake.

Maintaining that the resulting string of errors could have been avoided if the manager had followed up on her report and stopped the initial run, the employee argued that she had been treated unfairly because the manager had not been disciplined even though he compounded the problem, whereas she was severely punished. Moreover, citing her “impeccable” work record and management’s acknowledgment that she had always been a “model employee,” the employee insisted that the denial of her previously approved promotion was “unconscionable.”

(Please do not read beyond this point until after you have answered the two questions.)

Award: The arbitrator upholds the 3-day suspension, but decides that the promotion should be restored.

Discussion: “There is no question,” the arbitrator notes, that the employee’s negligent act “set in motion the train of events that resulted in running two complete sets of reports reflecting improper information.” Stressing that the employer incurred substantial cost because of the error, the arbitrator cites “unchallenged” testimony that management had commonly issued 3-day suspensions for similar infractions in the past. Thus, the arbitrator decides, the employer acted with just cause in meting out an “evenhanded” punishment for the negligence.

..

Chapter 14: Building Positive Employee Relations

14-11

Turning to the denial of the already approved promotion, the arbitrator says that this action should be viewed “in the same light as a demotion for disciplinary reasons.” In such cases, the arbitrator notes, management’s decision normally is based on a pattern of unsatisfactory behavior, an employee’s inability to perform, or similar grounds. Observing that management had never before reversed a promotion as part of a disciplinary action, the arbitrator says that by tacking on the denial of the promotion in this case, the employer substantially varied its disciplinary policy from its past practice. Because this action on management’s part was not “evenhanded,” the arbitrator rules, the promotion should be restored.

Application Case: Enron, Ethics, and Organizational Culture 14-15. Based on what you read in this chapter, summarize in one page or less how you would explain Enron’s ethical meltdown.

Lax oversight by the six-person audit committee was a major contributor to the collapse of the firm. Executives carried out a series of complex financial transactions designed to remove debt from the balance sheet and artificially inflate the revenue.

14-16. It is said that when one securities analyst tried to confront Enron’s CEO about the firm’s unusual accounting statements, the CEO publicly used vulgar language to describe the analyst, and that Enron employees subsequently thought doing so was humorous. If true, what does that say about Enron’s ethical culture?

Enron promoted a culture of reckless financial deals, avarice, and deceit. A sense of social responsibility, ethical behavior, and respect appeared completely absent.

14-17. This case and chapter had something to say about how organizational culture influences ethical behavior. What role do you think culture played at Enron? Give five specific examples of things Enron’s CEO could have done to create a healthy ethical culture.

Create an independent external board of directors to oversee the goals and corporate strategies, create and implement effective auditing practices, select a CEO who is responsible for the ethical behavior of the organization, remove the CEO if not effective, and encourage employees to report unethical behavior and take appropriate corrective counseling.

Continuing Case: Carter Cleaning Company – Guaranteeing Fair Treatment 14-18. What would you do if you were Jennifer, and why?

The difficulty is that even though they have always “felt strongly about not allowing employees to smoke, eat, or drink in their stores,” they had apparently never established any policies about this. Given this, it seems appropriate to give them a strong verbal

..

Chapter 14: Building Positive Employee Relations

14-12

warning, including the explanation that future violations will result in more severe disciplinary action.

14-19. Should a disciplinary system be established at Carter Cleaning Centers?

Definitely, a corrective coaching program should be implemented immediately. This type of program will help employees understand why their behavior/performance is not meeting standards. It will also help protect the organization from future litigation claims.

In this situation, the staff may not have realized the severity of their actions.

14-20. If so, what should it cover? How would you suggest it deal with a situation such as the one with the errant counter people?

It should cover all behavior and performance that is expected of employees. It would identify the steps of the process, including verbal warnings, written warnings, and dismissal.

14-21. How would you deal with the store manager?

The real question is whether the store manager knew about their beliefs about eating in the store. If he or she did, then a written warning is appropriate – if not, then a strong verbal warning is the best action.

Hotel Paris: Improving Performance at the Hotel Paris – The Hotel Paris’s New Ethics, Justice, and Fair Treatment Process 14-22. Based on what you learned in this chapter, what do you think of the adequacy and effectiveness of the steps Lisa has taken so far?

Students’ answers will vary however, it was very smart of Lisa to do her research and present a fully thought-out plan to the board. Students’ answers will be more robust.

14-23. List three more specific steps Hotel Paris should take with respect to each individual human research function (selection, training, and so on) to improve the level of ethics in the company.

Students’ answers will vary. However, some possible steps would be to incorporate honesty testing in selection, to train employees using ethics cases, and to discipline immediately and severely for ethics breaches on the part of any employee.

..

Chapter 14: Building Positive Employee Relations

14-13

14-24. Based on what you learned in this chapter, write a short (less than one page) explanation Lisa can use to sell to top management the need to further improve the hotel chain’s fairness and justice processes.

Senior leadership should be educated that claims of unfair treatment can be both expensive and expansive. Litigation to defend a claim can be costly and result in an unpopular reflection of the organization in the media. Also, recent cases have included personal liability on the part of senior management. Senior management can have the most significant impact on creating and maintaining a culture of fair treatment.

Key Terms: Employee Relations – The activity that involves establishing and maintaining the positive employee–employer relationships that contribute to satisfactory productivity, motivation, morale, and discipline, and to maintaining a positive, productive, and cohesive work environment.

Fair Treatment – Reflects concrete actions, such as “employees are treated with respect,” and “employees are treated fairly.”

Procedural Justice – Refers to just procedures in the allocation of rewards or discipline in which the actual results or outcomes are evenhanded and fair.

Distributive Justice – Refers to a system of distributing rewards and discipline in which the actual results or outcomes are evenhanded and fair.

Social Responsibility – Refers to the extent to which companies should and do channel resources toward improving one or more segments of society other than the firm’s owners or stockholders.

Organizational Climate – The perceptions a company’s employees share about the firm’s psychological environment; for instance, in terms of things like concern for employee’s wellbeing, supervisory behavior, flexibility, appreciation, ethics, empowerment, political behaviors, and rewards.

Suggesstion Teams – Temporary teams whose members work on specific analytical assignments, such as how to cut costs or raise productivity.

Problem-Solving Teams – Teams that identify and research work processes and develop solutions to work-related problems.

Quality Circle – A special type of formal problem-solving team; usually composed of 6 to 12 specially trained employees who meet once a week to solve problems affecting their work area.

..

Chapter 14: Building Positive Employee Relations

14-14

Self-Managed/Self-Directed Work Team – A small (usually 8 to 10 members) group of carefully selected, trained, and empowered employees who basically run themselves with little or no outside supervision, usually for the purpose of acomplishing a specific task or mission.

Ethics – The study of standards of conduct and moral judgment; also the standards of right conduct.

Organizational Culture – The characteristics values, traditions, and behaviors a company’s employees share.

Electronic Communications Privacy Act (ECPA) – The ECPA is a federal law intended to help restrict interception and monitoring of oral and wire communications.

..

Part Five Enrichment Topics in Human Resource Management Chapter 15 Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining Lecture Outline: The Labor Movement Improving Performance: The Strategic Context Why Do Workers Organize?

HR and the Gig Economy: Will Uber Drivers Organize?

Employee Engagement and Unionization What Do Unions Want?

The AFL-CIO and the SEIU Unions And The Law Period of Strong Encouragement: The Norris LaGuardia (1932) and National Labor Relations (or Wagner) Acts (1935) Period of Modified Encouragement Coupled with Regulation: The Taft-Hartley Act (1947) Unfair Union Labor Practices The Union Drive and Election Step 1. Initial Contact Step 2. Obtaining Authorization Cards Step 3. Hold a Hearing Step 4. The Campaign Step 5. The Election How to Lose an NLRB Election Evidence-Based HR: What to Expect the Union to do to Win the Election The Supervisor’s Role Know Your Employment Law Decertification Elections: Ousting the Union Improving Performance: HR Practices Around the Globe The Collective Bargaining Process What Is Collective Bargaining?

What Is Good Faith?

The Negotiating Team Costing the Contract Bargaining Items Building Negotiating Skills Bargaining Guidelines Impasses, Mediation, and Strikes Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses

..

Chapter 15: Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining

15- 2

Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media The Contract Agreement Dealing With Disputes And Grievances Sources of Grievances The Grievance Procedure Guidelines for Handling Grievances Improving Performance: HR Tools For Line Managers and Small Businesses The Union Movement Today And Tomorrow What Are Unions Doing About It Cooperative Labor-Management Relations Chapter Review

Where Are We Now… The main purpose of this chapter is to help you deal effectively with unions and grievances. After briefly discussing the history of the American labor movement, we describe the basic law, including unfair labor practices. We explain labor negotiations, including the union actions you can expect during the union campaign and election. And we explain what you can expect during the actual bargaining sessions, and how to handle grievances.

Interesting Issues: In early 2018, Walmart raised its starting hourly wages to $11 and gave $1,000 bonuses to employees. Walmart’s low-cost leader strategy has long meant low wages and personnel costs and difficult labor relations. Walmart’s recent pay and bonus moves suggest that its labor relations strategies may be evolving. We’ll see if this is happening, and if so, why.

Learning Objectives: 15-1. Present a brief history of the American labor movement.

15-2. Give five examples of unfair union practices and of unfair employer practices in labor law.

15-3. Present three examples of what a supervisor should or should not do during the union drive and election.

15-4. Illustrate with five examples bargaining that is not in good faith.

15-5. Develop a grievance procedure.

15-6. Give an example of cooperative labor relations.

Annotated Outline: I.

The Labor Movement – unions remain influential. Almost 15 million U.S. workers belong to unions—about 11.1% of the total number of men and women working in America.

Furthermore, don’t assume that unions affect employers only negatively.

..

Chapter 15: Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining

15- 3

Most unions are in the public sector as compared to the private sector.

A. Improving Performance: The Strategic Context B. Why Do Workers Organize? – the urge to unionize often seems to boil down to the belief on the part of workers that it is only through unity that they can get their fair share of the pie. It is sometimes the result of workers trying to protect themselves from management’s whims. Union workers tend to receive significantly more pay, holidays, sick leave, unpaid leave, insurance plan benefits, long-term disability benefits, and various other benefits than nonunion workers do. Unions seem to have reduced the impact of downsizings and wage cuts in most industries, in part because union employees are not entirely “at will.” Low morale, fear of job loss, and poor communication (in other words, poor employee relations) also foster unionization.

C. HR and the Gig economy: Will Uber Drivers Organize?

D. Employee Engagement and Unionization – paying attention to employee engagement levels within your organization helps to foster positive relationships between employees and management and decreases the likelihood of a workforce seeking union representation.

E. What Do Unions Want? – unions have two sets of aims − one for union security and one for improved wages, hours, working conditions, and benefits for their members.

1. Union Security – the five types of union security are closed shop, union shop, agency shop, preferential shop, and maintenance of membership arrangement.

2. Improved Wages, Hours, and Benefits – the typical labor agreement also gives the union a role in other HR activities, including recruiting, selecting, compensating, promoting, training, and discharging employees.

3. Right to work is a term used to describe “state statutory or constitutional provisions banning the requirement of union membership as a condition of employment.” Right-to-work laws don’t outlaw unions. They do outlaw (within those states) any form of union security.

F. The AFL-CIO and the SEIU – the American Federation of Labor and Congress of Industrial Organizations (AFL-CIO) is a voluntary federation of about 57 national and international labor unions in the United States. The AFL and CIO merged in 1955. The three layers of structure in the AFL-CIO are the local union (a single chapter in a national union), the national union, and the national federation. Changes have occurred recently. Four big unions have withdrawn from the AFL-CIO and have established the Change to Win Coalition. The Service Employees International Union (SEIU) is one of them. They are the fastest growing federation with more than 2.2 million members.

II.

Unions and the Law – there were no special labor laws until about 1930, so employers were virtually unrestrained in their behavior toward unions. Since the Great Depression, in response to changing public attitudes, values, and economic conditions, labor law has gone through three clear changes: from strong encouragement of unions, to modified encouragement coupled with regulation, and finally, to detailed regulation of internal union affairs.

A. Period of Strong Encouragement: The Norris-LaGuardia (1932) and the National Labor Relations (or Wagner) Acts (1935) – the Norris-LaGuardia Act guaranteed to

..

Chapter 15: Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining

15- 4

each employee the right to bargain collectively free from interference, restraint, or coercion, but it did little to restrain employers from fighting labor organizations. The National Labor Relations (Wagner) Act of 1935 (1) banned certain unfair labor practices; (2) provided for secret-ballot elections and majority rule for determining whether a firm’s employees were to unionize; and (3) created the National Labor Relations Board (NLRB) for enforcing these two provisions.

1. Unfair Employer Labor Practices – as deemed by the Wagner Act, a) it is unfair for employers to interfere with, restrain, or coerce employees in exercising their legally sanctioned right of self-organization; b) it is unfair for company representatives to dominate or interfere with either the formation or the administration of labor unions; c) companies are prohibited from discriminating in any way against employees for their legal union activities; d) employers are forbidden to discharge or discriminate against employees simply because the latter file unfair practice charges against the company; and e) it is unfair for employers to refuse to bargain collectively with their employees’ duly chosen representatives.

2. From 1935 to 1947 – union membership increased quickly after passage of the Wagner Act in 1935, but the tide had begun to turn by the mid-1940s.

B. Period of Modified Encouragement Coupled with Regulation: The Taft-Hartley Act (1947) – the law amended the Wagner Act with provisions aimed at limiting unions in four ways: (1) by prohibiting unfair union labor practices, (2) by enumerating the rights of employees as union members, (3) by enumerating the rights of employers, and (4) by allowing the President of the United States to temporarily bar national emergency strikes.

C. Unfair Union Labor Practices – according to the Taft-Hartley Act, a) unions cannot restrain or coerce employees from exercising their guaranteed bargaining rights; b) unions cannot cause an employer to discriminate in any way against an employee in order to encourage or discourage his/her membership in a union; c) unions cannot refuse to bargain in good faith with the employer about wages, hours, and other employment conditions (certain strikes and boycotts are also unfair union labor practices); and d) unions cannot engage in featherbedding.

1. Rights of Employees – the Taft-Hartley Act protects employees from their unions.

2. Rights of Employers – the Taft-Hartley Act explicitly gives employers full freedom to express their views concerning union organization. The only major restraint is that employers must avoid threats, promises, coercion, and direct interference with workers who are trying to reach a decision. The employer (1) cannot meet with employees on company time within 24 hours of an election, or (2) suggest to employees that they vote against the union while they are at home or in the employer’s office, although he/she can do so while in their work area or where they normally gather.

3. National Emergency Strikes – the Taft-Hartley Act allows the U.S. President to intervene in national emergency strikes. The President may appoint a board of inquiry and, based on its report,

..

Chapter 15: Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining

15- 5

apply for an injunction restraining the strike for 60 days. If the parties don’t reach a settlement during that time, the President can have the injunction extended for another 20 days, during which time employees take a secret ballot to ascertain their willingness to accept the employer’s last offer.

4. Period of Detailed Regulation of Internal Union Affairs: The LandrumGriffin Act (1959) (officially, the Labor Management Reporting and Disclosure Act) – an amendment to the Wagner Act, it is aimed at protecting union members from possible wrongdoing on the part of their unions. This law provides a bill of rights for union members; lays out rules regarding union elections; regulates the kind of person who can serve as a union officer; greatly expands the list of unlawful employer actions; and requires reports from unions and employers, covering such practices as the use of labor relations consultants. Senate investigators discovered flagrant examples of employer wrongdoing. Employers and their “labor relations consultants” had bribed union agents and officers.

III.

The Union Drive and Election – there are five basic steps: A. Step 1. Initial Contact – the union determines the employees’ interest in organizing, and an organizing committee is established. The initiative for the first contact between the employees and the union may come from the employees, from a union already representing other employees of the firm, or from a union representing workers elsewhere. Once an employer becomes a target, a union official usually assigns a representative to assess employee interest. He/she identifies employees who would make a good organizing committee, and educates them on the benefits of forming a union, the law and procedures involved in forming a local union, and the issues management is likely to raise during a campaign. The union must follow certain rules when it starts contacting employees.

1. Labor Relations Consultants are outside advisors (such as law firms, researchers, psychologists, labor relations specialists, or public relations firms) used by both management and unions to provide advice and related services to assist in the winning of elections.

2. Union Salting is an organizing tactic by which full-time undercover union organizers are hired by unwitting employers. A U.S. Supreme Court decision held the practice to be legal. Critics claim that “salts” interfere with business operations and harass employees.

B. Step 2. Obtaining Authorization Cards – this step is necessary for the union to petition the NLRB for the right to hold an election. Thirty percent of the eligible employees in an appropriate bargaining unit must sign authorization cards before the union can petition the NLRB for an election. During this stage, both union and management typically use various forms of propaganda. However, neither side can threaten, bribe, or coerce employees, and an employer may not make promises that

..

Chapter 15: Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining

15- 6

benefit employees or make unilateral changes in terms and conditions of employment.

C. Step 3. Hold a Hearing – one of three things can occur once the union collects the authorization cards: 1) no hearing is needed if the employer chooses not to contest union recognition and a consent election is held immediately; 2) if the employer chooses not to contest the union’s right to an election, and/or scope of the bargaining unit, and/or which employees are eligible to vote in the election, no hearing is needed and the parties can stipulate an election; or 3) if an employer does wish to contest the union’s right, it can insist on a hearing to determine those issues. An employer’s decision about whether to insist on a hearing is a strategic one based on the facts of each case and whether it feels it needs additional time to develop a campaign to try to persuade a majority of its employees not to elect a union to represent them. The hearing addresses several issues. If the results of the hearing are favorable for the union, the NLRB will order holding an election, issue a Notice of Election to that effect, and send NLRB Form 707.

D. Step 4. The Campaign – during this stage, the union and the employer appeal to employees for their votes, but neither side can threaten, bribe, or coerce employees.

E. Step 5. The Election – a secret ballot election is held within 30 to 60 days after the NLRB issues its Decision and Direction of Election. The NLRB provides the ballots, voting booth, and ballot box, and counts the votes and certifies the results of the election. The union becomes the employees’ representative if it wins the election by a majority of the votes cast.

F. How to Lose an NLRB Election – the four sure ways to lose an election are: 1. Asleep at the switch 2. Appointing a committee 3. Concentrating on money and benefits 4. Delegating too much to division G. Evidence-Based HR: What to Expect the Union to Do to Win the Election – research suggests that pursuing a “rank and file strategy” is the best way for unions to win elections.

H. The Supervisor’s Role – supervisors are an employer’s first line of defense when it comes to the unionizing effort. Supervisors need some special training because they can discover the early signs of union activity or they can inadvertently take actions that hurt their employers’ union-related efforts. Supervisors must be knowledgeable about what they can and can’t do to legally hamper organizing activities.

1. Some TIPS: The Supervisor’s Role in the Unionizing Effort – one company helps its supervisors remember what they may and may not do with respect to unionization with the acronyms TIPS and FORE. For example, the manager should remember TIPS for what he or she may not do: threaten, interrogate, promise, or spy. To remember what to do to discourage unionization, the supervisor may remember FORE: facts, opinion, rules, and experience.

I. Know Your Employment Law – Rules Regarding Literature and Solicitation J. Decertification Elections: Ousting the Union – the same law that grants employees the right to unionize also gives them a way to legally terminate their union’s right to

..

Chapter 15: Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining

15- 7

represent them, which is known as decertification. Decertification campaigns don’t differ much from certification campaigns.

K. Improving Performance: HR Practices Around the Globe IV.

The Collective Bargaining Process A. What Is Collective Bargaining? – according to the National Labor Relations Act, collective bargaining “is the performance of the mutual obligation of the employer and the representatives of the employees to meet at reasonable times and confer in good faith with respect to wages, hours, and terms and conditions of employment, or the negotiation of an agreement, or any question arising thereunder, and the execution of a written contract incorporating any agreement reached if requested by either party, but such obligation does not compel either party to agree to a proposal or require the making of a concession.”

B. What Is Good Faith? – in collective bargaining, good faith means that both parties communicate and negotiate, that proposals are matched with counterproposals, and that both parties make every reasonable effort to arrive at an agreement.

C. The Negotiating Team – both union and management send a negotiating team to the bargaining table. It is vital that the team understand the impact, particularly the financial impact, of the things they either propose or accept in negotiations.

D. Costing the Contract – collative bargaining experts emphasize the need to cost the union’s demands carefully – know how it will impact you financially.

E. Bargaining Items – labor law sets out categories of items that are subject to bargaining: mandatory, voluntary, and illegal items. Mandatory items are items that a party must bargain over if they are introduced by the other party. Voluntary (permissible) items are neither mandatory nor illegal; they become a part of the negotiations only through the joint agreement of both management and union. Illegal items are forbidden by law.

F. Building Negotiating Skills – hammering out a satisfactory labor agreement requires negotiating skills. Experienced negotiators use leverage, desire, time, competition, information, credibility, and judgment to improve their bargaining positions.

Leverage means factors that help or hinder the negotiator.

G. Bargaining Hints – according to expert Reed Richardson, the following is advise for bargainers: Be sure you have set clear objectives for every bargaining item, and you understand on what grounds the objectives are established; do not hurry; when in doubt, caucus with your associates; be well prepared with firm data supporting your position; always strive to keep some flexibility in your position; don’t just concern yourself with what the other party says and does – find out why; respect the importance of face saving for the other party; constantly be alert to the real intentions of the other party with respect not only to goals but also priorities; be a good listener; build a reputation for being fair but firm; learn to control your emotions – don’t panic; be sure as you make each bargaining move that you know its relationship to all other moves; measure each move against your objectives; pay close attention to the wording of every clause negotiated; remember that collective bargaining negotiations are, by their nature, part of a compromise process; try to understand people and their personalities; and remember that excessive bargainer transparency and openness can backfire.

..

Chapter 15: Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining

15- 8

H. Impasses, Mediation, and Strikes 1. Third Party Involvement – three types of third-party interventions are used to overcome an impasse: mediation, fact-finding, and arbitration. With mediation a neutral third party tries to assist the principals in reaching agreement. A fact finder is a neutral party who studies the issues in a dispute and makes a public recommendation of what a reasonable settlement ought to be.

Arbitration (binding or unbinding) can guarantee a solution to an impasse because the arbitrator often has the power to determine and dictate the settlement terms. Various public and professional agencies make mediators and arbitrators available.

2. Sources of third-party assistance come from various public and professional agencies.

3. Strikes – is a withdrawal of labor. There are four types of strikes: economic strike, unfair labor practice strike, wildcat strike, and sympathy strike. An economic strike results from a failure to agree on the terms of a contract that involve wages, benefits, and conditions of employment. Unfair labor practice strikes are called by unions to protest illegal conduct by the employer. A wildcat strike is an unauthorized strike occurring during the term of a contract. Picketing, or having employees carry signs announcing their concerns near the employer’s place of business is one of the first activities that occur during a strike.

4. Strike Guidelines for Employees – several guidelines are discussed that can minimize confusion during a strike.

I. Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses: Strike Guidelines J. Other “weapons” – to break an impasse include corporate campaigns and boycotts. A corporate campaign is an organized effort by the union that exerts pressure on the corporation by pressuring the company’s other unions, shareholders, directors, customers, creditors, and government agencies, often directly. A boycott is a refusal by employees and other interested parties to buy or use the employer’s product.

K. Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media L. The Contract Agreement may be 20-30 pages or longer, and the main sections cover these subjects: 1) management rights, 2) union security and automatic payroll dues deduction, 3) grievance procedures, 4) arbitration of grievances, 5) disciplinary procedures, 6) compensation rates, 7) hours of work and overtime, 8) benefits: vacations, holidays, insurance, pensions, 9) health and safety provisions, 10) employee security seniority provisions, and 11) contract expiration date.

V.

Dealing with Disputes and Grievances A. Sources of Grievances – employees may use just about any factor involving wages, hours, or conditions of employment as the basis of a grievance.

..

Chapter 15: Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining

15- 9

B. The Grievance Procedure – it is specified in most collective bargaining contracts; it specifies the various steps in the procedure, time limits, and specific rules. Union grievance procedures differ from firm to firm.

C. Guidelines for Handling Grievances – Do’s: As a manager, do investigate and handle each and every case as though it may eventually result in an arbitration hearing; talk with the employee about his/her grievance; require the union to identify specific contractual provisions allegedly violated; comply with the contractual time limits of the company for handling the grievance; visit the work area of the grievance; determine whether there were any witnesses; examine the grievant’s personnel record; fully examine prior grievance records; treat the union representative as your equal; hold your grievance discussions privately; and fully inform your own supervisor of grievance matters. Don’ts: discuss the case with the union steward alone – the grievant should be there; make arrangements with individual employees that are inconsistent with the labor arrangement; hold back the remedy if the company is wrong; admit the binding effect of a past practice; relinquish to the union your rights as a manager; settle grievances on the basis of what is fair – stick to the labor agreement; bargain over items not covered by the contract; treat as subject to arbitration claims demanding the discipline or discharge of managers; give long written grievance answers; trade a grievance settlement for a grievance withdrawal; deny grievances on the premise that your “hands have been tied by management;” and do not agree to informal amendments in the contract.

VI.

The Union Movement Today and Tomorrow – union membership has gradually declined in America from about 20% of the workforce in 1938 (when 17.8 million workers belonged to unions), to about 11% ( just over 14 million workers) recently.

A. What Are Unions Doing About it – unions are becoming more aggressive and becoming more proactive in coordinating their efforts including extending them abroad. Several recent NLRB decisions have supported union efforts.

B. Cooperative Labor-Management Relations – unions that have a cooperative relationship with management can play an important role in overcoming barriers to the effective adoption of practices that have been linked to organizational competitiveness.

Chapter Review Chapter Section Summaries: 15-1. The labor movement is important. About 15 million U.S. workers belong to unions—about 11% of the total.

15-2. To understand unions and their impact, one should understand the interplay between unions and the law.

15-3. When unions begin organizing, all managers and supervisors usually get involved, so it’s essential to understand the mechanics of the union drive and election.

15-4. The employer and union hammer out an agreement via the collective bargaining process.

15-5. A manager may become involved with disputes and grievances.

..

Chapter 15: Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining

15- 10

15-6. Union federations continue to be aggressive about organizing workers, and unions are going global, so cooperative labor relations is both possible and a sensible aim.

Discussion Questions: 15-1. Why do employees join unions? What are the advantages and disadvantages of being a union member?

The urge to unionize often comes down to the belief on the part of workers that it’s only through unity that they can get their fair share of the “pie” and also protect themselves from the arbitrary whims of management. The bottom line is that low morale, fear of job loss, and poor communication (in other words, poor employee relations) also foster unionization.

Several factors contributed to the decline of unions. Unions traditionally appealed mostly to blue-collar workers, and the proportion of blue-collar jobs has been decreasing.

Globalization increased competition and pressured employers to cut costs and boost productivity, often by shifting production offshore. Other factors pressuring employers and unions included the deregulation of trucking, airlines, and communications, and laws (such as occupational safety) that somewhat reduced the need for unions. Workers in unionized companies are pressured to join the union. They feel isolated if they don’t join.

15-2. Discuss four sure ways to lose an NLRB election.

The four sure ways to lose an election are listed and described in the text: 1) being asleep at the switch; 2) appointing a committee; 3) concentrating on money and benefits; and 4) delegating too much to divisions or branches. Student answers will vary.

15-3. Briefly illustrate how labor law has gone through a cycle of repression and encouragement.

To understand how to deal with unions, one should understand labor law and unfair labor practices. The laws encouraging the union movement included the Norris–LaGuardia and National Labor Relations (Wagner) Acts of the 1930s. These Acts outlawed certain unfair employer labor practices and made it easier for unions to organize. The Taft–Hartley or Labor Management Relations Act of 1947 addressed keeping unions from restraining or coercing employees, and listed certain unfair union labor practices. In the 1950s, the Landrum–Griffin Act (the Labor Management Reporting and Disclosure Act) further protected union members from possible wrongdoing on the part of their unions. Student responses will vary.

15-4. Explain in detail each step in a union drive and election.

Each step is described in detail in the text: 1) initial contact involves the union determination of the employees' interest in organizing and forming an organizing committee; 2) obtaining authorization cards is where the union seeks to obtain enough signatures on authorization cards to petition the NLRB to conduct an election; 3) holding a hearing is done by the

..

Chapter 15: Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining

15- 11

NLRB to determine the appropriate bargaining unit and the legality of the authorization cards; 4) the campaign is where both sides present the issues to convince employees to vote one way or the other; and 5) the election is conducted by the NLRB through secret ballot.

15-5. Define impasse, mediation, and strike, and explain the techniques that are used to overcome an impasse.

Impasse occurs when the parties are not able to move further toward settlement. Mediation is intervention in which a neutral third party tries to assist the principals in reaching agreement. A strike is the withdrawal of labor. An impasse might be overcome through mediation, fact-finders, arbitration, or the economic pressures of a strike or lock-out, or boycott.

Individual and Group Activities: 15-6. You are the manager of a small manufacturing plant. The union contract covering most of your employees is about to expire. Working individually or in groups, discuss how to prepare for union contract negotiations.

You need to know what is good faith bargaining and what constitutes a violation of good faith bargaining. Although as a supervisor you will not likely be involved in the negotiations, you can commit violations of good faith bargaining by making a unilateral change in working conditions or through the commission of an unfair labor practice. Also, you need to be a vehicle to give information about employee attitudes and concerns to those conducting the bargaining. The list given in the chapter provides a good summary of how to prepare for bargaining.

15-7. Working individually or in groups, use Internet resources to find situations where company management and the union reached an impasse at some point during their negotiation process, but eventually resolved the impasse. Describe the issues on both sides that led to the impasse. How did they move past the impasse? What were the final outcomes?

The students should be able to find several examples in the airline industry, professional sports industry, and the package delivery industry, just to mention a few.

15-8. Appendices A and B at the end of this book list the knowledge someone studying for the HRCI (Appendix A) or SHRM (Appendix B) certification exam needs to have in each area of human resource management (such as in Strategic Management and Workforce Planning). In groups of several students, do four things: (1) review Appendix A and/or B; (2) identify the material in this chapter that relates to the Appendix A and/or B required knowledge lists; (3) write four multiple-choice exam questions on this material that you believe would be suitable for inclusion in the HRCI exam and/or the SHRM exam; and (4) if time permits, have someone from your team

..

Chapter 15: Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining

15- 12

post your team’s questions in front of the class, so that students in all teams can answer the exam questions created by the other teams.

Material from this chapter that would be relevant to the HRCI test includes: history of the American Union Movement, why workers organize, what do unions want, the AFL-CIO, unions and the law, the union drive and election, the collective bargaining process, grievances, and the union movement today and tomorrow. In short, virtually the entire chapter is applicable to material covered on the test.

15-9. Several years ago, 8,000 Amtrak workers agreed not to disrupt service by walking out, at least not until a court hearing was held. Amtrak had asked the courts for a temporary restraining order, and the Transport Workers Union of America was actually pleased to postpone its walkout. The workers were apparently not upset at Amtrak, but at Congress for failing to provide enough funding for Amtrak. What, if anything, can an employer do when employees threaten to go on strike, not because of what the employer did, but what a third party—in this case, Congress—has done or not done? What laws would prevent the union from going on strike in this case?

Employers can do several things…none of which are explained in this chapter. They can seek an injunction from a judge, they can file suit, they can seek to meet with the union and help them with their demands against the third party, etc. There are some laws and executive orders that prevent certain workers (transportation as well as safety and security personnel) from striking. The only one mentioned in this chapter is the Taft-Hartley Act which allows the President of the United States to temporarily bar national emergency strikes.

Experiential Exercise: The Organizing Campaign at Sam’s Cupcake Shop Purpose: The purpose of this exercise is to give you practice in dealing with some of the elements of a union-organizing campaign.

Required Understanding: You should be familiar with the material covered in this chapter, as well as the following incident, “The Organizing Campaign at Sam’s Cupcake Shop.”

Incident: Sam’s Cupcake Shop sells baked goods (croissants, cupcakes, rolls, cakes, etc.) and serves light meals such as breakfast and salads through its chain of ten small retail stores in the borough of Manhattan in New York City. Each store is staffed with about 9 employees (plus one manager), some of whom do the cooking and some of whom staff the counter and sell the food items. As with Sam’s other stores, the Sam’s Cupcake Shop on First Avenue is staffed primarily with recent (legal) immigrants to America, all of who are paid at or just above minimum wage.

Everything at the First Avenue store seemed to be going smoothly, but that apparent tranquility ended abruptly in July 27, 2018. That was the day that Anesha, the First Avenue store’s manager called Taylor Brook, Sam Cupcake’s human resource manager, to tell her that they had “an employee problem.”

The problem, Anesha said, was that she’d heard from a few employees that the Service Employees International Union was trying to organize Sam’s Cupcake Store employees. Taylor’s

..

Chapter 15: Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining

15- 13

first reaction was one of caution, particularly because food service employees are historically difficult to organize –“they don’t stay in their jobs long enough to unionize them,” to paraphrase one union leader. Unfortunately, Anesha said she had already taken what she called “sensible steps” to blunt the unionization effort. She had, first, explained to her employees that if costs went up because they unionized, then “we’d probably have to close this shop.” She said she also promised better work schedules if they “ignored” the union, and told them they were prohibited from discussing union matters during work time. “And don’t worry” she said to Taylor, “I’ve got a list of the employees who are pushing for the union.”

The more Anesha talked, the more concerned Taylor became, not just with the union but with the possible consequences of Anesha’s efforts. She wondered particularly if Anesha’s actions could cause problems down the road for Sam’s Cupcakes with the NLRB. As it turned, she didn’t have long to wait for an answer. The following week pickets from the union and its supporters appeared in front of the First Avenue store carrying signs decrying the company’s “unfair labor practices.” At that point Sam came into Taylor’s office and said, “If they think they can railroad me into giving them big raises they are wrong; I am closing that store down.” Taylor was in a quandary as to how to reply to Sam, and in general, what she should do.

How to Set up the Exercise/Instructions: Divide the class into groups of several students. Assume that you are labor relations consultants retained by Taylor to identify the problems and issues involved and to advise Taylor and Sam of the company’s right and obligations, as well as the implications of what’s transpired so far, add finally what to do next. Each group will spend the time allotted discussing the issues. Then, outline those issues, as well as an action plan for Taylor and Sam. What should they do next? Can Sam really close the store down?

If time permits, a spokesperson from each group should list on the board the issues involved and the group’s recommendations.

Student responses will vary but should use the information found in the text to explain and defend their answers: including the Do’s and Don’ts, TIPS, and FORE.

Application Case: Organizing New Media Employees at Vice Media 15-10. The WGA did not have to call a strike at Vice. Why do you think that is? If they struck, what employer tactics would you have suggested to fight back once the strike began?

The WGA did not have to call a strike at Vice because unions and new-media employers understand what new-media employees want from employers: editorial independence, good pay and benefits, fair treatment, and the ability to be heard. If they struck, Vice could hire replacement writers or engage in collective bargaining. Good faith bargaining is the cornerstone of effective labor–management relations. It means that both parties communicate and negotiate, match proposals with counter proposals, and make a reasonable effort to arrive at an agreement.

..

Chapter 15: Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining

15- 14

15-11. What do you think accounts for the fact that Vice Media agreed fairly quickly to recognize the union, whereas other new-media firms simply closed down? What does this mean for unions like the WGA? Vice Media recognized the union because unlike many unionized companies that are downsizing, “new media” is growing fast and needs to retain its current workers and use networking to attract new employees to work on video content for Vice.com and Vicebranded HBO programs. WGA has to tailor its demands to the size of the company so that small new-media firms can afford to meet its demands. Otherwise, the new-media firms will simply close down. For example, the owner of Gothamist and DNA info closed both sites after employees voted to unionize. The owner had warned that it was already running both sites at a loss.

15-12. The organizing campaigns at new-media firms like Vice and Buzzfeed are essentially conflicts between professional and creative people (the WGA) and owners and TV and movie producers. Do you think such conflicts are different in any way than are the conflicts between, say, the United Autoworkers or Teamsters unions against auto and trucking companies? Why? Basically, the conflicts between the WGA and owners are the same as the conflicts between the United Autoworkers and the trucking companies. All workers want good pay and benefits, fair treatment, and the ability to be heard. All employers have to operate their businesses at a profit.

15-13. If you owned a start-up new-media company, how would you react to a union coming in to demand recognition, and why?

Students can discuss the pros and cons of unionization.

Continuing Case: Carter Cleaning Company – The Grievance 15-14. Do you think it is important for Carter Cleaning Company to have a formal grievance process? Why or why not?

Certainly it is important for many reasons. First, it is important from a standpoint of justice and fair treatment. Second, the lack of justice and fair treatment is a prime catalyst for union activity.

15-15. Based on what you know about the Carter Cleaning Company, outline the steps in what you think would be the ideal grievance process for this company.

Because it is a small company, it should be simple and short. One suggestion is a two-step process that begins with a written appeal to the store manager. The second step is to send that appeal to Jennifer and her father for review.

..

Chapter 15: Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining

15- 15

15-16. In addition to the grievance process, can you think of anything else that Carter Cleaning Company might do to make sure grievances and gripes like this one are expressed and are heard by top management?

The grievance procedure is critical. Students may identify many things from the previous chapter’s sections on justice and fair treatment.

The Hotel Paris: Improving Performance at the Hotel – The Hotel Paris’s New Labor Relations Practices 15-17. List and briefly describe what you believe are the three most important steps Hotel Paris management can take now to reduce the likelihood unions will organize more of its employees.

Hotel Paris should train managers and supervisors to recognize the signs of union activity and to deal with it. They should also develop a procedure whereby employees can air their grievances in a productive manner (an appeals process.) Third, the company needs to constantly and positively communicate the benefits their employees have by staying nonunion.

15-18. Write a detailed two-page outline for a “What You Need to Know When the Union Calls” manual. Lisa will distribute this manual to her company’s supervisors and managers, telling them what they need to know about looking out for possible unionizing activity, and how to handle actual organizing process–related supervisory tasks.

Students’ responses will vary but should use the information found in the text to explain and defend their answers, which should include the Do’s and Don’ts, TIPS, and FORE.

Key Terms: Closed Shop – A form of union security in which the company can hire only union members. This was outlawed in 1947 but still exists in some industries (such as printing).

Union Shop – A form of union security in which the company can hire nonunion people, but they must join the union after a prescribed period of time and pay dues. (If they do not, they can be fired.)

Agency Shop – A form of union security in which employees who do not belong to the union must still pay union dues on the assumption that union efforts benefit all workers.

Preferential Shop – Union members get preference in hiring, but the employer can still hire nonunion members.

..

Chapter 15: Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining

15- 16

Right to Work – A term used to describe state statutory or constitutional provisions banning the requirement of union membership as a condition of employment.

Norris-LaGuardia Act of 1932 – This law marked the beginning of the era of strong encouragement of unions and guaranteed to each employee the right to bargain collectively "free from interference, restraint, or coercion."

National Labor Relations (or Wagner) Act – This law banned certain types of unfair labor practices and provided for secret-ballot elections and majority rule for determining whether or not a firm's employees want to unionize.

National Labor Relations Board (NLRB) – The agency created by the Wagner Act to investigate unfair labor practice charges and to provide for secret-ballot elections and majority rule in determining whether or not a firm's employees want a union.

Taft-Hartley Act of 1947 – Also known as the Labor Management Relations Act, this law prohibited unfair union labor practices and enumerated the rights of employees as union members.

It also enumerated the rights of employers.

National Emergency Strikes – Strikes that might "imperil the national health and safety."

Landrum-Griffin Act of 1959 – Also known as the Labor Management Reporting and Disclosure Act, this law is aimed at protecting union members from possible wrongdoing on the part of their unions.

Union Salting – A union-organizing tactic by which workers who are in fact employed full-time by a union as undercover organizers and are hired by unwitting employers.

Authorization Cards – In order to petition for a union election, the union must show that at least 30% of employees may be interested in being unionized. Employees indicate this interest by signing authorization cards.

Bargaining Unit – The group of employees the union will be authorized to represent.

Decertification – Legal process for employees to terminate a union’s right to represent them.

Collective Bargaining – The process through which representatives of management and the union meet to negotiate a labor agreement.

Good Faith Bargaining – Both parties are making every reasonable effort to arrive at agreements; proposals are being matched with counterproposals.

Voluntary (or permissible) Bargaining items – Items in collective bargaining over which bargaining is neither illegal nor mandatory – neither party can be compelled against its wishes to negotiate over those items.

..

Chapter 15: Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining

15- 17

Illegal Bargaining Items – Items in collective bargaining that are forbidden by law; for example, the clause agreeing to hire "union members exclusively" would be illegal in a right-to-work state.

Mandatory Bargaining – Items in collective bargaining that a party must bargain over if they are introduced by the other party – for example, pay.

Impasse – Collective bargaining situation that occurs when the parties are not able to move farther toward settlement, usually because one party is demanding more than the other is willing to offer.

Mediation – Intervention in which a neutral third party tries to assist the principals in reaching agreement.

Fact Finder – A neutral party who studies the issues in a dispute and makes a public recommendation for a reasonable settlement.

Arbitration – The most definitive type of third-party intervention, in which the arbitrator usually has the power to determine and dictate the settlement terms.

Interest Arbitration – Arbitration enacted when labor agreements do not yet exist or when one or both parties are seeking to change the agreement.

Rights Arbitration – Arbitration that interprets existing contract terms, for instance, when an employee questions the employer’s right to have taken some disciplinary action.

Strike – A withdrawal of labor.

Economic Strike – A strike that results from a failure to agree on the terms of a contract that involve wages, benefits, and other conditions of employment.

Unfair Labor Practice Strike – A strike aimed at protesting illegal conduct by the employer.

Wildcat Strike – An unauthorized strike occurring during the term of a contract.

Sympathy Strike – A strike that takes place when one union strikes in support of another.

Picketing – Having employees carry signs announcing their concerns near the employer’s place of business.

Corporate Campaign – An organized effort by the union that exerts pressure on the corporation by pressuring the company’s other unions, shareholders, directors, customers, creditors, and government agencies, often directly.

Boycott – The combined refusal by employees and other interested parties to buy or use the employer's products.

..

Chapter 15: Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining

15- 18

Inside Games – Union efforts to convince employees to impede or to disrupt production – for example, by slowing the work pace.

Lockout – A refusal by the employer to provide opportunities to work.

Injunction – A court order compelling a party or parties either to resume or to desist from a certain action.

Grievance Procedure – Formal process for addressing any factor involving wages, hours, or conditions of employment that is used as a complaint against the employer.

..

Part Five Enrichment Topics in Human Resources Management Chapter 16 Safety, Health, and Risk Management Lecture Outline: Introduction: Safety and the Manager Why Safety Is Important Improving Performance: HR as a Profit Center Top Management’s Role in Safety Improving Performance: The Strategic Context The Supervisor’s Role in Accident Prevention Manager’s Briefing on Occupational Safety Law OSHA Standards and Record KeepingInspections and Citations Responsibilities and Rights of Employers and Employees Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media What Causes Accidents?

What Causes Unsafe Conditions? What Causes Unsafe Acts?

How to Prevent Accidents Trends Shaping HR: Location Beacons Diversity Counts: Protecting Vulnerable Workers Reducing Unsafe Acts Reducing Unsafe Acts Through Screening Reducing Unsafe Acts Through Training Reducing Unsafe Acts Through Posters, Incentives, and Positive Reinforcement Improving Performance: HR as a Profit Center Reducing Unsafe Acts by Fostering a Culture of Safety Reducing Unsafe Acts by Creating a Supportive Environment Reducing Unsafe Acts by Establishing a Safety Policy Reducing Unsafe Acts by Setting Specific Loss Control Goals Reducing Unsafe Acts through Behavior-Based Safety and Safety Awareness Programs Reducing Unsafe Acts through Employee Participation Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media Employee Engagement Guide for Managers Milliken & Company—World-Class Safety through Employee Engagement Involvement-Based Employee Engagement Workplace Health Hazards: Problems and Remedies Chemicals and Industrial Hygiene Know Your Employment Law: Hazard Communication HR and the Gig Economy: Temp Employee Safety ..

Chapter 16: Safety, Health, and Risk Management Asbestos Exposure at Work and Air Quality Alcoholism and Substance AbuseStress, Burnout, and DepressionSolving Computer-Related Ergonomic Problems Repetitive Motion DisordersSitting Infectious Diseases Workplace Smoking Occupational Security and Risk Management Enterprise Risk Management Preventing and Dealing with Violence at Work ce Securing the Facility Terrorism Cybersecurity Business Continuity and Emergency Plans Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media Chapter Review

Where Are We Now..

The main purpose of this chapter is to provide you with knowledge managers need to reduce workplace safety and health problems. The main topics we discuss are safety and the manager; manager’s briefing on occupational safety law; what causes accidents; how to prevent accidents; employee engagement-based safety programs; workplace health hazards – problems and remedies; and occupational security and risk management.

Interesting Issues: When it comes to safety strategy, the explosion and fire on British Petroleum’s (BP’s) Deepwater Horizon rig in the Gulf of Mexico back in 2010 still stands out for what can go wrong. The blast took the lives of 11 workers. Reports from the scene said a malfunctioning blowout preventer failed to activate, causing the disaster. Past critics of BP’s safety practices weren’t so sure.

Learning Objectives: 16-1.

16-2.

16-3.

16-4.

16-5.

16-6.

16-7.

Explain the supervisor’s role in safety.

Explain the basic facts about safety law and OSHA. Answer the question, “What causes accidents?”

List and explain five ways to prevent accidents at work.

Describe how one company uses employee engagement to improve workplace safety.

List five workplace health hazards and how to deal with them.

Discuss the prerequisites for a security plan and how to set up a basic security program.

..

16-2

Chapter 16: Safety, Health, and Risk Management

Annotated Outline: I.

Introduction: Safety and the Manager A. Why Safety Is Important – safety and accident prevention concern managers for several reasons, one of which is the staggering number of workplace accidents.

B. Improving Performance: HR as a Profit Center C. Top Management’s Role in Safety – reducing accidents often boils down to reducing accident-causing conditions and accident-causing acts. Most safety experts would agree that safety should start at the top.

D. Improving Performance: The Strategic Context E. The Supervisor’s Role in Accident Prevention – local supervisors are responsible for day-to-day inspections. Daily inspections should be part of a supervisor’s routine.

II.

Manger’s Briefing on Occupational Safety Law – Congress passed the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 “ to assure so far as possible every working man and woman in the nation safe and healthful working conditions and to preserve our human resources.” This act created the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) within the Department of Labor.

A. OSHA Standards and Record Keeping – under OSHA, employers with 11 or more employees must maintain records of, and report occupational injuries and occupational illnesses, which are any abnormal conditions or disorders caused by inhalation, absorption, ingestion, or direct contact with toxic substances or harmful agents.

B. What The Employer Must Report – employers must report all occupational illnesses and injuries, specifically those that result in medical treatment (other than first aid), loss of consciousness, restriction of work, (one or more lost workdays), restrictions of motion, or transfer to another job.

C. Inspections and Citations – are how OSHA enforces its standards. The agency has limited funds so it tries to encourage cooperative safety programs as well.

1. Inspection Priorities – OSHA takes a “worst-first” approach. Priorities include, from highest to lowest, imminent dangers, severe injuries and illnesses, worker complaints, referrals of hazards from other agencies, targeted high-hazard industries inspections, and follow-up inspections.

2. Inspection – it begins when the OSHA officer arrives at the workplace. He or she displays credentials and asks to meet an employer’s representative.

(The credentials must include photograph and serial number). The OSHA inspector looks for all types of violations, but some areas grab more attention. The five most frequent OSHA inspection violations are: scaffolding, fall protection, hazard communication, lockout/tagout (electrical disengagement), and respiratory problems.

3. Penalties – OSHA can impose penalties. These generally range from $5000 up to $150,000 for willful or repeat serious violations but can be far higher. In general, OSHA calculates penalties based on the gravity of the violation and usually takes into consideration things like the size of the business, the firm’s compliance history, and the employer’s good faith.

..

16-3

Chapter 16: Safety, Health, and Risk Management D. Responsibilities and Rights of Employers and Employees – employers are responsible for providing a hazard-free workplace, being familiar with mandatory OSHA standards, and examining workplace conditions to make sure they conform to applicable standards. Employers have the right to seek advice and off-site consultation from OSHA, request and receive proper identification of the OSHA compliance officer before inspection, and be advised by the compliance officer of the reason for an inspection. OSHA can’t cite employees for violations of their responsibilities. Employees are responsible for complying with all applicable OSHA standards, for following all employer safety and health rules and regulations, and for reporting hazardous conditions to the supervisor. Employees have a right to demand safety and health on the job without fear of punishment.

The act forbids employers from punishing or discriminating against workers who complain to OSHA about job safety and health hazards.

E. Dealing with Employee Resistance – although employees are responsible to comply with OSHA standards, they often resist. The key here is to provide documented evidence that the employee was properly trained to do the job the right way but did not.

F. Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media III.

What Causes Accidents? – there are three basic causes of workplace accidents: chance occurrences, unsafe conditions, and employees’ unsafe acts.

A. What Causes Unsafe Conditions? – unsafe conditions are a main cause of accidents such as improperly guarded equipment, defective equipment, hazardous procedures around machines or equipment, unsafe storage, improper illumination, spills on floors, tripping hazards, working from heights, and electrical hazards.

1. Safety Schedules and Climate – work schedules and fatigue can affect accident rate. The workplace “climate” or psychology is very important. A strong pressure to complete the work as quickly as possible, employees who are under stress, and poor safety climate were some of the psychological conditions leading to accidents.

B. What Causes Unsafe Acts? – unfortunately, there are no easy answers to the question of what causes unsafe acts. The consensus is that accident proneness is situational. Some accident repeaters are just unlucky, or they may be more meticulous about reporting. Certain traits have been identified with accident proneness. For example, people who are impulsive, sensation seeking, extremely introverted, and less conscientious (in terms of being less fastidious and dependable) have more accidents.

IV.

How to Prevent Accidents A. Reducing Unsafe Conditions – reducing unsafe conditions is always an employer’s first line of defense. Safety engineers should design jobs to remove hazards, and supervisors and managers should help identify and remove potential hazards.

..

16-4

Chapter 16: Safety, Health, and Risk Management 1. Job Hazard Analysis – performing a job hazard analysis involves looking at the situation and asking the following questions: What can go wrong?

What are the consequences? How could it happen? What are other contributing factors? The job hazard analysis should provide the basis for creating countermeasures.

2. Operational Safety Reviews – are conducted by agencies to ascertain whether units under their jurisdiction are complying with all the applicable safety laws, regulations, orders, and rules.

3. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) – protective gear should fit properly, be easy to care for, maintain, and repair; be flexible and lightweight; provide comfort and reduce heat stress; have rugged construction, be relatively easy to put on and take off; and be easy to clean, dispose of, and recycle.

B. Trends Shaping HR: Robots C. Trends Shaping HR: Location Beacons D. Diversity Counts – Protecting Vulnerable Workers – in designing safe and healthy environments, employers should pay special attention to venerable workers, such as young, immigrant, aging, and women workers.

E. Reducing Unsafe Acts – human misbehavior will short-circuit even the best safety efforts. Sometimes misbehavior is intentional. Unfortunately, just telling employees to “pay attention” isn’t enough, employers should identify and try to eliminate potential risks, reduce potential distractions, and carefully screen and train employees.

F. Reducing Unsafe Acts through Screening – the basic aim is to identify the trait that might predict accidents on the job in question, and then screen candidates for this trait. Studies suggest that the Employee Reliability Inventory (ERI)—which measures reliability dimensions such as emotional maturity, conscientiousness, safe job performance, job simulation test, and physical capabilities—is also used.

G. Reducing Unsafe Acts through Training – training is especially appropriate for new employees. You should instruct employees in safe practices and procedures, warn them of potential hazards, and work on developing a safety-conscious attitude. OSHA’s standards require more than training. Employees must demonstrate they actually learned what to do. OSHA has published two booklets: “Training Requirements under OSHA” and “Teaching Safety and Health in the Workplace.” The main aim is to impart the knowledge and skills required to reduce accidents. Employers also use training vendors’ online safety programs.

H. Reducing Unsafe Acts through Posters, Incentives, and Positive Reinforcement – safety posters are one, incentive programs are another, in which the emphasis is on non-traditional incentive like recognition, which should be a part of the comprehensive safety program.

I. Improving Performance: HR as a Profit Center: Using Positive Reinforcement – many employers use positive reinforcement to improve safety. This segment discusses the experience of a wholesale bakery. The firm set and communicated a reasonable goal; trained the employees; then posted a graph with their pre-training safety record plotted and a list of safety rules. Observers walked through

..

16-5

Chapter 16: Safety, Health, and Risk Management collecting safety data to provide workers with feedback on their safety performance as a form of positive reinforcement.

J. Reducing Unsafe Acts by Fostering a Culture of Safety – employers and supervisors should create a safety-conscious culture by showing that they take safety seriously. A workplace with a safety-oriented culture exhibits the following: teamwork, communication and collaboration, shared vision, assignment, continuous effort, and encouragement.

K. Reducing Unsafe Acts by Creating a Supportive Environment – “Organizations can develop a supportive environment by training supervisors to be better leaders, emphasizing the importance of teamwork and social support, and establishing the value of safety.”

L. Reducing Unsafe Acts by Establishing a Safety Policy – the company’s written safety policy should emphasize that accident prevention is of the utmost importance at your firm, and that the firm will do everything practical to illuminate or reduce accidents and injuries.

M. Reducing Unsafe Acts by Setting Specific Loss Control Goals – set specific safety goals to achieve. For example, set safety goals in terms of frequency of loss-time injuries per number of full-time employees.

N. Reducing Unsafe Acts through Behavior-Based and Safety Awareness Programs – this involves identifying the worker behaviors that contribute to accidents and then training workers to avoid these behaviors.

O. Reducing Unsafe Acts through Employee Participation – there are at least two reasons to get the employees involved in designing the safety program. First, those actually doing the jobs are often management’s best source of ideas about what the potential problems are and how to solve them. Second, it is generally easier to get employees to accept and enthusiastically follow the safety program when they’ve had a hand in designing it.

P. Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media 1. Conducting Safety and Health Audits and Inspections – managers should inspect all premises for possible safety and health problems, using checklists as aids. All accidents and near misses should be investigated. A system should be in place for employees to notify management about hazardous conditions.

V.

Employee Engagement Guide for Managers A. Milliken & Company—World class Safety Through Employee Engagement – founded in 1865 and is privately owned. It is the only company to consistently rank as a “most ethical company” for 15 years running. A survey of the employees found an 80% positive engagement level, based on questions concerning employees’ commitment, pride in the company, and empowerment efforts. Its extraordinary low workplace illness and injury rates means it consistently rates as one of the safest companies in which to work.

B. Involvement-Based Employee Engagement – this is the centerpiece of Milliken’s safety program. Employees staff the safety steering and safety subcommittee system, who then submit “opportunity for improvement” suggestions weekly, review each suggestion, and provide feedback on every suggestion.

..

16-6

Chapter 16: Safety, Health, and Risk Management VI.

Workplace Health Hazards: Problems and Remedies A. Chemicals and Industrial Hygiene – first, the facility’s health and safety officers must recognize possible exposure hazards. The evaluation phase involves determining how severe the hazard is. Finally, the hazard control phase involves taking steps to eliminate or reduce the hazard so that it no longer ranks as dangerous.

B. Know Your Employment Law – Hazard Communication C. HR and the Gig Economy: Temp Employee Safety D. Asbestos Exposure at Work and Air Quality – Employers must monitor the air quality whenever they expect the level of asbestos to rise to one-half the allowable limit (0.1 fibers per cubic centimeter). Engineering controls—walls, special filters, and so forth—are required to maintain a compliant asbestos level.

Only then can employers use respirators if additional efforts are required to achieve compliance.

E. Alcoholism and Substance Abuse – about two-thirds of people with an alcohol disorder work full-time. Some estimate that almost 13 million workers use drugs illicitly. Alcoholism may cost U.S. employers about $226 billion per year in higher absenteeism and accidents. For many employers, dealing with substance abuse begins with substance abuse testing. Drug-free workplace programs include five components: 1) A drug-free workplace policy, 2) Supervisor Training, 3) Employee Education, 4) Employee Assistance, and 5) Drug Testing.

F. Stress, Burnout, and Depression – can sometimes lead to alcoholism and drug abuse, which are problematic for both the employee and employer. A variety of external workplace factors can lead to job stress. Personal factors also influence stress – no two people react to the same job in the very same way. Human consequences of stress include anxiety, depression, anger, and various physical consequences. Organizational consequences include reductions in the quantity and quality of job performance, increased absenteeism and turnover, increased grievances, and increased health care costs. Stress is not necessarily dysfunctional; it can lead some people to be more productive and/or creative.

1. Reducing Job Stress – employees can reduce stress by getting more sleep, eating better, and negotiating with managers for realistic deadlines on important projects. The three-step stress-reduction technique involves developing awareness, adjusting attitudes, and taking action. The HR department can take a positive role in reducing stress.

2. What The Employer Can Do – supportive supervisors and fair treatment are important. Reducing personal conflicts on the job and encouraging open communication between management and employees can help. Some employers use “resilience training” to help employees deal with stress.

3. Burnout – is the total depletion of physical and mental resources caused by excessive striving to reach an unrealistic work-related goal. Some suggestions for alleviating burnout include breaking your patterns; getting away from it all periodically; reassessing your goals in terms of their intrinsic worth; and thinking about your work.

4. Employee Depression – organizations must ensure that depressed employees use available support services. Employers need to train

..

16-7

Chapter 16: Safety, Health, and Risk Management supervisors to identify depression’s warning signs and to counsel those who may need such services to use the firm’s employee assistance program. Depression is a disease.

G. Solving Computer-Related Ergonomic Problems – short-term eye problems (like burning, itching, tearing, eyestrain, and eye soreness), backaches, and neck-aches are common complaints among video display operators. The National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) has several recommendations for reducing these problems.

H. Repetitive Motion Disorders – such disorders include carpal tunnel syndrome and tendonitis. Employees can reduce the issue if the pace of work is altered.

I. Sitting – studies suggest that people who sit a lot are in poorer health, and need to get up and walk around about 30 or 40 times a day.

J. Infectious Diseases – with many employees traveling to and from international destinations, monitoring and controlling infectious diseases like H1N1, Ebola, and SARS has become an important safety issue. Obviously, employers must make provisions for ensuring that a returning employee does not inadvertently infect one or more colleagues. Employers can take a number of steps to prevent the entry or spread of infectious diseases into their workplaces. These steps include: 1. Monitor the Center for Disease Control and Prevention’s (CDC) travel alerts. Access this information at www.cdc.gov.

2. Encourage employees to receive immunizations.

3. Provide daily medical screenings for employees returning from infected areas.

4. Deny access for 10 days to employees or visitors who have had contact with suspected infected individuals.

5. Tell employees to stay home if they have a fever or respiratory system symptoms.

6. Clean work areas and surfaces regularly.

7. Practice hand hygiene and make sanitizers containing alcohol easily available.

8. Stagger breaks. Offer several lunch periods to reduce overcrowding.

K. Workplace Smoking – the nature of the problem is serious for employees and employers. Smokers have significantly greater risk of occupational accidents and higher absenteeism rates than nonsmokers. Smokers increase the cost of health and fire insurance.

VII.

Occupational Security and Risk Management – workplace security relates to protecting employees from internal and external surety risks.

A. Enterprise Risk Management – is “the process of assessing exposures to loss within an operation and determining how best to eliminate, manage, or otherwise reduce the risk of an adverse event from having a negative impact on the business.” Companies face a variety of risks, only some of which are direct risks to employees’ health and safety. Specific risks include, for instance, natural disaster risks, financial risks, and risks to the firm’s computer systems. Human capital risks would rank high. These include safety risks like those we discussed

..

16-8

Chapter 16: Safety, Health, and Risk Management in this chapter as well as, for instance, risks from unionization and from inadequate staffing plans.

B. Preventing and Dealing with Violence at Work – violence against employees is one such internal preventable enterprise risk, and a huge problem. Human resources can take several steps to reduce workplace violence risk which include the following: heighten security measures, improve employee screening, use workplace violence training, use guidelines for firing a high-risk employee, and awareness of violence toward women at work.

C. Heighten Security Measures – heightened security measures are the first line of defense, whether the violence is from coworkers, customers, or outsiders.

According to OSHA, measures should include those in Figure 16-7.

D. Improve Employee Screening – with about 30% of workplace attacks committed by coworkers, screening out potentially violent applicants is the employer’s next line of defense.

E. Establish a Zero-Tolerance Policy Toward Workplace Violence – this should cover all workers and anyone who may come in contact with company personnel.

F. Use Workplace Violence Training – you can also train supervisors to notice the clues that typify potentially violent current employees. Common clues include: 1. An act of violence on or off the job 2. Erratic behavior evidencing a loss of perception or awareness of actions 3. Overly confrontational or antisocial behavior 4. Sexually aggressive behavior 5. Isolationist or loner tendencies 6. Insubordinate behavior with a threat of violence 7. Tendency to overreact to criticism 8. Exaggerated interest in war, guns, violence, mass murders, catastrophes 9. Commission of a serious breach of security 10. Possession of weapons, guns, knives, or like items in the workplace 11. Violation of privacy rights of others, such as searching desks or stalking Chronic complaining and the raising of frequent, unreasonable grievances A retributory or get-even attitude G. Guidelines for Firing a High-Risk Employee – when firing a high-risk employee: 1. Plan all aspects of the meeting, including its time, location, the people to be present, and agenda.

2. Involve security enforcement personnel.

3. Conduct the meeting in a room with a door leading to the outside of the building.

4. Advise the employee that he or she is no longer permitted onto the employer’s property.

5. Keep the termination brief and to the point.

6. Make sure he or she returns all company-owned property at the meeting.

7. Don’t let the person return to his or her workstation.

8. Conduct the meeting early in the week and early in the morning so he or she has time to meet with employment counselors or support groups.

9. Offer as generous a severance package as possible.

10. Protect the employee’s dignity by not advertising the event.

..

16-9

Chapter 16: Safety, Health, and Risk Management 11. Managers associated with the dismissal should for a time exercise personal caution.

12. Employers should consider hiring a security expert to monitor, for a time, the former employee’s social media for threats.

H. Violence Towards Women at Work – men have more fatal occupational injuries than do women, but the proportion of female victims of assault is much higher.

I. Securing the Facility – in simplest terms, instituting a basic security program requires four steps: analyzing the current level of risk, and then installing mechanical, natural, and organizational security systems.

J. Terrorism – the employer can take several steps to protect its employees and physical assets from a terrorist attack. These steps, now familiar at many workplaces, include: 1. Screen the identities of everyone entering the premises.

2. Check mail carefully.

3. Identify ahead of time a lean “crisis organization” that can run the company on an interim basis after a terrorist threat.

4. Identify in advance under what conditions you will close the company down, as well as the shutdown process.

5. Institute a process to put the crisis management team together.

6. Prepare evacuation plans and make sure exits are well marked and unblocked.

7. Designate an employee who will communicate with families and off-site employees.

8. Identify an upwind, off-site location near your facility to use as a staging area for all evacuated personnel.

9. Designate in advance several employees who will do headcounts at the evacuation staging area.

10. Establish an emergency text-messaging policy and procedure to notify affected individuals that an emergency may exist.

K. Cybersecurity – data protection and cybersecurity are specialized areas requiring special expertise. However, some basic guidelines would include: First, data security is everyone’s responsibility. Second, “old data is bad data.” In other words, destroy unneeded old personal data. Third, encrypt. That includes data in laptops employees carry with them. Fourth, monitor. The IT staff should periodically assess cyber risks.

L. Business Continuity and Emergence Plans – the possibility of emergencies prompted by fires, attacks, and similar issues means that employers need facility continuity and emergency plans. One source estimates that 40% of companies never reopen after suffering business disruptions from a major catastrophe, so putting a disaster plan in place is imperative. Such plans should cover early detection of a problem, methods for communicating the emergency externally, and communications plans for initiating an evacuation.

M. Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media – Twitter notifications.

..

16-10

Chapter 16: Safety, Health, and Risk Management

Chapter Review Chapter Section Summaries: 16-1. The subject safety and the manager concerns managers for several reasons, one of which is the number of workplace accidents.

16-2. All managers need to be familiar with occupational safety laws.

16-3. There are three basic causes of workplace accidents: chance occurrences, unsafe conditions, and employees’ unsafe acts.

16-4. In practice, how to prevent accidents boils down to reducing unsafe conditions and reducing unsafe acts.

16-5. The centerpiece of Milliken’s safety process is its involvement-based employee engagement program.

16-6. Most workplace health hazards aren’t obvious, like unguarded equipment.

16-7. Most employers today have occupational security and risk management programs.

Discussion Questions: 16-1. Explain how to reduce the occurrence of unsafe acts on the part of your employees.

In practice, how to prevent accidents boils down to reducing unsafe conditions and reducing unsafe acts. Reducing unsafe conditions is always the first line of defense and includes using checklists and following OSHA standards.

16-2. Explain the supervisor’s role in safety.

Beyond trying to make the workplace safe, the basic aim of the supervisor is to instill in workers the desire to work safely. Then, when needed, enforce safety rules. The supervisor is responsible for day-to-day inspections.

16-3. Explain what causes unsafe acts.

People are the main cause of unsafe acts. Some researchers say that certain personal characteristics are the basis for behavioral tendencies that result in unsafe acts. There are several human traits that contribute to accident proneness, and they are listed in the chapter. There is also a list of some examples of unsafe acts.

16-4. Describe at least five techniques for reducing accidents.

The text lists 10 techniques: 1) selection and placement; 2) posters and other propaganda; 3) training; 4) incentive programs and positive reinforcement; 5) top-management commitment; 6) emphasizing safety; 7) establishing a safety policy; 8) setting specific loss control goals; 9) conducting safety and health inspections; 10) monitoring work overload and stress.

..

16-11

Chapter 16: Safety, Health, and Risk Management 16-5. Explain how you would reduce stress at work.

Students’ responses will vary. Stress, burnout, and depression are more serious at work than many people realize, and both the employee and employer can take steps to deal with them. Employers especially need to train supervisors to identify depression’s warning signs and to counsel those who may need special services.

Individual and Group Activities: 16-6. Working individually or in groups, answer the question, “Is there such a thing as an accident-prone person?”

Yes and no. While most psychologists agree that accident proneness is not universal, most do agree that accident proneness is situational. For example, personality traits may distinguish accident-prone workers on jobs involving risk, and lack of motor skills may distinguish accident-prone workers on jobs involving coordination. Many human traits have been found to be related to accident repetition in specific situations.

16-7. Working individually or in groups, compile a list of the factors at work or in school that create stress for you. What methods do you use for dealing with the stress?

The students should refer to the section of the chapter on reducing job stress to compile their lists of stress factors and methods for dealing with stress, and to also find out more about some specific types of jobs in which they may have an interest.

16-8. Appendices A and B at the end of this book list the knowledge someone studying for the HRCI (Appendix A) or SHRM (Appendix B) certification exam needs to have in each area of human resource management (such as in Strategic Management and Workforce Planning). In groups of several students, do four things: (1) review Appendix A and/or B; (2) identify the material in this chapter that relates to the Appendix A and/or B required knowledge lists; (3) write four multiple-choice exam questions on this material that you believe would be suitable for inclusion in the HRCI exam and/or the SHRM exam; and (4) if time permits, have someone from your team post your team’s questions in front of the class, so that students in all teams can answer the exam questions created by the other teams.

Management Commitment and Safety, What Causes Accidents?, How to Prevent Accidents, Workplace Health Hazards: Problems and Remedies, and Occupational Security, Safety, and Health in a Post 9/11 World. In short, virtually the entire chapter is applicable to the test.

16-9. A safety journal presented some information about what happens when OSHA refers criminal complaints about willful violations of OSHA standards to the U.S. Department of Justice (DOJ). In one 20-year period, of the 119 cases OSHA referred to the DOJ, only 9 resulted in prison time for at least one of the defendants.

..

16-12

Chapter 16: Safety, Health, and Risk Management “The Department of Justice is a disgrace,” charged the founder of an organization for family members of workers killed on the job. One possible explanation for this low conviction rate is that the crime in cases like these is generally a misdemeanor, not a felony, and the DOJ generally tries to focus its attention on felony cases. Given this information, what implications do you think this has for how employers and their managers should manage their safety programs, and why do you take that position?

Hopefully students will understand that it really should not have any implication as to how they should manage their safety programs. Just as was discussed in Chapter 14 on Ethics, Justice, and Fair Treatment, the legal implications should be the least of the motivations for doing what is right. Just because the penalties may not be severe is not a reason to allow unsafe conditions to exist.

16-10. A 315-foot-tall, 2-million-pound crane collapsed on a construction site in East Toledo, Ohio, killing four ironworkers. Do you think catastrophic failures like this are avoidable? If so, what steps would you suggest the general contractor take to avoid a disaster like this?

Without knowing the specifics, the likelihood is that the failure was avoidable. Most such failures are the result of someone working outside of known safety parameters, or not following (or having established) safety procedures that assure that things are done correctly. Thus, following safety guidelines is essential.

Experiential Exercise: How Safe Is My University?

Purpose: The purpose of this exercise is to give you practice in identifying unsafe conditions.

Required Understanding: You should be familiar with material covered in this chapter, particularly on unsafe conditions and Figures 16-6 and 16-8.

How to Set up the Exercise/Instructions: Divide the class into groups of four. Assume that each group is a safety committee retained by your college’s or university’s safety engineer to identify and report on any possible unsafe conditions in and around the school building. Each group will spend about 45 minutes in and around the building you are now in for the purpose of identifying and listing possible unsafe conditions. (Make use of the checklists in Figures 16-6 and 16-8.) Return to the class in about 45 minutes. A spokesperson for each group should list on the board the unsafe conditions you have identified. How many were there? Do you think these also violate OSHA standards? How would you go about checking?

..

16-13

Chapter 16: Safety, Health, and Risk Management

Application Case: The Dangerous Third Shift 16-11. No doubt many problems contributed to this severe accident. However, if you had to choose just one thing that you would tell the meatpacking company to change, what would it be?

Students’ answers will vary. There are three basic causes of workplace accidents: chance occurrences, unsafe conditions, and employees’ unsafe acts. Unsafe conditions include things like improperly guarded equipment and hazardous procedures. Unsafe acts sometimes reflect personality traits such as impatience and distractibility. One very unsafe condition is grease on the floor which leads to tripping.

16-12. Would it be advisable for them to set up a procedure for screening out accidentprone individuals? Why or why not? If so, how should they screen them?

Students’ answers will vary. There are a number of issues here. One likely question from students is whether accident-prone behavior can change with training or incentives. In most cases, training and incentives can resolve the problem. Some students may argue that screening out employees who are accident-prone raises ethical issues.

16-13. Write a short position paper on the subject, “What should we do in this plant to get all our employees to behave more safely at work?”

The paper should include insights gained from this chapter and/or work experiences they have. Look for reasonableness and the likelihood of adoption in real life.

16-14. Based on what you learned from this chapter, write a short position paper on the subject, “What should we do to reduce the chances of accidents like this in our meatpacking plant? Please make sure to list at least 5–10 specific things you would suggest.

There are several basic approaches to reducing unsafe acts, for instance, through proper selection and placement, training, motivation and positive reinforcement, behavior-based safety, employee participation, and conducting safety and health audits. Students can look for creative ways to accomplish this including the list of suggestions offered in the chapter.

Continuing Case: Carter Cleaning Company – The New Safety Program 16-15. How should the firm go about identifying hazardous conditions that should be rectified? Use checklists such as those in Figures 16-6 and 16-8 to list at least 10 possible dry-cleaning store hazardous conditions.

Using the information provided in the case, Internet research, and their personal knowledge, students should be able to list at least ten potential hazards in a dry-cleaning

..

16-14

Chapter 16: Safety, Health, and Risk Management store, if not more. This hazard should not be limited to chemical, but should include physical, mechanical, and electrical hazards as well.

16-16. Would it be advisable for the firm to set up a procedure for screening out accidentprone individuals? How should they do so?

There are a number of issues here. One likely question from students is whether accidentprone behavior can change with training or incentives. In most cases, training and incentives can resolve the problem. Some students may argue that screening out employees who are accident-prone raises ethical issues.

16-17. How would you suggest the Carters get all employees to behave more safely at work? Also, how would you advise them to get those who should be wearing goggles to do so?

The student should suggest that Carter’s management contact OSHA for assistance in developing safety policies and procedures on the job, along with including suggestions discussed in the chapter. They should also make it clear that those who violate the policies will be disciplined, and then follow up by doing it. If employees see that management is serious about it and that they will be disciplined, or even lose their jobs, they will begin to use them.

The Hotel Paris: Improving Performance at the Hotel Paris – The New Safety and Health Program 16-18. Based on what you read in this chapter, what’s the first step you would have advised the Hotel Paris to take as part of its new safety and health program, and why?

According to the text, reducing unsafe conditions is always an employer’s first line of defense. Lisa should work on designing jobs to remove hazards, and supervisors and managers should help identify and remove potential hazards immediately. They can then focus on other aspects of safety awareness and training.

16-19. List 10 specific high-risk areas in a typical hotel you believe Lisa and her team should look at now, including examples of the safety or health hazards that they should look for there.

Students’ answers will vary. The case notes several areas, including the pool, the valet parking area, and chemical storage areas. Additionally, guest areas like bathtubs will be of concern.

..

16-15

Chapter 16: Safety, Health, and Risk Management 16-20. Give three specific examples of how Hotel Paris can use HR practices to improve its safety efforts.

Workers’ compensation costs have been high, so Lisa can measure a reduction in the number of claims, or in total claim costs, lost time injuries, etc. The hotel can also measure the number and severity of violations that are found on internal safety inspections.

16-21. Write a one-page summary addressing the topic, “How improving safety and health at the Hotel Paris will contribute to us achieving our strategic goals.”

This summary should include reduced costs, employee satisfaction and safety, guest safety and health, and increased revenues.

Key Terms: Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 – The law passed by Congress in 1970 "to assure so far as possible every working man and woman in the nation safe and healthful working conditions and to preserve our human resources."

Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) – The agency created within the Department of Labor to set safety and health standards for almost all workers in the United States.

Occupational Illness – Any abnormal condition or disorder caused by exposure to environmental factors associated with employment.

Citation – Summons informing employers and employees of the regulations and standards that have been violated in the workplace.

Unsafe Conditions – The mechanical and physical conditions that cause accidents.

Job Hazard Analysis – A systematic approach to identifying and eliminating workplace hazards before they occur.

Operational Safety Reviews – Reviews conducted by agencies to ascertain whether units under their jurisdiction are complying with all the applicable safety laws, regulations, orders, and rules.

Behavior-Based Safety – Identifying the worker behaviors that contribute to accidents and then training workers to avoid these behaviors.

..

16-16

Chapter 16: Safety, Health, and Risk Management Safety Awareness Program – Program that enables trained supervisors to orient new workers arriving at a job site regarding common safety hazards and simple prevention methods.

Burnout – The total depletion of physical and mental resources caused by excessive striving to reach an unrealistic work-related goal.

..

16-17

Part Five Enrichment Topics in Human Resource Management Chapter 17 Managing Global Human Resources

Lecture Outline: The Manager’s Global Challenge What Is International Human Resource Management?

Adapting Human Resource Activities to Intercountry Differences Cultural Factors Legal Factors Economic Systems HR Abroad Example: The European Union HR Abroad Example: China Staffing the Global Organization International Staffing: Home or Local?

Internationalization Stage, Values, and Staffing Policy Trend Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media Improving Performance: HR as a Profit Center Trend Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media Selecting International Managers Diversity Counts: Sending Women Managers Abroad Avoiding Early Expatriate Returns Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses Training and Maintaining Employees Abroad Orienting and Training Employees on International Assignment Ethics and Codes of Conduct Performance Appraisal of International Managers Compensating Managers Abroad Union Relations Abroad Safety Abroad Improving Performance: HR Practices Around the Globe Repatriation: Problems and Solutions Employee Engagement Guide for Managers Engagement Around the Globe

..

Chapter 17: Managing Global Human Resources

17-2

Managing HR Locally: How to Put into Practice a Global HR System Improving Performance: The Strategic Context Developing a More Effective Global HR System Making the Global HR System More Acceptable Implementing the Global HR System Chapter Review

Where Are We Now… The purpose of this chapter is to improve your effectiveness at applying your human resource knowledge and skills when global challenges are involved. The topics we’ll discuss include the manager’s global challenge, adapting human resources activities to intercountry differences, staffing the global organization, training and maintaining employees abroad, employee engagement globally, and managing HR locally: how to implement a global HR system.

Interesting Issues: Hyundai Capital’s strategy includes becoming what it calls a “Global One Company.” For example, it is unifying its organizational structure, products and services, and management practices worldwide. Its HR group needed a new human resource strategy to similarly ensure that its human resource practices in countries around the world were standardized. We’ll see what they did.

Learning Objectives: 17-1.

17-2.

17-3.

17-4.

List the HR challenges of international business.

Illustrate with examples how intercountry differences affect HRM. List and briefly describe the main methods for staffing global organizations.

Discuss some important issues to keep in mind in training, appraising, and compensating international employees.

17-5. Discuss similarities and differences in employee engagement around the globe.

17-6. Explain with examples how to implement a global human resource management program.

Annotated Outline: I.

The Manager’s Global Challenge – global challenges include understanding that what may work in one country may not work in another. There is an array of political, social, legal, and cultural differences among countries and people abroad.

A. What Is International Human Resource Management? – employers rely on international human resource management (IHRM) to deal with global HR challenges like these. We can define IHRM as the human resource

..

Chapter 17: Managing Global Human Resources

17-3

management concepts and techniques employers use to manage the human resource challenges of their international operations, including acquiring, training, appraising, and compensating employees, and attending to their labor relations, health and safety, and fairness concerns.

IHR managers address the following questions: 1. “What steps can we take to support the company’s global strategy?”

2. “What’s the best way for us to pay our expatriate employees?”

3. “How can we best staff our assignments abroad with global leaders?”

II.

Adapting Human Resource Activities to Intercountry Differences A. Cultural Factors – countries differ widely in their cultures, which are the basic values to which their citizens adhere. Cultural differences from country to country necessitate corresponding differences in management practices among a company’s subsidiaries because local cultural norms can undermine employer’s attempts to have uniform codes of conduct.

1. The Hofstede Study – Professor Geert Hofstede illustrates international cultural differences. Hofstede says societies differ in five values: power distance, individualism, masculinity, uncertainty avoidance, and longterm orientation.

2. Legal Factors – employers expanding abroad must also be familiar with the labor laws in the countries they’re entering. Codetermination is the rule in Germany and several other countries. Codetermination means workers have the right to have their own elected representatives on the employer’s supervisory board B. Economic Systems – translate into differences in intercountry HR practices.

The three systems are market economies, planned economies, and mixed economies.

C. HR Abroad Example: The European Union – the EU refers to the unification of separate European countries in the 1990s into a common market for goods, services, capital, and labor. EU directives are binding on all member countries, which necessitate adjustments to both EU directives and individual country laws. Variances in HR practices affect minimum EU wages, working hours, and employee representation.

D. HR Abroad Example: China – it implemented a new labor contract which adds numerous new employment protections for employees and makes it correspondingly more expensive for employers to implement certain personnel actions. There are wide variations in how companies in China deal with HR issues such as recruiting, selection, compensation, and labor unions.

III.

Staffing the Global Organization A. International Staffing: Home or Local? – multinational companies (MNCs) employ several types of international managers. Locals are citizens of the countries where they are working. Expatriates (“expats”) are non-citizens of the countries in which they are working. Home-country nationals are citizens of the country in which the multinational company has its headquarters. Thirdcountry nationals are citizens of a country other than the parent or the host-

..

Chapter 17: Managing Global Human Resources

17-4

country. More flexible expatriate assignments involving no formal relocation are becoming increasingly popular and are aided by technological advances.

B. Internationalization Stage, Values, and Staffing Policy – in an ethnocentrically oriented company, the company tends to staff its positions abroad with employees from its headquarters—with parent-country nationals, in other words. The polycentric company staffs positions abroad with local or host-country employees. And the global company aims to attract the best candidates globally, including freely using third-country nationals to staff its positions around the world with the best people available.

C. Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media D. Improving Performance: HR As a Profit Center E. Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media F. Selecting International Managers – is similar to selecting domestic managers, but firms need to determine whether managers for foreign assignments can cope internationally. Selection criteria include technical/professional skills, expatriates’ willingness to go, experience in the country, personality factors (including flexibility), leadership skills, the ability to work with teams, and previous performance appraisals in the selection process. Ideally, international assignee selection should include realistic previews, and adaptability screening procedures.

Selection testing is useful for expat selection. In terms of personality, sociable, outgoing, conscientious people seem more likely to fit into new cultural settings.

G. Diversity Counts: Sending Women Managers Abroad – while women represent about 50% of the middle management talent in U.S. companies, they represent only 20% of managers sent abroad. What accounts for this? Many misperceptions still exist. Line managers make these assignments, and many assume that women don’t want to work abroad, are reluctant to move their families abroad, or can’t get their spouses to move. In fact, this survey found, women do want international assignments, they are not less inclined to move their families, and their male spouses are not necessarily reluctant. Fear of cultural prejudices against women is another issue. In some cultures, women do have to follow different rules, for instance, in terms of attire. There are various legal considerations when hiring for assignments abroad.

H. Avoiding Early Expatriate Returns – international assignments fail for various reasons including personality, the person’s intentions, and non-work factors.

Family pressures are frequent. Three things help the adjustment: language fluency, having preschool age children rather than school-age or no children, and a strong bond of closeness between spouse and ex-pat partner. Solutions include: realistic previews of what to expect abroad, careful screening, shortened assignment lengths, and “global buddy” programs.

I. Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses IV.

Training and Maintaining Employees Abroad A. Orienting and Training Employees on International Assignment – international assignees do best when they receive special training. Some recommended programs aim to provide the following: (1) the basics of the new country's history, politics, business norms, education system, and demographics; (2) an

..

Chapter 17: Managing Global Human Resources

17-5

understanding of how cultural values affect perceptions, values, and communications; and (3) examples of why moving to a new country can be difficult, and how to manage these challenges.

B. Ethics and Codes of Conduct – employers also need to make sure their employees abroad are adhering to their firm’s ethics codes. Often, the employer’s main concern is establishing global standards for adhering to U.S. laws that have crossborder impacts. Global employers need global codes of conduct on things like discrimination, harassment, bribery, and Sarbanes–Oxley.

C. Performance Appraisal of International Managers – the appraisal process can be improved by: 1. Adapting the performance criteria to the local job and situation.

2. Weighing the evaluation more toward the on-site manager’s appraisal than toward the home-site manager’s.

3. If the home-office manager does the actual written appraisal, having him or her use a former expatriate from the same overseas location for advice.

D. Compensating Managers Abroad –the balance sheet approach is the most common approach to formulating expatriate pay and use of incentives. The basic idea is that each expatriate should enjoy the same standard of living he or she would have at home. Some use a localization compensation policy—they pay the incoming expat a salary comparable to what a local person would earn, but supplement that with payments to let the expat maintain his or her home-country standard of living. In any case, the bottom line is that the pay plan must be competitive enough to get the person to move. Hardship allowances compensate expatriates for hard living and working conditions at certain foreign locations.

Foreign Service Premiums – Financial payments over and above regular base pay, typically ranging between 10% and 30%of base pay. Mobility Premiums – Typically, lump-sum payments to reward employees for moving from one assignment to another.

E. Union Relations Abroad – differ from those in the United States. Managers should steel themselves to more vigorous collective bargaining negotiations abroad then they may be used to in the United States.

F. Terrorism, Safety, and Global HR – new federal anti-terrorism laws are affecting an employer’s ability to import and export workers.

1. Taking Protective Measures – many firms have instituted more comprehensive safety plans abroad, including evacuation plans to get employees to safety.

2. Kidnapping and Ransom (K&R) Insurance – since hiring crisis teams and paying ransoms can be prohibitively expensive, many employers buy kidnapping and ransom insurance. The insurance itself typically covers several costs associated with kidnappings, abductions, or extortion attempts.

3. The threat of terrorism is prompting more employers to use special mobile safety tools to track and communicate with workers in real time.

G. Improving Performance: HR Practices Around the Globe

..

Chapter 17: Managing Global Human Resources

17-6

H. Repatriation: Problems and Solutions – a common repatriation problem is feeling forgotten. Losing the returnee also means losing the knowledge and experience he or she gained while abroad. Some possible solutions are a formal repatriation service, sponsors, career counselors, open communications, and reorientation programs.

V.

Employee Engagement Guide for Managers A. Engagement Around the Globe – the global average of engaged employees is about 61%. The top drivers of employee engagement around the globe is career opportunities.

VI.

Managing HR Locally: How to Put into Practice a Global HR System – global companies seek to be integrated.

A. Improving Performance: The Strategic Context B. Developing a More Effective Global HR System 1. Form global HR networks.

2. Remember that it’s more important to standardize ends and competencies than specific methods.

C. Making the Global HR System More Acceptable 1. Remember global systems are more accepted in truly global organizations.

2. Investigate pressures to differentiate and determine their legitimacy.

3. Try to work within the context of a strong corporate culture.

D. Implementing the Global HR System 1. Remember, “You can’t communicate enough.”

2. Dedicate adequate resources for the global HR effort.

Chapter Review Chapter Section Summaries: 17-1. Dealing with global human resource challenges as a manager isn’t easy.

17-2. The need for adapting human resources activities to intercountry differences influences employers’ HR processes.

17-3. Staffing the global organization is a major challenge.

17-4. After selecting the employees to send abroad, attention turns to training and maintaining your expatriate employees.

17-5. The worldwide trend is for employee engagement to converge around the current global average of about 61% of employees engaged.

17-6. With employers increasingly relying on local rather than expatriate employees, it’s important for managers to understand how to implement a global HR system.

..

Chapter 17: Managing Global Human Resources

17-7

Discussion Questions: 17-1. You are the president of a small business. What are some of the ways you expect “going international” will affect HR activities in your business?

Student responses will vary. With employers increasingly relying on local rather than expatriate employees, it’s important for managers to understand how to implement a global HR system. The basic approach involves: (1) Develop a more effective global HR system; (2) Make the global HR system more acceptable; and (3) Implement the global system.

17-2. What are some of the specific, uniquely international activities an international HR manager typically engages in?

Formulating and implementing HR policies and activities in the home-office of a multinational company. This HRM manager would engage in selecting, training, and transferring parent-company personnel abroad and formulating HR policies for the firm as a whole and for its foreign operations. Conducting HR activities in the foreign subsidiary of an MNC is another form. Again, local HR practices are often based on the parent firm's HR policies, fine-tuned for local country practices.

17-3. What intercountry differences affect HRM? Give several examples of how each may affect HRM. 1) Cultural Factors – U.S. managers may be most concerned with getting the job done.

Chinese managers may be most concerned with maintaining a harmonious environment.

Hispanic managers may be more concerned with establishing trusting, friendship relationships. 2) Economic Factors – U.S. economic systems tend to favor policies that value productivity, while more socialistic countries like Sweden would favor policies that prevent unemployment. 3) Labor Cost Factors – Mexican labor costs (low) can allow inefficiencies of labor, while German labor costs (high) might require a focus on efficiency. 4) Industrial Relations Factors – German law requires that workers have a vote in setting policies, while in Japan the employees do not have a say, but the government may have a say in establishing policies. 5) The European Community – The EC will gradually reduce the differences between member countries.

17-4. You are the HR manager of a firm that is about to send its first employees overseas to staff a new subsidiary. Your boss, the president, asks you why such assignments often fail, and what you plan to do to avoid such failures. How do you respond?

Estimates say that 20% to 25% of all overseas assignments fail. Reasons include spouse’s inability to adjust, managers' inability to adjust, other family problems, and managers' inability to cope with responsibility. You will need to select a manager that displays adaptability and flexibility, cultural toughness, self-orientation, others-orientation, perceptual ability, and who has a family with adaptability.

..

Chapter 17: Managing Global Human Resources

17-8

17-5. As an HR manager, what program would you establish to reduce repatriation problems of returning expatriates and their families?

Student responses will vary. Well-thought-out repatriation programs emphasize keeping employees in the loop as far as what’s happening in their home offices, bringing them back to the office periodically, and providing formal repatriation services for the expatriate and his or her family to start preparing them for the return.

Individual and Group Activities: 17-6. Working individually or in groups, outline an expatriation and repatriation plan for your professor, whom your school is sending to Bulgaria to teach HR for the next 3 years.

In developing their expatriation and repatriation plan, students should use Internet resources to find information on various cultural, economic, and legal factors that could affect their professor. They should include a description of the type of training program their professor should take prior to leaving for Bulgaria, the pay structure while on the international assignment, and particulars for how the repatriation plan will work for the professor’s return.

17-7. Give three specific examples of multinational corporations in your area. Check on the Internet or with each firm to determine in what countries these firms have operations. Explain the nature of some of their operations, and summarize whatever you can find out about their international employee selection and training HR policies.

The examples will vary according to what companies have operations in your area. This can be an exciting opportunity for students to find out more about companies and what they are doing beyond your immediate geographic area.

17-8. Choose three traits useful for selecting international assignees, and create a straightforward test to screen candidates for these traits.

There are an infinite number of responses that you might get to this question. First, make sure that the traits either are on the list in the chapter, or are reasonable and logical traits that would be useful. Second, assure that the tests that the students develop are ones that will actually identify the presence of these traits.

17-9. Use a library or Internet source to determine the relative cost of living in five countries as of this year, and explain the implications of such differences for drafting a pay plan for managers being sent to each country.

..

Chapter 17: Managing Global Human Resources

17-9

The most common approach is to equalize purchasing power across the countries, a technique known as the balance sheet approach. The basic idea is that each expatriate should enjoy the same standard of living he or she would have had at home.

17-10. Appendices A and B at the end of this book list the knowledge someone studying for the HRCI (Appendix A) or SHRM (Appendix B) certification exam needs to have in each area of human resource management (such as in Strategic Management and Workforce Planning). In groups of several students, do four things: (1) review Appendix A and/or B; (2) identify the material in this chapter that relates to the Appendix A and/or B required knowledge lists; (3) write four multiple-choice exam questions on this material that you believe would be suitable for inclusion in the HRCI exam and/or the SHRM exam; and (4) if time permits, have someone from your team post your team’s questions in front of the class, so that students in all teams can answer the exam questions created by the other teams.

The material from this chapter that is applicable to the HRCI certification exam would include: the HR challenges of international business, how intercountry differences affect HRM, global differences and similarities in HR practice, how to implement a global HR system, staffing the global organization, and training and maintaining expatriate employees.

17-11. An issue of HR Magazine contained an article titled “Aftershocks of War,” which said that soldiers returning to their jobs from Iraq would likely require HR’s assistance in coping with “delayed emotional trauma.” The term delayed emotional trauma refers to the personality changes such as anger, anxiety, or irritability that exposure to the traumatic events of war sometimes triggers in returning veterans.

Assume you are the HR manager for the employer of John Smith, who is returning to work next week after 1 year in Iraq. Based on what you read in this chapter, what steps would you take to help smooth John’s reintegration into your workforce?

There are several suggestions in the section “Repatriation: Problems and Solutions.” At minimum, you should arrange for a sponsor/mentor, career counseling, and a reorientation program. You need to also make sure that there are clear and open doors for him to communicate with you. It would be a good idea to have some counseling available as well.

Experiential Exercise: A Taxing Problem for Expatriate Employees Purpose: The purpose of this exercise is to give you practice identifying and analyzing some of the factors that influence expatriates’ pay.

Required Understanding: You should be thoroughly familiar with this chapter and with the Web site www.irs.gov.

..

Chapter 17: Managing Global Human Resources

17-10

How to Set up the Exercise/Instructions: Divide the class into teams of four or five students.

Each team member should read the following: One of the trickiest aspects of calculating expatriates’ pay relates to the question of the expatriate’s U.S. federal income tax liabilities. Go to the Internal Revenue Service’s Web site, www.irs.gov. Scroll down to Individuals, and go to Overseas Taxpayers. Your team is the expatriate-employee compensation task force for your company, and your firm is about to send several managers and engineers to Japan, England, and Hong Kong. What information did you find on the site that will help your team formulate expat tax and compensation policies? Based on that, what are the three most important things your firm should keep in mind in formulating a compensation policy for employees you’re about to send to Japan, England, and Hong Kong?

Application Case: “Boss, I Think We Have a Problem” 17-12. Based on this chapter and the case incident, compile a list of 10 international HR mistakes Mr. Fisher has made so far.

Among his mistakes, Fisher has not properly identified candidates; cultural sensitivity, interpersonal skills, and flexibility have not been included as required job skills; there is no system in place to assess candidates for proper skills; the company does not have realistic cost projects for cross-border operations; the company has not determined whether it would be cost effective to have an expatriate manager; there are no assignment letters documenting the scope of the job; there is no international compensation system in place; the company has not taken into account differences in foreign expenses; the company has not taken into account foreign taxes; there is no formal relocation assistance program in place; the company has not considered the importance of family support; and there is no cultural orientation program in place for expatriate managers or their family members.

17-13. How would you have gone about hiring a European sales manager? Why? I would have investigated the market to determine the appropriate level of compensation and benefits. Expatriate compensation packages should consider tax equalization clauses or other measures for dealing with differing costs of living. The company should also have retained counsel on European labor laws/practices. The location of the office should be carefully selected for favorable labor and tax laws. Like Fisher, I would have wanted a large pool of potential applicants, but given Fisher’s inexperience, he may have benefited from the use of an outside agency (search firm). Finally, Fisher’s stereotypes of European managers may have clouded his judgment with his existing pool of applicants.

17-14. What would you do now if you were Mr. Fisher?

Fisher needs to seek legal counsel in regard to his labor situation. He is likely in the wrong, in which case, he will need to reinstate the employees and apologize. He will in all likelihood need to start over and find an appropriate sales manager with knowledge of the local culture and business practice.

..

Chapter 17: Managing Global Human Resources

17-11

Continuing Case: Carter Cleaning Company – Going Abroad 17-15. Assuming they began by opening just one or two stores in Mexico, what do you see as the main HR-related challenges Jack and Jennifer would have to address?

The students will not only need to incorporate their learnings from this chapter to answer this question, they should also include information from all the chapters in the text to come up with the main HR-related implications and challenges Carter Cleaning Company will face as a result of opening the Mexican stores.

17-16. How would you go about choosing a manager for a new Mexican store if you were Jack or Jennifer? For instance, would you hire someone locally or send someone from one of your existing stores? Why? The students should use the information in the chapter on selecting international managers. The students are likely to differ in their choices as to which type of international manager they would suggest for the Mexican operation; just look for them to justify their responses.

17-17. The cost of living in Mexico is substantially below that of where Carter is now located: How would you go about developing a pay plan for your new manager if you decided to send an expatriate to Mexico?

The students should use information from Chapters 11, 12, 13, 17, and the Internet sources presented in those chapters to formulate their response to this question.

17-18. Present a detailed explanation of the factors you would look for in your candidate for expatriate manager to run the stores in Mexico.

The students should include information presented in Chapters 1 through 15, in addition to the information presented in this chapter, to develop their list of HR-related functions that Carter Cleaning Company needs to do in selecting their expatriate employee for Mexico.

Hotel Paris: Improving Performance at the Hotel Paris: Managing Global Human Resources 17-19. Provide a one-page summary of what individual hotel managers should know in order to make it more likely incoming employees from abroad will adapt to their new surroundings.

Hotel managers need to know all the issues facing expats and be prepared to assess the job fit and other items required to make a foreign assignment successful. Figure 17-1 will be helpful in developing answers. ..

Chapter 17: Managing Global Human Resources

17-12

17-20. In previous chapters you recommended various human resource practices Hotel Paris should use. Choose one of these, and explain why you believe they could take this program abroad, and how you suggest they do so.

Answers will vary widely. Instructors should look for solid, text-based justification of answers given.

17-21. Choose one Hotel Paris human resources practice that you believe is essential to the company specifically for achieving its high-quality-service goal, and explain how you would implement that practice in the firm’s various hotels worldwide.

Answers will vary widely. Instructors should look for solid, text-based justification of answers given.

Key Terms: International Human Resource Management (IHRM) – The human resource management concepts and techniques employers use to manage the human resource challenges of their international operations.

Works Councils – Formal, employee-elected groups of worker representatives.

Codetermination – Employees have the legal right to a voice in setting company policies.

Expatriates (expats) – Non-citizens of the countries in which employees are working.

Parent or Home-Country Nationals – Citizens of the country in which the multinational company has its headquarters.

Third-Country Nationals – Citizens of a country other than the parent or the host-country.

Locals – Citizens of the countries in which employees are working; also called host-country nationals.

Ethnocentric – The notion that home-country attitudes, management style, knowledge, evaluation criteria, and managers are superior to anything the host-country has to offer.

Polycentric – A conscious belief that only the host-country managers can ever really understand the culture and behavior of the host-country market.

Global – The global company aims to attract the best candidates globally, includ- ing freely using third-country nationals to staff its positions around the world with the best people available.

..

Chapter 17: Managing Global Human Resources

17-13

Virtual Teams – Groups of geographically dispersed coworkers who interact using a combination of telecommunications and information technologies to accomplish an organizational task.

Adaptability Screening – A process that aims to assess the assignee’s (and spouse’s) probable success in handling a foreign transfer.

Foreign Service Premiums – Financial payments over and above regular base pay, typically ranging between 10% and 30% of base pay.

Hardship Allowances – Payments that compensate expatriates for exceptionally hard living and working conditions at certain locations.

Mobility Premiums – Typically, lump-sum payments to reward employees for moving from one assignment to another.

..

Part Five Enrichment Topics in Human Resource Management Chapter 18 Managing Human Resources in Small and Entrepreneurial Firms

Lecture Outline: The Small Business Challenge How Small Business Human Resource Management Is Different Diversity Counts: Necessity and the Entrepreneur Why HRM Is Important to Small Business Using Internet and Government Tools to Support the HR Effort Government Tools for Complying with Employment Laws Online Employment Planning and Recruiting Tools Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media Small Business Employee Selection Tools Improving Performance: The Strategic Context Small Business Training Tools Employment Appraisal and Compensation Online Tools Employment Safety and Health Tools Leveraging Small Size with Familiarity, Flexibility, Fairness, and Informality Simple, Informal Employee Selection Procedures Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses Flexibility in Training Flexibility in Benefits and Rewards Fairness and the Family Business Using Professional Employer Organizations How Do PEOs Work?

Why Use a PEO? What is the Alternative?

Managing HR Systems, Procedures, and Paperwork Introduction Basic Components of Manual HR Systems Automating Individual HR Tasks Human Resource Information Systems (HRIS) Improved Transaction Processing Online Self-Processing Improved Reporting Capability HR System Integration ..

Chapter 18: Managing Human Resources in Small and Entrepreneurial Firms

18-2

HRIS Vendors Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media Chapter Review

Where Are We Now… The main purpose of this chapter is to help you apply what you know about human resource management to running a small business. The main topics we’ll address include the small business challenge; using Internet, government, and other tools to support the HR effort; leveraging small size with familiarity, flexibility, fairness, and informality; using professional employer organizations; and managing HR systems, procedures, and paperwork.

Interesting Issues: San Francisco-based apparel company Everlane’s strategy involves building its brand around ethical manufacturing and transparency in all they do. For example their Web site shows photos of the factories abroad that make their clothes, they give voice to the factories’ workers, and they list for every item its costs, so you can better judge the worth of what you’re buying. A strategy like that requires a set of recruitment, selection, and compensation practices that fit. We’ll see what they did.

Learning Objectives: 18-1. Explain why HRM is important to small businesses and how small business HRM is different from that in large businesses.

18-2. Give four examples of how entrepreneurs can use Internet and government tools to support the HR effort.

18-3. List five ways entrepreneurs can use their small size to improve their HR processes.

18-4. Discuss how you would choose and deal with a professional employer organization.

18-5. Describe how you would create a start-up human resource system for a new small business.

Annotated Outline: I.

The Small Business Challenge A. How Small Business Human Resource Management Is Different – managing human resources in small firms is different for four main reasons: size, priorities, informality, and the entrepreneur.

1. Size – the general guideline is that it’s not until a company reaches the 100-employee milestone that it can afford a human resource specialist. However, even five- to six-employee

..

Chapter 18: Managing Human Resources in Small and Entrepreneurial Firms

18-3

organizations must recruit, select, train, compensate, and retain qualified staff.

2. Priorities – it is not just size but business realities of the entrepreneur’s situation that drive them to focus their time on non-HR issues.

3. Informality – human resources management activities tend to be more informal in smaller firms. Entrepreneurs must be able to react quickly to changes in competitive conditions.

4. The Entrepreneur – entrepreneurs are people who create businesses under risky conditions, and starting new businesses from scratch is always risky. Entrepreneurs therefore need to be highly dedicated and visionary and somewhat controlling.

5. Implications – the differences listed above result in potential implications: 1) Inadequate human resource practices may put small business owners at legal risk.

2) Not having a dedicated HR person can slow company decisions and overwhelm its managers.

3) Without human resource information systems, paperwork is time consuming, and duplication may create data entry errors.

4) If the small business can’t efficiently hire, train, appraise, and compensate employees, how will it compete with companies that can? It could be at a competitive disadvantage.

B. Diversity Counts: Necessity and the Entrepreneur – more men than women start new businesses, but according to one study, about 100 million women in 59 countries still started new businesses in one recent year. Interestingly, most of the women who did start businesses were not in the developed world. The most likely countries for women to start businesses were in Latin America and sub-Saharan Africa. This may be because in developed economies, women have more career options. In developing economies such as Ghana, necessity infuses a confidence that drives more women to make it on their own.

C. Why HRM Is Important to Small Business – start-ups can’t assume that all they need is an employee handbook; they also need a functioning HR system. Small firms with effective HR practices perform better than those with less effective practices. For small firms, effective human resource management is also required for getting and keeping big customers.

II.

Using Internet and Government Tools to Support the HR Effort A. Complying with Employment Laws – small business owners spend much of their time tackling issues related to employment laws. These owners can quickly find the answers to many such questions online at federal agencies’ Web sites such as the following: 1. DOL Online Elaws Advisors – the U.S. Department of Labor’s First Step “elaws Advisors” (www.DOL.gov/elaw/firststep); helps small employers determine which laws apply to their business (e.g., for laws coveringmatters like pay and benefits, and health and safety.)

..

Chapter 18: Managing Human Resources in Small and Entrepreneurial Firms

18-4

2. EEOC Online Tools – the U.S. Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (www.EEOC.gov/employers); guides small employers on all laws pertaining to employment discrimination.

3. OSHA Online Tools – the DOL’s Occupational Safety and Health Administration site (www.OSHA.gov); supplies guidance for small business owners on practical information including industry-specific safety and accident checklists.

B. Online Employment Planning and Recruiting – Internet resources such as the Department of Labor O*NET (http://online.onetcenter.org) can make small business owners as effective as their large competitors at writing job descriptions and building applicant pools. Small business owners can use the online recruiting tools to post positions on popular Internet job boards.

C. Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media D. Small Business Employment Selection Tools –some tests are so easy to use they are particularly good for smaller firms. One example of such a test is the Wonderlic Personnel Test, which measures general mental ability, and the Predictive Index, which measures work-related personality traits, drives, and behaviors – in particular, dominance, extroversion, patience, and blame avoidance.

E. Improving Performance: The Strategic Context F. Small Business Training Tools– although small companies can’t compete with the training resources of larger organizations, online training can provide, at a relatively low cost, the kinds of professional employee training that was formerly beyond most small employers’ reach.

1. Private Vendors – the small business owner can tap hundreds of suppliers of prepackaged training solutions.

2. Online learning platforms like Docebo’s (www.docebo.com/) make it easy for a company’s employees to access off-the-shelf and customized online learning courses and programs.

3. NAM – the National Association of Manufacturers (NAM) is the largest industrial organization in the United States. NAM’s Virtual University (www.namvu.com) helps employees maintain and upgrade their work skills and continue their professional development.

G. Employment Appraisal and Compensation Online Tools – even small employers now have easy access to computerized and online appraisal and compensation services. Lack of easy access to salary surveys once made it difficult and time consuming for smaller businesses to fine tune their pay scales.

H. Employment Safety and Health Tools – without human resource managers or safety departments, small businesses often don’t know where to turn to for advice on promoting employee safety. OSHA provides free on-site safety and health services for small businesses. The OSHA Sharp program is a certification process through which OSHA certifies that small employers have achieved commendable levels of safety awareness.

..

Chapter 18: Managing Human Resources in Small and Entrepreneurial Firms

18-5

III.

Leveraging Small Size with Familiarity, Flexibility, Fairness, and Informality A. Simple Informal Employee Selection Procedures – in general, small firms tend to rely on more informal employee selection and recruitment practices, such as employee referrals and unstructured interviews, than do large firms. Work sampling tests require candidates to perform actual samples of the job in question. This can also be a very simple way to select employees.

B. Improving Performance: HR Tools for Line Managers and Small Businesses C. Flexibility in Training – small companies typically take a more informal approach to training and development. Smaller firms also tend to focus any management development training on learning specific firm-related skills.

D. Flexibility in Benefits and Rewards – The Family and Work Institute surveyed the benefits practices of about 1,000 small and large companies. They found that large firms offer more extensive benefit packages than small ones do.

However, many small firms seemed to overcome their bigger competitors by offering more flexibility.

1. Simple Retirement Benefits – there are several ways for small firms to provide retirement plans. The SIMPLE (savings incentive match plan for employees) IRA plan is inexpensive and simple.

E. Fairness and the Family Business – most small businesses are family businesses, in that the owner and one or more managers are family members.

Being a nonfamily employee here isn’t always easy. They sometimes feel like outsiders. Some best practices to avoid partiality include setting ground rules, treating people fairly, confronting family issues, and erasing privilege.

IV.

Using Professional Employer Organizations A. How Do PEO’s Work? – these vendors range from payroll companies to those that handle all of an employer’s human resource management requirements.

PEOs basically are your “HR office,” but your employees still work for you.

B. Why Use a PEO? – employers turn to PEO’s for several reasons: 1. Inadequate human resource practices may put small business owners at legal risk.

2. Not having a dedicated HR person can slow down company decision making and overwhelm its managers.

3. Without human resource information systems, paperwork duplication is time consuming and creates data entry errors.

4. If the small business can’t efficiently hire, train, appraise, and compensate employees, it may find itself at a competitive disadvantage. However, insurance and benefits are often the big PEO attraction. Getting health and other insurance is often a problem for smaller firms.

C. Caveats – many employers view their human resource management processes as a strategic advantage, and they are not inclined to turn over strategysensitive tasks like screening and training to third-party firms. Getting health insurance through the PEO has downsides: 1. If the PEO goes out of business, clients must replace their insurance.

2. If the PEO switches insurance plans, employees may dislike the new providers.

..

Chapter 18: Managing Human Resources in Small and Entrepreneurial Firms

18-6

3. There can be tax disadvantages, V.

Managing HR Systems, Procedures, and Paperwork A. Introduction – recruiting and hiring an employee might require a help wanted advertising listing, an employment application, an interviewing checklist, and the verification of education and immigration status. Much is required to run the human resources management part of the business. This list barely scratches the surface of the policies, procedures, and paperwork you’ll need to run the human resource management part of a business.

B. Basic Components of Manual HR Systems – very small employers will probably start with a manual human resource management system. This would include obtaining and organizing a set of standardized personnel forms covering each important aspect of HR. 1. Basic Forms – forms that should be considered include an application, reference check, employee record, performance evaluation, vacation request, corrective counseling, and exit interview. One simple way to obtain the basic forms of a manual HR system is from Web sites (www.hr.com/en/free_forms), books, or CDs. 2. Other Sources – several direct-mail catalog companies offer a variety of HR Materials. Firms such as HRdirect (www.hrdirect.com).

3. There are also various legal-compliance forms, including standardized Harassment Policy and FMLA Notice forms, as well as posters (for instance, covering legally required postings for matters such as the Americans with Disabilities Act and Occupational Safety and Health Act) available.

C. Automating Individual HR Tasks – as the small business grows, it becomes impractical to rely on manual HR systems. It is as this point that most small-to medium-sized firms should consider computerizing individual human resource management tasks.

1. Packaged Systems – there are a variety of resources available. Websites such as www.capterra.com/, itemize HR software available from vendors such as Zenefits. These vendors provide software solutions for virtually all personnel tasks.

D. Human Resource Information Systems (HRIS) – unifies HR management processes such as applicant tracking, hiring, training, performance management, benefits administration, and payroll into one automated system.

E. Improved Transaction Processing – HRIS packages substitute powerful computerized processing for a wide range of the firm’s HR transactions.

F. Online Self-Processing – HR information systems make it possible to make the company’s employee part of the HRIS. For example, an organization can allow employees to self-enroll in all desired benefit programs.

G. Improved Reporting Capability – the HRIS system integrates numerous individual HR tasks, thereby increasing HR’s reporting capabilities.

H. HR System Integration – when the HRIS software components, such as payroll record keeping, appraisals, and so forth, are integrated, the employer can dramatically reengineer its HR function.

..

Chapter 18: Managing Human Resources in Small and Entrepreneurial Firms

18-7

I. HRIS Vendors – the Web site for the International Association for Human Resource Information Management (www.ihrim.org) provides a comprehensive list of HR vendors.

Considerations in choosing a software vendor: 1. Does the software provide software-as-a-service (SAaS) capability, or must it be managed on the company’s in-house servers?

2. Does the package provide an intuitive user interface?

3. Can you integrate it with existing HR systems?

4. Security—mainly protecting personal data—is essential.

J. Trends Shaping HR: Digital and Social Media

Chapter Review Chapter Section Summaries: 18-1. Many people reading this book will work for or own their own small business, so it’s important to understand the small business challenge.

18-2. Being small, small businesses can particularly capitalize on freely available Internet and government tools to support their HR efforts.

18-3. Small businesses need to capitalize on their strengths, and in this case, it means capitalizing on familiarity, flexibility, and informality.

18-4. After reviewing all the challenges of managing human resources, many small business owners turn to using professional employer organizations.

18-5. Small business managers need to understand how their HR systems, procedures, and paperwork will evolve.

Discussion Questions: 18-1. How and why is HR in small businesses different than that in large firms?

Human resource management activities tend to be more informal in smaller firms. For example, one study analyzed training practices in about 900 family and non-family small companies. Training tended to be informal, with an emphasis, for instance, on methods like coworker and supervisor on-the-job training. Such informality isn’t just due to lack of expertise and resources; it is also partly a matter of survival. Entrepreneurs must be able to react quickly to changes in competitive conditions.

18-2. Explain why HRM is important to small businesses.

Student responses will vary. Without effective human resource management, small business owners run the risk that they’ll be at a competitive disadvantage or that without the necessary HR expertise, they may commit mistakes that lead to litigation.

..

Chapter 18: Managing Human Resources in Small and Entrepreneurial Firms

18-8

18-3. Explain and give at least five examples of ways entrepreneurs can use small size— familiarity, flexibility, and informality—to improve their HR processes.

Small business owners spend much of their time tackling legal issues. These small business owners can quickly find answers to many such questions online at the following: The Department of Labor or DOL.gov, the EEOC or EEOC.gov, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration or OSHA.gov, and the Society of Human Resource Management or SHRM.org.

18-4. Describe with examples how you would create a startup, paper-based human resource system for a new small business.

Student responses will vary. Consider the paperwork required to run a five-person retail shop. Just to start with, recruiting and hiring an employee might require a help-wanted advertising listing, an employment application, an interviewing checklist, various verifications—of education and immigration status, for instance—and a telephone reference checklist. You then might need an employment agreement, confidentiality and noncompetition agreements, and an employer indemnity agreement. To process the new employee, you might need a background verification, a new employee checklist, and forms for withholding tax and to obtain new employee data. And to keep track of the employee once on board, you’d need a personnel data sheet, daily and weekly time records, an hourly employee’s weekly time sheet, and an expense report. Then come performance appraisal forms, a disciplinary notice, an employee orientation record, separation notice, and employment reference response. In fact, this list barely scratches the surface of the policies, procedures, and paperwork needed to run the human resource management part of a business.

Individual and Group Activities: 18-5. Form teams of five or six persons, each with at least one person who owns or has worked for a small business. Based on their experiences, make a list of the “inadequate-HR risks” the business endured, in terms of competitive disadvantage, lack of specialized HR expertise, workplace litigation, compensation laws compliance, and paperwork/data-entry errors.

Lack of effective and sophisticated recruitment strategies, additional legal issues due to lack of HR expertise, lack of training which may lead to employment discrimination or sexual harassment claims, small business may not comply with complex regulations and laws, lack of an HRIS system may lead to more timely processing of data as well as more manual errors.

..

Chapter 18: Managing Human Resources in Small and Entrepreneurial Firms

18-9

18-6. You own a small business, and you are confused about which of your employees is eligible for overtime pay. The employees in question include your secretary, two accounting clerks, one engineer, and two inside salespeople. Individually or in groups of four or five students, use the DOL’s Overtime Security Advisor and DOL’s Calculator to determine who gets overtime pay.

The secretary and two accounting clerks should be classified as non-exempt, and the engineer and two inside salespeople should be classified as exempt.

18-7. You have about 32 employees working in your factory. Working individually or in teams of four or five students, find and create a list of five online sources you could use to provide training to them, at no cost to you or to them.

Here are 5 to start: www.DOL.gov, www.strategichr.com, www.ASTD.org, www.legalworkplace.com, and www.articlebased.com.

18-8. Appendices A and B at the end of this book list the knowledge someone studying for the HRCI (Appendix A) or SHRM (Appendix B) certification exam needs to have in each area of human resource management (such as in Strategic Management and Workforce Planning). In groups of several students, do four things: (1) review Appendix A and/or B; (2) identify the material in this chapter that relates to the Appendix A and/or B required knowledge lists; (3) write four multiple-choice exam questions on this material that you believe would be suitable for inclusion in the HRCI exam and/or SHRM exam; and (4) if time permits, have someone from your team post your team’s questions in front of the class, so that students in all teams can answer the exam questions created by the other teams.

The material from this chapter that is applicable to the certification exams would include: the HR challenges of small businesses, how small organizational differences affect HRM, how to implement a small business, HR system, staffing the small organization, and training and maintaining employees of small businesses.

Experiential Exercise: Building an HRIS Purpose: The purpose of this exercise is to give you practice in creating a human resource management system (HRIS).

Required Understanding: You should be fully acquainted with the material in this chapter.

How to Set up the Exercise/Instructions: Divide the class into teams of several students. Each team will need access to the Internet. Assume that the owners of a small business come to you with the following problem. They have a company with less than 40 employees. They have been taking care of all HR paperwork informally, mostly on slips of paper and with memos. They want you to supply them with a human resource management information system – how computerized it is will be up to you, but they can only afford a budget of $5,000 upfront (not

..

Chapter 18: Managing Human Resources in Small and Entrepreneurial Firms

18-10

counting your consulting), and then about $500 per year for maintenance. You know from your HR training that there are various sources of paper-based and online systems. Write a two-page proposal telling them exactly what your team would suggest, based on its accumulated existing knowledge, and from online research.

Application Case: Netflix Breaks the Rules In many respects, the Netflix HR strategy seems like a dream come true for small businesses.

You don’t need a pay plan; instead, you just update each person’s pay every few months based on market surveys. You offer no training and development. And you don’t track vacation time, more or less. If someone’s not doing well, you just pay him or her to leave, with no hassles.

Netflix seems to have hit upon its own version of “Netflix High-Performance Work Practices.”

Given that, answer the following questions (please be specific).

18-9. What (if anything) is it about Netflix that makes its HR practices work for it?

Student answers will vary and may include a discussion of the company’s culture. The culture is such that people are treated as adults and are able to “police themselves.”

Everyone understands that not performing up to the company’s expectations will result in termination. Frequent pay raises and the constant updating to stay competitive with the market helps to keep motivation high.

18-10. Would you suggest using similar practices in other businesses, such as, say, a new restaurant? Why? Student answers will vary, but look for their arguments to be grounded in logical arguments to support their viewpoint.

18-11. List the criteria you would use for deciding whether another company is right for Netflix-type HR practices.

Criteria may include looking at the following areas: the current compensation system (Does the company pay at or above market wages?), the strength of the corporate ethical culture (Companies who are to be successful at this type of HR system must be highly ethical and as they must, to a certain degree, be honest and open about the work they are doing.), and the organization needs to be one where individuals can work independently of one another so to maintain workflow and quality while dealing with such extreme flexibility in the scheduling.

18-12. What argument would you make in response to the following: “Netflix just lucked out; they would have done even better with conventional HR practices?”

Student answers will vary. Either side is debatable, so look for students to defend their arguments with logical arguments from the book.

..

Chapter 18: Managing Human Resources in Small and Entrepreneurial Firms

18-11

Continuing Case: Carter Cleaning Company – Cleaning in Challenging Times 18-13. Assume that we don’t want to terminate any of our employees. What workscheduling related changes could we make that would reduce our payrolls by, say, 20% per week but still keep all our employees on board?

One of the benefits of a small employer is the ability to adapt to changing market conditions. Therefore, flexible work scheduling could be easily implemented to cover all required costs while keeping staffing costs at a minimum. Even offering the staff the option to take time without pay could prove beneficial to the employer while maintaining current staffing levels.

18-14. We are currently handling most of our personnel-related activities, such as sign-ons, benefits administration, and appraisals, manually. What specific suggestions would you have for us in terms of using software systems to automate our HR processes?

A packaged system would probably prove cost effective for this size employer. These types of systems offer programs for controlling attendance, maintaining employee records, writing job descriptions, and other HR-related requirements.

18-15. Suggest at least five free Internet-based sources we could turn to for helping us to lower our total employment costs.

The International Association for Human Resource Information Management (www.ihrim.org), the Small Business Administration (www.sba.gov), the U.S. Department of Labor’s – First Step Law Advisor (www.dol.gov/elaws/firstep), OSHA’s Small Business Handbook (www.osha.gov), and the National Association of Manufacturers (www.namvu.com).

Hotel Paris: Improving Performance at the Hotel Paris – The New HRIS 18-16. Using any benchmark data that you can find, including information from this book, what are some benchmark metrics that Lisa could be using to assess the efficiency of her human resource management operations? To what extent does the Hotel Paris’s quality service orientation enter into how Lisa’s metrics should compare?

Lisa should consider looking at benchmarking data on the following HR activities: benefits, work schedules/locations, compensation options, workforce demographics, training, development, and technology. Lisa should review carefully the Hotel Paris’s quality service orientation as it compares to her metrics to determine the cost effectiveness of each activity.

..

Chapter 18: Managing Human Resources in Small and Entrepreneurial Firms

18-12

18-17. Throughout this book, we’ve discussed various specific examples of how human resource management departments have been reducing the cost of delivering their services. Keeping in mind the Hotel Paris’s service quality orientation, please list and explain with examples how Lisa Cruz could use at least five of these.

Information technology could greatly help Lisa reduce the human resource administration’s current costs; in addition, Lisa could look at the resources available from the Small Business Administration as well as the Department of Labor. Also, Lisa could consider outsourcing some of the more costly HR activities to a PEO. 18-18. Focusing only on human resource information systems for a moment, what sorts of systems would you suggest Lisa consider recommending for the Hotel Paris? Why? A packaged program would prove the most cost effective for the Hotel Paris. Online selfprocessing should prove especially beneficial to Lisa in order to help improve efficiency, accuracy, and cost reductions.

18-19. Explain with detailed examples how Lisa can use free online and governmental sources to accomplish at least part of what you propose in your previous answers.

Lisa could review the resources offered from the Small Business Administration as well as the Department of Labor.

18-20. Give three examples of fee-based online tools you suggest Lisa use.

Transaction-processing systems, management information systems, and executive support systems 18-21. Based on what you read in this chapter, do you suggest Lisa use a PEO? Why? Lisa should consider the use of a PEO for at least some of her HR programs. For example, payroll and benefits administration could prove very cost effective for Lisa since her HR costs are currently running 30% higher than comparable organizations.

Very often PEO’s can offer comprehensive services at competitive fees.

..

Bandag Automotive 16e Case Notes: This case highlights some of the challenges a growing company faces, in particular when there is a change in leadership. Bandag Automotive is a family-owned business that has recently shifted leadership from Jim’s father to Jim. Jim’s focus on the bottom line ignores some of the long-term costs of poor human resource (HR) management practices. In the absence of a leader with HR expertise, Jim faces several employment related legal challenges including those involving the Americans with Disabilities Act and the Family Medical Leave Act. Jim also cut benefit offerings in the interest of cost savings without exploring the impact on the organizational culture and employee performance.

Questions: B-1. Given Bandag’s size, and anything else you know about it, should we reorganize the human resource management function, and if so, why and how?

With over 300 employees, Bandag Automotive should have one or more full-time HR professionals to manage HR practices. Many of the organization’s legal challenges have occurred because of a lack of expertise in understanding potential liability issues.

Further, some expertise in employee benefits could assist Bandag in evaluating the value and utilization of employee benefits and making appropriate recommendations.

Compensation expertise could also contribute to cost efficiency in salary administration.

Finally, if employees had an HR professional to share concerns with, the company might be able to avoid some potential challenges.

Students may come up with a variety of structures that involve the additions of 2 or 3 professionals. Hiring internal HR staff will likely provide significant cost savings over the current practices. However one alternative to hiring an HR team is for Bandag to consider bringing in a PEO, and to outsource all or most of its HR tasks to it. Jim’s strengths don’t seem to lie in dealing with human relations type problems, so this could be worth considering, although as the Dessler text explains, PEO’s have not just advantages but disadvantages. Either way, Jim has to do something.

B-2. What, if anything, would you do to change and/or improve upon the current HR systems, forms, and practices that we now use?

There are several opportunities for change or improvement in the company’s current HR processes. Some possible examples: • Realistically, with 300 employees, it’s not likely Jim can address this without expert assistance. To improve efficiency and to reduce legal liability, arguably the place to start is by hiring an HR manager (or retaining a PEO). Other changes/improvements should include: • Customizing the HR forms used to Bandag’s needs instead of using generic

forms. However with 300 employees, there is little doubt that Bandag has to get its HR forms, data, and systems computerized and/or online, using one or more of the types of systems the Dessler textbook describes.

• A more formalized process to evaluate the external competitiveness of salary.

The company could also establish formal salary grades (a salary structure) to ensure more effective salary administration.

• A formal review of benefits offered to ensure benefits, such as time-off and flexibility, are meeting employee needs without unnecessary costs to the company. Indeed, if you covered Dessler Chapter 18, one strength of a smaller business such as Bandag is its ability to take a more flexible approach when it comes to things such as benefits.

B-3. Do you think that the employee whom Jim fired for creating what the manager called a poisonous relationship has a legitimate claim against us, and if so, why and what should we do about it?

Employers in the United States can generally dismiss employees “at will”, but within a system of legal, contractual, and public policy constraints. This employee possibly had a mental illness and so might file a claim under the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).

Courts would not agree that the ADA protects a violent worker, or, probably, one who is excessively argumentative and disruptive. However, it is not clear here if the employee is so argumentative or disruptive (let alone “poisonous”) to be considered irredeemable.

Bandag is probably within its rights to terminate this employee. However if it had carefully evaluated the situation it could have reduced the possibility of legal action. The company should have determined if the employee’s behavior reflects an illness considered a disability under the ADA. If it was a disability, then the question is whether they could reasonably accommodate the employee without undue hardship. Allowing the behavior to continue if it disrupts the workplace significantly would probably be considered an undue hardship.

B-4. Is it true that we really had to put Gavin back into an equivalent position, or was it adequate to just bring him back into a job at the same salary, bonuses, and benefits as he had before his leave?

The Family Medical Leave Act (FMLA) requires that employees be returned to the same or equivalent positon. Generally this has been interpreted to mean not just pay and benefits, but also things such as the job’s duties, responsibilities, privileges, working conditions, and skill requirements. So, while pay is important, other components of the job should have been be considered as well.

B-5. Miriam, the controller, is basically claiming that the company is retaliating against her for being pregnant, and that the fact that we raised performance issues was just a smokescreen. Do you think the EEOC and/or courts would agree with her, and, in any case, what should we do now?

They could. The case does not note if Miriam had any history of performance problems, but it suggests that she did not. If she was terminated without any warning about her

performance, there is a strong likelihood that the EEOC and the courts may agree with her, particularly given the timing of her termination right after her leave and request for a flexible work schedule. For defense against this claim, the company should be ready to provide documentation on the performance deficiencies that led to her termination. It is also important to establish and follow a progressive disciplinary system in order to defend the company against future claims. As or more important would be establishing procedures and training to ensure that supervisors do not violate antidiscrimination laws.

B-6. An employee who is deaf has asked us to be one of our delivery people and we turned him down. He’s now threatening to sue. What should we do, and why?

The company needs to consider the employee for the position. The company cannot automatically bar the candidate because he is deaf. While the employee does have protection under the ADA because he is deaf, the company needs to determine if he is qualified to do the job with or without a reasonable accommodation.

They need to evaluate him individually to see if his hearing impairment would create an undue hardship for the company by creating a safety concern.

B-7. In the previous 10 years, we’ve had only one equal employment complaint, and now in the last few years we’ve had four or five. What should I do about it? Why? Clearly Jim’s approach to management is creating some of the legal problems the company is now facing. Implementing more formal HR policies and practices will help the company avoid future legal liability. Further, hiring a trained HR professional will ensure that decisions are made with appropriate consideration of legal liabilities. Jim’s interest in boosting revenues and profits is probably best served by spending what is necessary to have an HR team.

BP Texas City 16e Case Notes: This case emphasizes the importance of health and safety in the workplace. The case shares insights on several safety failures at BP, and in particular at the Texas City facility. In addition to discussing safety programs, the case explores the role company leadership plays in creating a safety culture. The case emphasizes the importance of all aspects of safety from policies and practices to organizational commitment to creating a safe work environment. The case also introduces the ethical implications of safety efforts at an organization.

Questions: B-22. The text defines ethics as “the principles of conduct governing an individual or a group,” and specifically as the standards one uses to decide what his or her conduct should be. To what extent do you believe that what happened at BP is as much a breakdown in the company’s ethical systems as it is in its safety systems, and how would you defend your conclusion?

The case explores both the safety systems as well as the management practices that led to the problems at BP. An effective safety policy starts with top management.

Management must not only implement policies to narrowly comply with the law, but also create a safety culture.

This case does raise concerns of the ethical systems at BP. Ethics always involves questions of what is right and moral, given the standards of society. In this case one can argue that the principles guiding the conduct of BP’s top management were focused more on cost cutting than on the possible employee safety implications of that management behavior.

Cutting costs is certainly important, but doing so without regard to sufficient focus on safety creates ethical questions. Students could cite several examples from the case of deficiencies in safety practices that BP management was aware of but did not address.

B-23. Are the Occupational Safety and Health Administration’s standards, policies, and rules aimed at addressing problems like the ones that apparently existed at the Texas City plant? If so, how would you explain the fact that problems like these could have continued for so many years?

As with any rules or laws, the occupational safety and health act’s rules by themselves are of little effect in the face of the sorts of “tolerance of noncompliance” that is said to have existed at BP during these (and previous) years. The idea that “safety starts at the top” may seem theoretical. However it is clear from this case that neither some employees’ good intentions, nor occupational safety rules, will have much effect if the company’s top management doesn’t make it clear that it values and rewards safe behavior.

How this could have gone on for so long is a good question. BP’s Texas City plant for instance had an average of one employee death every 16 months for thirty years. One

early (2003) external audit noted the insufficient focus on safety related matters and the company’s “checkbook” mentality. The case notes that BP did improve things such as accident rates, but that the “tone” at the top of BP simply did not sufficiently focus of the importance of safety and of the overall safety process.

B-24. Since there were apparently at least three deaths in the year prior to the major explosion, and an average of about one employee death per 16 months for the previous 10 years, how would you account for the fact that mandatory OSHA inspections missed these glaring sources of potential catastrophic events?

There are a variety of challenges that OSHA faces in trying to enforce safety laws in a large organization such as BP. The primary challenge for OSHA is a limited number of inspectors available to conduct complete inspections. Often inspections are done in response to accidents and as a result, are relatively narrow in scope. Such inspections may not explore all of the potential hazards. Further, OSHA inspections do not typically emphasize the safety culture or management decision-making processes that have led to many of BP’s problems.

B-25. The text lists numerous suggestions for “how to prevent accidents.” Based on what you know about the Texas City explosion, what do you say Texas City tells you about the most important three steps an employer can take to prevent accidents?

All of the suggestions in the text are important and a student might include any of them.

However, creating a safety culture at BP’s top, including BP’s board of directors, is clearly a priority. Creating a supportive environment is also important: BP can have the right equipment and train employees in safe behaviors, but if managers and supervisors are not supportive of creating a safe workplace, then safety policies may not (and probably will not) be followed. Finally, conducting internal audits helps identify safety concerns and demonstrates the importance of safety. Given all that has transpired BP’s board should be getting these audit results.

B-26. Based on what you learned in Chapter 14, would you make any additional recommendations to BP over and above those recommendations made by the Baker panel and the CSB? If so, what would those recommendations be?

Students might come up with a variety of ideas. Since the suggestions provided by these panels are thorough, students are likely to come up with more specific ideas. For example, while the panel suggested involving stakeholders in safety, a more operational suggestion would be to use employee-run safety committees, and/or a suggestion system. Company leadership should make safety a priority by investing significant financial resources into safety programs. The company should also upgrade all of their equipment to the newer and/or safer models.

B-27. Explain specifically how strategic human resource management at BP seems to have supported the company’s broader strategic aims. What does this say about the

advisability of always linking human resource strategy to a company’s strategic aims?

It’s probably not the “advisability of always linking human resource strategy to a company’s strategic aims” that was the problem here, but rather the incompleteness of those strategic goals. BP would have benefited from emphasizing as part of its strategy that it also valued its employees’ and other stakeholders’ health and safety. In the absence of that, management focused exclusively, or almost exclusively on meeting revenue and profit goals, and it did achieve those narrow goals. This points up the importance of fiving HR a “seat at the table” when the strategy is drawn up.

Google 16e Case Notes: This case highlights the human resource management (HR) practices at Google that are integral to the company’s long-term success. The case illustrates specific components of Google’s HR strategy and also provides insights on some of the challenges Google faces as it continues to grow. Specifically the case explores the company’s benefits, pay, hiring, employee development, and employee retention practices. The challenges shared include those related to the need to shift hiring practices as a company grows, maintaining a strong company culture, and internationalization.

Questions: B-12. What do you think of the idea of Google correlating personal traits from the employees’ answers on the survey to their performance, and then using that as the basis for screening job candidates? In other words, is it or is it not a good idea? Please explain your answer.

Hiring practices are clearly integral to Google’s success. Google depends on the talent of its’ employees to maintain the company’s competitiveness. It uses its selection process to identify the talent with the traits that Google knows has historically helped it succeed. As the company grows, their intensive interview process has become difficult to maintain. Thus, an assessment that can screen candidates based on these important traits will help more efficiently evaluate candidates.

However, there are legal implications in using tests (and all screening tools, including interviews) in hiring. Therefore, the company needs to make sure that any test used is reliable and valid. The process of correlating (1) the personal traits that the employees reported to (2) their performance, is an important step in determining the criterion validity of such as assessment. Thus, this process is a good idea, both to improve its selection process and to help make sure the test would be valid.

B-13. The benefits that Google pays obviously represent an enormous expense. Based on what you know about Google and on what you read in this text, how would you defend all these benefits if you’re making a presentation to the security analysts who were analyzing Google’s performance?

Employee benefits are an important component of the total rewards an organization offers its employees. Google makes a significant investment in benefits and the benefits provided help to create its unique and creative company culture, and to keep the company competitive in recruiting and retaining top talent. Top talent and culture are both critical for executing the company’s overall strategy.

Google can use metrics to demonstrate this value to security analysts. Strategy-based metrics, for example, focus on measuring how activities help achieve organizational goals. In this case, Google might demonstrate how the employee benefits

contribute to attracting and retaining top talent, and to developing new products and services.

B-14. If you wanted to hire the brightest people around, how would you go about recruiting and selecting them?

Google seems to be doing a good job here. It has built a reputation as a great place for the brightest people to work. This brings them selection challenges, as they get millions of job applicants a year. Their intensive data-driven selection practices have therefore shifted over the years to accommodate screening those candidates. One thing that Google has done effectively is that they have established a brand image as an attractive workplace. Their benefits and work culture are known for inspiring creativity, and this attracts the bright candidates they are seeking.

A company should then use targeted outside sources of candidates to attract the brightest people. For example, a company can recruit on top college campuses, or ask current employees for referrals. Google is also using data analysis to better understand the traits and skills of their most effective employees and managers.

From a selection perspective, a company can use interviews and tests to select the brightest applicants. Structured interview processes that ask job-related questions can help identify the brightest candidates in the recruitment pool. Employee referrals help tap the networks of their current, successful workforce.

B-15. To support its growth and expansion strategy, Google wants (among other traits) people who are super-bright and who work hard, often round-the-clock, and who are flexible and maintain a decent work–life balance. List five specific HR policies or practices that you think Google has implemented or should implement to support its strategy, and explain your answer.

There are many HR policies or practices that can support its strategy to grow and expand with the support of super-bright, hardworking employees. Some examples include: Workplace policies that support a flexible and supportive work environment, such as flexible work hours and convenience services such as on-site cafeterias.

Employee benefits such as paid time-off, comprehensive healthcare insurance, and generous retirement benefits that help employees relieve stress.

Recruitment and selection practices that attract and select hard-working and smart employees.

Performance management systems that provide employees with valuable and developmental feedback.

Base and incentive pay plans that provide appropriate rewards to retain workers.

B-16. What sorts of factors do you think Google will have to take into consideration as it tries transferring its culture and reward systems and way of doing business to its operations abroad?

Google’s creative and flexible work environment may not be as accepted in different national cultures. Further, incentives and rewards may not be effective in different cultural contexts. For example, some cultures are less individualistic than the U.S., and thus, our individual incentive awards may not be as effective. Wide variances in the cost-of-living around the world also create challenges in establishing appropriate pay levels.

B-17. Given the sorts of values and culture Google cherishes, briefly describe four specific activities you suggest they pursue during new-employee orientation.

Just hiring the right employees will not ensure Google is successful. The onboarding or new-employee orientation process is important to socialize the employee into the organization’s culture and help them understand what workplace behaviors will help them be successful. Important goals of any orientation program include making the employee feel welcome, providing the basic information he or she needs, helping the person understand Google’s history and context, and socializing the person into Google’s way of doing things. Basic tasks would therefore include: A review of Google’s policies, including the Employee Handbook, so that the employee is aware of the benefits available, such as flexible work schedules.

A tour of the facility so that the new employee knows of all the facilities and benefits available.

An introduction to the employee’s new team and possibly some team-building activities to help them begin working with the team.

A review of incentive pay plans or other reward programs so that the employee understands what is rewarded.

In addition, presentations, videos, and discussions led by Google veterans describing the firm’s evolution and why there is a value placed on certain employee behaviors would be useful.

Muffler Magic 16e Case Notes: Muffler Magic examines some of the challenges of a growing company that has multiple locations. As a company expands, the human resource management (HR) practices need to adapt to the changing work environment. Growth for Muffler Magic has resulted in challenges such as poorer quality and lower productivity. As a result, the case provides an illustrative example on the relationship between HR practices and business profitability. In this case, expansion includes opening new locations, and thus, the process to ensure consistency in hiring and training practices becomes even more important. This case also examines the influence a compensation structure can have on the quality and quantity of work produced.

Questions: B-18. Write a one-page summary outline listing three or four recommendations you would make with respect to each HR function (recruiting, selection, training, and so on) that you think Ron Brown should be addressing with his HR manager.

First, students might ask if the HR manager is part of the problem. The fact that store managers now “…just hire anyone who seems to be breathing…” doesn’t say much for the HR systems this HR manager has put in place. Is the current HR manager up to the task? Also, in terms of benchmarks, one can expect about 1 to 1.4 HR professionals per 100 employees. Does Brown have enough HR coverage?

In any case, as a growing organization with several management challenges, there are a wide range of recommendations that could be addressed. Some examples include: Develop written job descriptions for each technician position.

Identify new recruitment sources for candidates such as trade schools or an employee referral program to find quality candidates.

Develop a more extensive selection process including work sample tests where the candidate could demonstrate their ability to complete a repair. Could also develop a structured interview guide that asks behavior-based questions.

Develop a new hire orientation process that provides a consistent orientation to company procedures.

Provide safety training to avoid accidents and injuries.

Improve on-the-job training and look for outside training programs to help build the skills of the technicians.

Implement a performance appraisal process to provide employees with developmental feedback.

Administer an attitude survey to understand reasons why employees leave to support the development of retention plans.

Implement incentive pay plans similar to those that the professor recommended.

Conduct a market analysis to examine the external competitiveness of the pay the company offers.

B-19. Develop a 10-question structured interview form Ron Brown’s service center

managers can use to interview experienced technicians.

Students could provide a wide variety of interview questions in response to this question. Some of the questions could be introductory to establish rapport. Others may be situational or behavior-based questions. All questions should correspond to the job description of a technician.

B-20.If you were Ron Brown, would you implement the professor’s recommendation addressing the presenteeism problem—in other words, start paying for sick days?

Why or why not?

Providing compensation for sick days is a valuable benefit for employees. Ron argues that a sick employee is at least somewhat productive. However, if the employee takes the day off to recover from his or her illness, the employee will likely return the next day at full productivity. If the employee works while he or she is sick, he or she is likely to be less productive for several days, and may make mistakes that require rework.

Further, when employees comes to work sick, they are likely to spread their illness to other workers which then leads to less productivity amongst others. However, if Ron does offer sick days, he should implement specific guidelines on the use of sick days to ensure that they are only used when an employee is actually sick.

B-21.If you were advising Ron Brown, would you recommend that he implement the professor’s skill-based pay and incentive pay plan as is? Why? Would you implement it with modifications? If you would modify it, please be specific about what you think those modifications should be, and why.

Overall the skill-based pay and incentive pay plans appear to be a good way to tie pay to performance and provide some incentive for employees to work productively. Skillbased pay can help motivate the technicians through paying them for the skills they are able to demonstrate, and reduce turnover amongst the most skilled employees. The incentive pay system seems to target improving overall team productivity. However, Ron may also want to consider individual incentive pay opportunities. For example, a standard hour pay plan could provide an incentive to complete jobs more efficiently. The company should conduct its own at least informal salary survey before making any such changes though, so as to ensure that its pay scales are both competitive and not excessive.

Angelo’s Pizza Case 16e Notes: Angleo’s Pizza explores the importance of establishing human resource (HR) practices as an organization expands. After success with one store, Angelo opens two new stores and is considering opening more stores or franchising. However, the case shares some of the HR challenges including high turnover and other staffing problems.

The case explores the need for structured orientation and training programs, as well as better recruitment and selection practices.

Questions: B-8. My strategy is to (hopefully) expand the number of stores and eventually franchise, while focusing on serving only high-quality fresh ingredients. What are three specific human resource management implications of my strategy (including specific policies and practices)?

Growth and expansion are central to Angelo’s strategy. There are several important HR implications of Angelo’s growth plans. These would include: •

An HR system. To expand and to successfully franchise his business, Angelo will surely have to systematize his processes, including his human resource management processes.

Doing so should arguably include investigating human resource management information systems options and installing such as system.

• Improved and consistent recruiting and selection practices. It is imperative that Angelo establish new sources of candidates, such as employee referrals. Small sidewalk businesses like this can and do use “Help Wanted” signs posted on their windows successfully, but he is also overdue for using online recruitment sources such as Indeed. He also needs to implement formal selection processes beyond informal interviews, possibly including testing. An assessment test to identify valued traits (such as honesty) and skills, and/or a structured interview process will benefit Angelo’s Pizza.

• A structured orientation and new hire training process. Much of Angelo’s turnover is caused by good workers who leave in frustration due to lack of training. Better training will lead to fewer errors, better quality pizza, fewer disgruntled employees, and improved employee retention.

• Establish management practices and training to support store managers.

Angelo needs some consistency to ensure each store is meeting his expectations in all aspects of hiring and managing workers and in achieving that store’s goals. Clarifying those goals and including them in a structured management training program can help support this need.

B-9. Identify and briefly discuss five specific human resource management errors that I’m currently making.

There are several errors that Angelo is making, including: • Failing to carefully evaluate applicants and basically hiring anyone that applies.

The poor selection process leads to poor hires that don’t work out for a variety of reasons.

• Providing very little training to new hires. These new hires either will not do their work properly, leading to poor quality products, or they will quit in frustration because they did not receive proper training.

• Not providing training to those that move into management positions. Managers are the key in opening new stores. Managers must be equipped with training on how to operate the stores and also on how to manage people.

• Using generic human resource employment application forms and no other forms or procedures. Angelo needs to use forms that ask relevant questions about working at his stores, such as schedule availability.

• Not providing feedback to employees about their performance. Providing formal feedback to employees is an important component in training employees on proper procedures to ensure quality.

B-10. Develop a structured interview form that we can use for hiring (1) store managers, (2) wait staff, and (3) counter people/pizza makers.

There are several interview questions that would be beneficial to the hiring process of each of these categories of workers. All interview questions should be related to the specific job and include questions that are based on job knowledge, situational or behavioral. Some sample questions for each category: Store Managers Store managers are responsible for hiring and training their own staff. Some potential questions for a store manager include: - Tell me about a time you had to address an employee problem.

- How would you organize the training of your new employees?

Wait Staff The wait staff needs to have strong customer service skills and be able to manage in a fast-paced environment. Some potential questions for the wait staff include: - Tell me about a time you had to deal with a difficult customer.

- Give me an example of a time you had to complete several tasks at the same time; how did you decide what to do first?

Counter People/Pizza Makers These employees need to also be customer-oriented and focused on quality. Some potential questions for counter people/pizza makers include: - Tell me about a time when you found a problem with a product, what did you do?

- If a customer returned a pizza and said it didn’t taste right, what would you do?

B-11. Based on what you know about Angelo’s, and what you know from having visited pizza restaurants, write a one-page outline showing specifically how you think Angelo’s should go about selecting employees.

There are many different strategies that a student could recommend. First, they should

identify several recruiting and selecting strategies. As Angelo notes, it is important to cast a wide net to yield better candidates. In addition to “Help Wanted” signs at the stores to attract local applicants, as might advertising with local high schools and colleges. Online platforms, as noted, are important. He could also provide bonus payments for employee referrals.

Careful screening of applicants is important. He first should create a custom employment application that asks relevant questions such as scheduling availability. A next step might include an assessment test to measure honesty or integrity, or possibly a personality test to assess ability to interact with customers. One or more interviews should be part of the process and they should use a structured interview format.

Next,, he should outline a background check process that includes verifying education, past employment, and speaking to references.

Finally, moving from paper system to online or at least computerized HR forms should be considered.